C60 Breaker Management Relay: UR Series Instruction Manual

Title Page
g
GE Industrial Systems
C60 Breaker Management Relay

UR Series Instruction Manual
C60 Revision: 3.3x
Manual P/N: 1601-0100-E2 (GEK-106406A)

Copyright © 2003 GE Multilin
834719A1.CDR
GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
EG
R
IS T E R E
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
Manufactured under an
ISO9000 Registered system.
Addendum
g
GE Industrial Systems
ADDENDUM
This Addendum contains information that relates to the C60 Breaker Management Relay relay, version 3.3x. This
addendum lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-106406A (revision E2) but
are not included in the current C60 operations.
The following functions/items are not yet available with the current version of the C60 relay:
• Signal Sources SRC 5 and SRC 6
The UCA2 specifications are not yet finalized. There will be changes to the object models described in
Appendix C: UCA/MMS Protocol.
NOTE
GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4
1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 URPC® SOFTWARE
1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5
1.3.2 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.3 CONNECTING URPC® WITH THE C60............................................................ 1-6
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING................................................................................. 1-8
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 1-8
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY ...................................................................................... 1-8
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD....................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION ......................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY .......................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-10
1.5.5 BATTERY TAB................................................................................................. 1-10
1.5.6 RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-10
1.5.7 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-10
1.5.8 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-10
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

2.1.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ............................................................. 2-6
2.2.3 MONITORING .................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.4 METERING ........................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.5 INPUTS .............................................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.7 OUTPUTS .......................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.8 COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-10
2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.11 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.13 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-11
3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ..................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-5
3.2 WIRING
3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING.............................................................................................. 3-6
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER ........................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES .............................................................................................. 3-8
3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ....................................................................... 3-10
3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS ................................................................ 3-16
3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ............................................................................. 3-17
3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS .................................................................... 3-17
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2.9 IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-19

3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-20
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-22
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-22
3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-23
3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-26
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-28
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-28
3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-29
4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC INTERFACE

4.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1
4.1.3 URPC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW ........................................................................4-1
4.1.4 URPC SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW..................................................................4-3
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.1 FACEPLATE .......................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-8
4.2.4 KEYPAD .............................................................................................................4-8
4.2.5 BREAKER CONTROL ........................................................................................4-8
4.2.6 MENUS ...............................................................................................................4-9
4.2.7 CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-11
5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-3
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-4
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY....................................................................................5-7
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ....................................................................................5-8
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ................................................................................5-9
5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-10
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-16
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-16
5.2.7 FAULT REPORT ..............................................................................................5-17
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-18
5.2.9 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................5-20
5.2.10 DEMAND ..........................................................................................................5-20
5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-22
5.2.12 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS .........................................................5-25
5.2.13 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ............................................................................5-25
5.2.14 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS....................................................5-26
5.2.15 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................5-28
5.2.16 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ........................................................................5-28
5.2.17 DIRECT I/O.......................................................................................................5-30
5.2.18 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................5-35
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.1 AC INPUTS.......................................................................................................5-36
5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM ............................................................................................5-37
5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES ..........................................................................................5-38
5.3.4 LINE ..................................................................................................................5-40
5.3.5 BREAKERS ......................................................................................................5-41
5.3.6 FLEXCURVES™ ..............................................................................................5-44
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™................................................................5-51
5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES .....................................................................................5-57
5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION ..........................................................................5-58
vi C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE ............................................................................... 5-58

5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR ............................................................... 5-63
5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS................................................................................... 5-63
5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS™ ......................................................................................... 5-64
5.4.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ............................................................................. 5-68
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5.1 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 5-69
5.5.2 SETTING GROUP ........................................................................................... 5-69
5.5.3 BREAKER FAILURE ........................................................................................ 5-70
5.5.4 PHASE CURRENT .......................................................................................... 5-79
5.5.5 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................... 5-87
5.5.6 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER............................................................... 5-92
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.1 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 5-95
5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS ......................................................................................... 5-95
5.6.3 SELECTOR SWITCH....................................................................................... 5-96
5.6.4 SYNCHROCHECK......................................................................................... 5-101
5.6.5 AUTORECLOSE ............................................................................................ 5-105
5.6.6 DIGITAL ELEMENTS..................................................................................... 5-116
5.6.7 DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-119
5.6.8 MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-121
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-124
5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-126
5.7.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-127
5.7.4 LATCHING OUTPUTS ................................................................................... 5-127
5.7.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-129
5.7.6 REMOTE DEVICES ....................................................................................... 5-130
5.7.7 REMOTE INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-131
5.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-132
5.7.9 RESETTING................................................................................................... 5-133
5.7.10 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 5-133
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS .............................................................................................. 5-137
5.8.2 RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................. 5-138
5.9 TESTING
5.9.1 TEST MODE .................................................................................................. 5-139
5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS .......................................................................... 5-139
5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ...................................................................... 5-140
6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ........................................................................ 6-1
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS............................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS........................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.6 AUTORECLOSE ................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.7 REMOTE DEVICES ........................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS ........................................................................................ 6-5
6.2.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES.................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.10 FLEX STATES ................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.11 ETHERNET........................................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.12 DIRECT INPUTS................................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.13 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS.............................................................................. 6-7
6.3 METERING
6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................................................. 6-8
6.3.2 SOURCES ....................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.3 SYNCHROCHECK........................................................................................... 6-14
6.3.4 TRACKING FREQUENCY ............................................................................... 6-15
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.3.5 FLEXELEMENTS™ ..........................................................................................6-15

6.3.6 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER ...............................................................6-15
6.3.7 TRANSDUCER I/O ...........................................................................................6-16
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1 FAULT REPORTS ............................................................................................6-17
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-19
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-19
6.4.4 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................6-19
6.4.5 BREAKER MAINTENANCE .............................................................................6-20
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-21
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-21
7. COMMANDS AND 7.1 COMMANDS

TARGETS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU ...........................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS .............................................................................................7-1
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME ........................................................................................7-2
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................7-2
7.2 TARGETS
7.2.1 TARGETS MENU ...............................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................................................7-3
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS .........................................................................................7-3
A. FLEXANALOG A.1 PARAMETER LIST

PARAMETERS
B. MODBUS B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

COMMUNICATIONS B.1.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... B-1
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER ............................................................................................ B-1
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER ........................................................................................... B-1
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM ....................................................................................... B-2
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ................................................................... B-3
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ........... B-3
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)........................................... B-4
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)....................................... B-4
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................ B-5
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES............................................................................... B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS........................................................ B-6
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ............................................................... B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP ................................................................................. B-8
B.4.2 DATA FORMATS............................................................................................. B-44
C. UCA/MMS C.1 OVERVIEW

COMMUNICATIONS C.1.1 UCA ................................................................................................................... C-1
C.1.2 MMS .................................................................................................................. C-1
C.1.3 UCA REPORTING ............................................................................................. C-6
viii C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
D. IEC 60870-5-104 D.1 OVERVIEW

COMMUNICATIONS D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................D-1
D.1.2 POINT LIST......................................................................................................D-10
E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE ..........................................................................E-1
E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE ...............................................................................E-4
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.1 BINARY INPUTS................................................................................................E-8
E.2.2 BINARY/CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT.............................................................E-13
E.2.3 COUNTERS .....................................................................................................E-14
E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS ............................................................................................E-15
F. MISCELLANEOUS F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... F-1
F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE C60 MANUAL.................................................................... F-1
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-4
F.3 WARRANTY
F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY ............................................................................... F-6
INDEX
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS
x C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay. 1
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAU-
TIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/
or downtime.
WARNING CAUTION
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
• Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.
• Check that the battery tab is intact on the power supply module (for additional details, see the Battery Tab section near
the end of this chapter).
• View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
C60 RATINGS: Model: C60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
Breaker Management Relay 000

Mods:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA Wiring Diagram: ZZZZZZ
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA Inst. Manual: D
Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A Serial Number: MAZB98000029
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break Firmware: D
GE Power Management 4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W Mfg. Date: 1998/01/05
Technical Support:
Made in
Tel: (905) 294-6222 http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm ®
®
Canada
Fax: (905) 201-2098 - M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
Figure 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

• Ensure that the following items are included:
• Instruction Manual
• GE Multilin Products CD (includes the URPC software and manuals in PDF format)
• mounting screws
• registration card (attached as the last page of the manual)
• Fill out the registration form and mail it back to GE Multilin (include the serial number located on the rear nameplate).
• For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin web-
site at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE
Multilin immediately.
NOTE
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:

GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
TELEPHONE: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America only)
FAX: (905) 201-2098
E-MAIL: [email protected]
HOME PAGE: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay 1-1

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
1 Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This
first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the single-
function approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxil-
iary equipment to produce functioning systems.
Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equip-
ment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and
auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and aux-
iliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using elec-
tronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the
term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further
reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more
functions within the IEDs.
Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and
as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to
perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly.
High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and moni-
toring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a
performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 5
milliseconds. This has been established by the Electric Power Research Institute, a collective body of many American and
Canadian power utilities, in their Utilities Communications Architecture 2 (MMS/UCA2) project. In late 1998, some Euro-
pean utilities began to show an interest in this ongoing initiative.
IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available,
enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control sys-
tems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and
enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1-2 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
a) UR BASIC DESIGN 1
The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or
another UR device.
Input Elements CPU Module Output Elements

Contact Inputs Protective Elements Contact Outputs
Virtual Inputs Pickup Virtual Outputs
Dropout
Input Output
Analog Inputs Operate Analog Outputs
CT Inputs Status Status Remote Outputs
VT Inputs Table Logic Gates Table -DNA
-USER
Remote Inputs
Direct Inputs Direct Outputs
LAN
Programming Operator
Device Interface
827822A2.CDR
Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as program-
mable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used
to control field devices.
b) UR SIGNAL TYPES
The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both ‘wet’ and ‘dry’
contacts are supported.
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include signals
generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic™ equations used to customize the UR
device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic™ equations.
The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detec-
tors (RTDs).
The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.
The UR supports 1 A and 5 A CTs.
The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR devices.
The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic™ operands inserted
into UCA2 GOOSE messages and are of two assignment types: DNA standard functions and USER defined functions.
The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR IEDs over a dedi-
cated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected
directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilot-aided
schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single UR chassis.

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
c) UR SCAN OPERATION
1 The UR device operates in a cyclic scan fashion. The UR reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the logic pro-
gram (FlexLogic™ equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any resulting task
execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Read Inputs
Protection elements
serviced by sub-scan
Protective Elements
PKP
Solve Logic DPO
OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 1–3: UR SCAN OPERATION
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as
required. This is achieved with Object-Oriented Design and Programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.
Object-Oriented techniques involve the use of ‘objects’ and ‘classes’. An ‘object’ is defined as “a logical entity that contains
both data and code that manipulates that data”. A ‘class’ is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept,
one can create a Protection Class with the Protection Elements as objects of the class such as Time Overcurrent, Instanta-
neous Overcurrent, Current Differential, Undervoltage, Overvoltage, Underfrequency, and Distance. These objects repre-
sent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for Metering, I/O Control,
HMI, Communications, or any functional entity in the system.
Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the Universal Relay achieves the same features as the hardware
architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any Universal Relay (e.g. Feeder Protection,
Transformer Protection, Distance Protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes.
This results in a ’common look and feel’ across the entire family of UR platform-based applications.
1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS
As described above, the architecture of the UR relay is different from previous devices. In order to achieve a general under-
standing of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are con-
tained in “Elements”. A description of UR elements can be found in the Introduction to Elements section in Chapter 5. An
example of a simple element, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Digital Elements settings
section. An explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC Sources section in Chapter 5. A
description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic™ section
in Chapter 5.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 URPC® SOFTWARE
1.3URPC® SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
The Faceplate keypad and display or the URPC software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.
1
The URPC software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC monitor can
display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the URPC software to properly operate on a PC.
• Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended)
• Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP
• 64 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)
• 40 MB of available hard drive space (100 MB recommended)
• Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in High Color mode (16-bit color)
• RS232 and/or Ethernet communications port to the relay
1.3.2 INSTALLATION
Refer to the following procedure to install the URPC software:

1. Insert the GE Multilin Products CD into your PC or direct your web browser to the GE Multilin website at http://
www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (preferred method). The Products CD is essentially a snapshot of the GE Multilin web-
site at the date printed on the CD; install from the website to ensure the most recent version of URPC.
2. If the Products CD does not start automatically, choose Run from the Windows® Start menu and type D:\SETUP.EXE.
3. Select the Software item from the Resources menu on the right of the GE Multilin welcome page.
4. Select the C60 Breaker Management Relay item from the list of protective relays shown.
5. The C60 Software page will be shown. Select the URPC Software item from the list and save the installation program
to your local PC.
6. Run the installation program and follow the on-screen instructions. When the Choose Destination Location window
appears and if the software is not to be located in the default directory, click Browse and type in the complete path
name including the new directory name.
7. Click Next to continue with the installation procedure.
8. The default program group where the application will be added to is shown in the Select Program Folder window. If it
is desired that the application be added to an already existing program group, choose the group name from the list
shown.
9. Click Next to begin the installation process.
10. To launch the URPC application, click Finish in the Setup Complete window.
11. Subsequently, double click on the URPC software icon to activate the application.
Refer to Chapter 4: Human Interfaces and the URPC Help File for additional information about the URPC
software interface.
NOTE

1.3 URPC® SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1.3.3 CONNECTING URPC® WITH THE C60
1 This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the URPC software. Please refer to the URPC Help File and Chapter
4 of this manual for more information.
a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To
setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site.
1. Install and start the latest version of the URPC software (available from the GE Multilin Products CD or online from
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
2. Select the Online > Device Setup menu item to open the Device Setup window and click the “Add Site” button to
define a new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with
the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the “OK” button when complete.
4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the URPC window. Click on the new site name and then select the
Online > Device Setup menu item to re-open the Device Setup window.
5. Click the “Add Device” button to define the new device.
6. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
7. Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
• Enter the relay IP address (from SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK ! IP ADDRESS)
in the IP Address field.
• Enter the relay Modbus address (from the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL ! MOD-
BUS SLAVE ADDRESS setting) in the Slave Address field.
• Enter the Modbus port address (from the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL !"
MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting) in the Modbus Port field.
8. Click the “Read Order Code” button to connect to the UR device and upload the order code. If an communications
error occurs, ensure that the three URPC values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values.
9. Click “OK” when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main URPC window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to Section c) below to begin communica-
tions.
b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION

Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable is properly connected to the RS232 port on the front panel of the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the URPC software (available from the GE Multilin Products CD or online from
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
2. Select the Online > Device Setup menu item to open the Device Setup window and click the “Add Site” button to
define a new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with
the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the “OK” button when complete.
4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the URPC window. Click on the new site name and then select the
Online > Device Setup menu item to re-open the Device Setup window.
5. Click the “Add Device” button to define the new device.
6. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
7. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper Ethernet functionality.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 URPC® SOFTWARE
• Enter the relay slave address and COM port values (from the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS
!" SERIAL PORTS menu) in the Slave Address and COM Port fields.
• Enter the physical communications parameters (baud rate and parity settings) in their respective fields.
1
8. Click the “Read Order Code” button to connect to the UR device and upload the order code. If an communications
error occurs, ensure that the URPC serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay
setting values.
9. Click “OK” when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main URPC window.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to Section c) Connecting to the Relay
below to begin communications.
c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY

1. Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:
Expand the Site List by double-clicking

or by selecting the [+] box
Communications Status Indicator

Green = OK, Red = No Comms
2. The Display Properties window will open with a flashing status indicator on the lower left of the URPC window.
3. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier).
4. The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications.
Refer to Chapter 4 in this manual and the URPC Help File for more information about the using the URPC
software interface.
NOTE

1.4 UR HARDWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1.4UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
1 Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
carefully.
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The URPC software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To
communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard “straight-through” serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is con-
nected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in the
CPU Communications Ports section of Chapter 3.
Figure 1–4: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS

To communicate through the C60 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is
required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a "straight-through" serial cable. A shielded
twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the C60 rear communications port. The converter termi-
nals (+, –, GND) are connected to the C60 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU Communica-
tions Ports section in Chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (i.e. 120 Ω, 1 nF) as
described in the Chapter 3.
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 × 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting con-
ditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the
aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will
default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and
appear on the display.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into ‘pages’ under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Tar-
1
gets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement
numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit
mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The key may be
pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values.
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION
Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as
illustrated below.
! ! !
ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS
" " " "
## ACTUAL VALUES ## SETTINGS ## COMMANDS No Active

## STATUS ## PRODUCT SETUP ## VIRTUAL INPUTS Targets
!
USER DISPLAYS
(when in use)
"
User Display 1
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (##), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (#). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the
MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually
pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
## SETTINGS # PASSWORD ACCESS LEVEL:

## PRODUCT SETUP # SECURITY Restricted
## SETTINGS
## SYSTEM SETUP

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
1 The relay is defaulted to the "Not Programmed" state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of
a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Ser-
vice LED off. The relay in the "Not Programmed" state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain
until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.
Select the menu message SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" INSTALLATION ! RELAY SETTINGS
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
To put the relay in the "Programmed" state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press . The face-
plate Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually
(refer to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the URPC Help file) via the URPC software interface.
1.5.5 BATTERY TAB
The battery tab is installed in the power supply module before the C60 shipped from the factory. The battery tab prolongs
battery life in the event the relay is powered down for long periods of time before installation. The battery is responsible for
backing up event records, oscillography, data logger, and real-time clock information when the relay is powered off. The
battery failure self-test error generated by the relay is a minor and should not affect the relay functionality. When the relay is
installed and ready for commissioning, the tab should be removed. The battery tab should be re-inserted if the relay is pow-
ered off for an extended period of time. If required, contact the factory for a replacement battery or battery tab.
1.5.6 RELAY PASSWORDS
It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user
password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING:
1. COMMAND
The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the fol-
lowing operations:
• operate breakers via faceplate keypad
• change state of virtual inputs
• clear event records
• clear oscillography records
• operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING
The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.
Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level
passwords.
NOTE
1.5.7 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION
FlexLogic™ equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the Flex-
Logic™ section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
1.5.8 COMMISSIONING
Templated tables for charting all the required settings before entering them via the keypad are available from the GE Multi-
lin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The C60 Breaker Management Relay is a microprocessor based relay designed for breaker monitoring, control and protec-
tion.
Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total
waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include an Event Recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events, oscillography capable of stor-
ing up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content and sampling rate, and Data Logger acquisition of up to 16 chan-
2
nels, with programmable content and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an
IRIG-B signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to
be determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic™ equations) to trigger oscillography
data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal
computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a sys-
tem fault.
A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual val-
ues. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and
engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus® RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers
with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules
include a 10BaseF Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments.
Another option provides two 10BaseF fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports MMS/UCA2, Modbus®/
TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (UR web pages). The IEC 60870-
5-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time.
The C60 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single
Line Diagram illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers.
Table 2–1: ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS

DEVICE FUNCTION DEVICE FUNCTION
NUMBER NUMBER
25 Synchrocheck 50P BF Phase IOC, Breaker Failure
27P Phase Undervoltage 51P Phase Time Overcurrent
27X Auxiliary Undervoltage 52 AC Circuit Breaker
32 Sensitive Directional Power 59N Neutral Overvoltage
50N BF Neutral IOC, Breaker Failure 59X Auxiliary Overvoltage
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 79 Autoreclose

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
BF2 59
2 50P1 50P2 50P3 50N1 50N2 50N3 27 25
TRIP
52 CLOSE
27
79 METERING
52 CLOSE
TM Transducer
FlexElement Input
TRIP
50P1 50P2 50P3 50N1 50N2 50N3 27 25
BF2

834710AB.CDR
Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
Table 2–2: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS

FUNCTION FUNCTION
Breaker Arcing Current (I2t) MMS/UCA Communications
Breaker Control MMS/UCA Remote Inputs/Outputs (“GOOSE”)
Contact Inputs (up to 96) Modbus Communications
Contact Outputs (up to 64) Modbus User Map
Control Pushbuttons Non-Volatile Latches
Data Logger Non-Volatile Selector Switch
Demand Oscillography
Digital Counters (8) Setting Groups (6)
Digital Elements (16) Time Synchronization over SNTP
Direct Inputs/Outputs (32) Transducer I/O
Disturbance Detection User Definable Displays
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 Communications User Programmable LEDs
Event Recorder User Programmable Pushbuttons
Fault Detector and Fault Report User Programmable Self-Tests
FlexElements™ (8) Virtual Inputs (32)
FlexLogic™ Equations Virtual Outputs (64)
Metering: Current, Voltage, Power, Energy, Frequency VT Fuse Failure

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.2 ORDERING
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, and consists of
the following UR module functions: power supply, CPU, CT/VT DSP, digital input/output, transducer input/output. Each of
these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations which must be specified at the time of ordering. The informa-
tion required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following table (full details of available relay modules are con-
tained in Chapter 3: Hardware).
2
Table 2–3: C60 ORDER CODES
C60 - * 00 - H * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P ** - U ** - W ** For Full Sized Horizontal Mount
C60 - * 00 - V * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - R ** For Reduced Sized Vertical Mount
BASE UNIT C60 | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU A | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP)
C | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
D | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | | | No Software Options
MOUNT/ H C | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack)
FACEPLATE Horizontal (19” rack) with User-Programmable Pushbuttons
H P | | | | | | |
V F | | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack)
POWER H | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC
SUPPLY 24 to 48 V (DC only)
L | | | | | |
CT/VT DSP 8A | 8A | | | Standard 4CT/4VT
8B | 8B | | | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
8C | 8C | | | Standard 8CT
8D | 8D | | | Sensitive Ground 8CT
DIGITAL I/O | XX XX XX XX No Module
4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4 Solid-State (No Monitoring) MOSFET Outputs
4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4 Solid-State (Voltage w/ opt Current) MOSFET Outputs
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4 Solid-State (Current w/ opt Voltage) MOSFET Outputs
4L 4L 4L 4L 4L 14 Form-A (No Monitoring) Latchable Outputs
6A 6A 6A 6A 6A 2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 2 Form-C outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6B 6B 6B 6B 6B 2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6C 6C 6C 6C 6C 8 Form-C Outputs
6D 6D 6D 6D 6D 16 Digital Inputs
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6F 6F 6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form-C Outputs
6G 6G 6G 6G 6G 4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6K 6K 6K 6K 6K 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs
6L 6L 6L 6L 6L 2 Form-A (Curr w/ opt Volt) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 2 Form-A (Curr w/ opt Volt) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6N 6N 6N 6N 6N 4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6R 6R 6R 6R 6R 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6T 6T 6T 6T 6T 4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6U 6U 6U 6U 6U 6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
TRANSDUCER I/O 5C 5C 5C 5C 5C 8 RTD Inputs
(maximum of 4 per unit) 4 RTD Inputs, 4 dcmA Inputs
5E 5E 5E 5E 5E
5F 5F 5F 5F 5F 8 dcmA Inputs
INTER-RELAY 7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
COMMUNICATIONS 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7B
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
7L Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels
72 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The order codes for replacement modules to be ordered separately are shown in the following table. When ordering a
replacement CPU module or Faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit.
Table 2–4: ORDER CODES FOR UR REPLACEMENT MODULES

UR - ** -
POWER SUPPLY | 1H | 125 / 250 V AC/DC
| 1L | 24 to 48 V (DC only)
2 CPU |
|
|
9A
9C
9D
|
|
|
RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0)
RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
FACEPLATE | 3C | Horizontal Faceplate with Display & Keypad
| 3F | Vertical Faceplate with Display & Keypad
DIGITAL I/O | 4A | 4 Solid-State (No Monitoring) MOSFET Outputs
| 4B | 4 Solid-State (Voltage w/ opt Current) MOSFET Outputs
| 4C | 4 Solid-State (Current w/ opt Voltage) MOSFET Outputs
| 4L | 14 Form-A (No Monitoring) Latchable Outputs
| 6A | 2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6B | 2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6C | 8 Form-C Outputs
| 6D | 16 Digital Inputs
| 6E | 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C Outputs
| 6G | 4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6H | 6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6K | 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs
| 6L | 2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6M | 2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6N | 4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6P | 6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6R | 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6S | 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6T | 4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6U | 6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
CT/VT DSP | 8A | Standard 4CT/4VT
| 8B | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
| 8C | Standard 8CT
| 8D | Sensitive Ground 8CT
L60 INTER-RELAY | 7U | 110/125 V, 20 mA Input/Output Channel Interface
COMMUNICATIONS | 7V | 48/60 V, 20 mA Input/Output Channel Interface
| 7Y | 125 V Input, 5V Output, 20 mA Channel Interface
| 7Z | 5 V Input, 5V Output, 20 mA Channel Interface
UR INTER-RELAY | 7A | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
COMMUNICATIONS | 7B | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 7E | Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode LED (L90 only)
| 7F | Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode LED (L90 only)
| 7G | Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED (L90 only)
| 7Q | Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 820 nm, single-mode LASER (L90 only)
| 7H | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7I | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
| 7L | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7M | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7N | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
| 7P | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel
| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels
| 7T | RS422, 1 Channel
| 7W | RS422, 2 Channels
| 72 | 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 73 | 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
| 74 | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 75 | Channel 1 - G.703, Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single -mode, LASER (L90 only)
| 76 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 77 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
TRANSDUCER I/O | 5C | 8 RTD Inputs
| 5E | 4 dcmA Inputs, 4 RTD Inputs
| 5F | 8 dcmA Inputs

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated Form-A output contact unless otherwise indi-
cated. FlexLogic™ operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using
NOTE
FlexLogic™ to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic™ equations, or
interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
2
PHASE TOC PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
Current: Phasor or RMS Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Dropout level: 102 to 103% of Pickup
Dropout level: 97% to 98% of Pickup Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Level accuracy: Curve shapes: GE IAV Inverse;
for 0.1 to 2.0 × CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated Definite Time (0.1s base curve)
(whichever is greater) Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
for > 2.0 × CT: ±1.5% of reading > 2.0 × CT rating 0.01
Curve shapes: IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Timing accuracy: Operate at < 0.90 × Pickup
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short ±3.5% of operate time or ±4 ms (which-
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/ ever is greater)
Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves™
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
base curve) Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of Dropout level: 102 to 103% of pickup
0.01 Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Reset type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) Curve shapes: GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time
Timing accuracy: Operate at > 1.03 × actual Pickup Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle Timing accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±4 ms
(whichever is greater) (whichever is greater)
PHASE IOC NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Pickup level: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Dropout level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level accuracy: Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
(whichever is greater)
> 2.0 × CT rating ±1.5% of reading Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Overreach: <2% Timing accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
Operate time: <20 ms at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy: Operate at 1.5 × Pickup Dropout level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater) Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Measured power: 3-phase, true RMS Reset delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Number of stages: 2 Timing accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±4 ms
Characteristic angle: 0 to 359° in steps of 1 (whichever is greater)
Calibration angle: 0.00 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05 Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
Minimum power: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001 BREAKER FAILURE
Pickup level accuracy: ±1% or ±0.001 pu, whichever is greater Mode: 1-pole, 3-pole
Hysteresis: 2% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater Current supervision: Phase, Neutral Current
Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 Current supv. pickup: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Time accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater Current supv. dropout: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Operate time: 50 ms Current supv. accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.75% of reading or ±1% of rated
(whichever is greater)
above 2 × CT rating: ±1.5% of reading

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SYNCHROCHECK AUTORECLOSURE
Max voltage difference: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1 Two breakers applications
Max angle difference: 0 to 100° in steps of 1 Single- and three-pole tripping schemes
Max freq. difference: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Up to 2 reclose attempts before lockout
Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01 Selectable reclosing mode and breaker sequence
Dead source function: None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or
DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2
2 (L = Live, D = Dead)
2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
FLEXLOGIC™ NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical Type: Set-dominant or Reset-dominant
visualization (keypad programmable) Number: 16 (individually programmed)
Lines of code: 512 Output: Stored in non-volatile memory
Internal variables: 64 Execution sequence: As input prior to protection, control, and
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 FlexLogic™
to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs),
NAND (2 to 16 inputs), Latch (Reset
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Number: 48 plus Trip and Alarm
dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers
Programmability: from any logical variable, contact, or vir-
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
input tual input
Number of timers: 32 Reset mode: Self-reset or Latched
Pickup delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 LED TEST

Dropout delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 Initiation: from any digital input or user-program-
mable condition
FLEXCURVES™ Number of tests: 3, interruptible at any time
Number: 4 (A through D)
Duration of full test: approximately 3 minutes
Reset points: 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Test sequence 1: all LEDs on
Operate points: 80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Test sequence 2: all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
Time delay: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
Test sequence 3: all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
FLEX STATES
Number: up to 256 logical variables grouped
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of displays: 16
under 16 Modbus addresses
Lines of display: 2 × 20 alphanumeric characters
Programmability: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
input Parameters: up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
Invoking and scrolling: keypad, or any user-programmable con-
FLEXELEMENTS™ dition, including pushbuttons
Number of elements: 8
Operating signal: any analog actual value, or two values in CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
differential mode Number of pushbuttons: 3
Operating signal mode: Signed or Absolute Value Operation: drive FlexLogic™ operands
Operating mode: Level, Delta USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)
Compensation direction: Over, Under Number of pushbuttons: 12
Pickup Level: –30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Mode: Self-Reset, Latched
Hysteresis: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1 Display message: 2 lines of 20 characters each
Delta dt: 20 ms to 60 days SELECTOR SWITCH
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 Upper Position Limit: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
Selecting mode: Time-out or Acknowledge
Time-out timer: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
Control inputs: Step-up and 3-bit
Power-up mode: Restore from non-volatile memory or
synchronize to a 3-bit control input

2.2.3 MONITORING
OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA LOGGER

Maximum records: 64 Number of channels: 1 to 16
Sampling rate: 64 samples per power cycle Parameters: Any available analog actual value
Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout or operate Sampling rate: 1 sec.; 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min.
Digital input change of state Storage capacity: (NN is dependent on memory)
Digital output change of state
FlexLogic™ equation
1-second rate: 01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
2
Data: AC input channels ↓ ↓
Element state 60-minute rate: 01 channel for NN days
Digital input state 16 channels for NN days
Digital output state
Data storage: In non-volatile memory
FAULT LOCATOR
Method: Single-ended
EVENT RECORDER Maximum accuracy if: Fault resistance is zero or fault currents
Capacity: 1024 events from all line terminals are in phase
Time-tag: to 1 microsecond Relay accuracy: ±1.5% (V > 10 V, I > 0.1 pu)
Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout or operate Worst-case accuracy:
Digital input change of state VT%error + (user data)
Digital output change of state CT%error + (user data)
Self-test events ZLine%error + (user data)
Data storage: In non-volatile memory METHOD%error + (Chapter 6)
RELAY ACCURACY%error + (1.5%)
2.2.4 METERING
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy at Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated Range: ±0 to 2 × 109 Mvarh
(whichever is greater) Parameters: 3-phase only
> 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.0% of reading
Update rate: 50 ms
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
FREQUENCY
Accuracy at
REAL POWER (WATTS) V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: ±0.01 Hz (when voltage signal is used
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at for frequency measurement)
–0.8 < PF ≤ –1.0 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0 I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: ±0.05 Hz
I > 0.25 pu: ±0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for
REACTIVE POWER (VARS) frequency measurement)
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at –0.2 ≤ PF ≤ 0.2
DEMAND
APPARENT POWER (VA) Measurements: Phases A, B, and C present and maxi-
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading
mum measured currents
WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE) 3-Phase Power (P, Q, and S) present
Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading and maximum measured currents
Range: ±0 to 2 × 109 MWh Accuracy: ±2.0%
Parameters: 3-phase only
Update rate: 50 ms

2.2.5 INPUTS
AC CURRENT RTD INPUTS

CT rated primary: 1 to 50000 A Types (3-wire): 100 Ω Platinum, 100 & 120 Ω Nickel, 10
CT rated secondary: 1 A or 5 A by connection Ω Copper
Nominal frequency: 20 to 65 Hz Sensing current: 5 mA
Relay burden: < 0.2 VA at rated secondary Range: –50 to +250°C
2 Conversion range:
Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
Accuracy:
Isolation:
±2°C
36 V pk-pk
Sensitive Ground module:
0.002 to 4.6 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude modulation: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
Current withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated
DC shift: TTL
1 sec. at 100 times rated
continuous at 3 times rated Input impedance: 22 kΩ
AC VOLTAGE REMOTE INPUTS (MMS GOOSE)

VT rated secondary: 50.0 to 240.0 V Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
VT ratio: 1.00 to 24000.00 Number of remote devices:16
Nominal frequency: 20 to 65 Hz Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Relay burden: < 0.25 VA at 120 V DIRECT INPUTS
Conversion range: 1 to 275 V Number of input points: 32
Voltage withstand: continuous at 260 V to neutral No. of remote devices: 8
1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
CONTACT INPUTS Ring configuration: Yes, No
Dry contacts: 1000 Ω maximum Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps
Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum CRC: 32-bit
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V CRC alarm:
Recognition time: < 1 ms Responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC
Debounce timer: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
DCMA INPUTS Unreturned message alarm:
Current input (mA DC): 0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, Responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring
0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable) configuration
Input impedance: 379 Ω ±10% Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Conversion range: –1 to + 20 mA DC Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Accuracy: ±0.2% of full scale
Type: Passive
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY
LOW RANGE ALL RANGES

Nominal DC voltage: 24 to 48 V at 3 A Volt withstand: 2 × Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Min/max DC voltage: 20 / 60 V Voltage loss hold-up: 50 ms duration at nominal
NOTE: Low range is DC only. Power consumption: Typical = 35 VA; Max. = 75 VA
HIGH RANGE INTERNAL FUSE
Nominal DC voltage: 125 to 250 V at 0.7 A RATINGS
Min/max DC voltage: 88 / 300 V Low range power supply: 7.5 A / 600 V
Nominal AC voltage: 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz, 0.7 A High range power supply: 5 A / 600 V
Min/max AC voltage: 88 / 265 V at 48 to 62 Hz INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical
DC: 10 000 A

2.2.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-A RELAY FAST FORM-C RELAY

Make and carry: 0.1 A max. (resistive load)
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Minimum load impedance:
Carry continuous: 6A
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max. at 48 V INPUT IMPEDANCE
VOLTAGE
0.10 A DC max. at 125 V 2 W RESISTOR 1 W RESISTOR
Operate time: < 4 ms 250 V DC 20 KΩ 50 KΩ 2
Contact material: Silver alloy 120 V DC 5 KΩ 2 KΩ
LATCHING RELAY 48 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 24 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ
Carry continuous: 6A Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a
required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max.
Operate time: < 4 ms Operate time: < 0.6 ms
Contact material: Silver alloy INTERNAL LIMITING RESISTOR:
Control: separate operate and reset inputs Power: 2 watts
Control mode: operate-dominant or reset-dominant Resistance: 100 ohms
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT

Applicable voltage: approx. 15 to 250 V DC (FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)
Trickle current: approx. 1 to 2.5 mA Capacity: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Isolation: ±300 Vpk
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR
Threshold current: approx. 80 to 100 mA REMOTE OUTPUTS (MMS GOOSE)
Standard output points: 32
FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY User output points: 32
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 10 A
Carry continuous: 6A DIRECT OUTPUTS
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max. at 48 V Output points: 32
0.10 A DC max. at 125 V
Operate time: < 8 ms
Contact material: Silver alloy
RS232 ETHERNET PORT

Front port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus® RTU 10BaseF: 820 nm, multi-mode, supports half-
duplex/full-duplex fiber optic with ST
RS485 connector
1 or 2 rear ports: Up to 115 kbps, Modbus® RTU, isolated
Redundant 10BaseF: 820 nm, multi-mode, half-duplex/full-
together at 36 Vpk
duplex fiber optic with ST connector
Typical distance: 1200 m
Power budget: 10 db
Max optical Ip power: –7.6 dBm
Typical distance: 1.65 km
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)

2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

INTERFACE TYPE TYPICAL DISTANCE EMITTER TYPE FIBER TYPE CONNECTOR TYPICAL
TYPE DISTANCE
RS422 1200 m
820 nm LED Multimode ST 1.65 km
G.703 100 m
1300 nm LED Multimode ST 3.8 km
2 NOTE
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power
and does not take into consideration the clock
1300 nm ELED Singlemode ST 11.4 km
1300 nm Laser Singlemode ST 64 km
source provided by the user.
1550 nm Laser Singlemode ST 105 km
LINK POWER BUDGET
EMITTER, TRANSMIT RECEIVED POWER Typical distances listed are based on the fol-
FIBER TYPE POWER SENSITIVITY BUDGET lowing assumptions for system loss. As
NOTE
820 nm LED, –20 dBm –30 dBm 10 dB actual losses will vary from one installation to
Multimode another, the distance covered by your system
1300 nm LED, –21 dBm –30 dBm 9 dB may vary.
Multimode
1300 nm ELED, –21 dBm –30 dBm 9 dB CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)
Singlemode ST connector 2 dB
1300 nm Laser, –1 dBm –30 dBm 29 dB FIBER LOSSES
Singlemode
820 nm multimode 3 dB/km
1550 nm Laser, +5 dBm –30 dBm 35 dB 1300 nm multimode 1 dB/km
Singlemode
1300 nm singlemode 0.35 dB/km
These Power Budgets are calculated from the 1550 nm singlemode 0.25 dB/km
NOTE manufacturer’s worst-case transmitter power Splice losses: One splice every 2 km,
and worst case receiver sensitivity. at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER SYSTEM MARGIN
EMITTER, FIBER TYPE MAX. OPTICAL 3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for
INPUT POWER all other losses.
820 nm LED, Multimode –7.6 dBm
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel
1300 nm LED, Multimode –11 dBm
asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
1300 nm ELED, Singlemode –14 dBm
1300 nm Laser, Singlemode –14 dBm
1550 nm Laser, Singlemode –14 dBm
2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES OTHER

Cold: IEC 60028-2-1, 16 h at –40°C Humidity (noncondensing): IEC 60068-2-30, 95%, Variant 1, 6
Dry Heat: IEC 60028-2-2, 16 h at +85°C days
Altitude: Up to 2000 m
Installation Category: II

2.2.11 TYPE TESTS
Electrical fast transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Conducted RFI: IEC 61000-4-6

IEC 61000-4-4 Voltage dips/interruptions/variations:
IEC 60255-22-4 IEC 61000-4-11
Oscillatory transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 60255-11
IEC 61000-4-12 Power frequency magnetic field immunity:
Insulation resistance: IEC 60255-5 IEC 61000-4-8
Dielectric strength: IEC 60255-6 Vibration test (sinusoidal): IEC 60255-21-1 2
ANSI/IEEE C37.90 Shock and bump: IEC 60255-21-2
Electrostatic discharge: EN 61000-4-2
Type test report available upon request.
Surge immunity: EN 61000-4-5
RFI susceptibility: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 NOTE
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 60255-22-3
Ontario Hydro C-5047-77
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS
THERMAL
Products go through a 12 h burn-in process at 60°C
2.2.13 APPROVALS
APPROVALS CE:
UL Listed for the USA and Canada LVD 73/23/EEC: IEC 1010-1
EMC 81/336/EEC: EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2
Manufactured under an ISO9000 registered system.
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning: Normally, cleaning is not required; but for
situations where dust has accumulated
on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can
be used.


3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable
faceplate. The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The face-
plate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with lim-
ited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting
to access the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The vertical and horizontal case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When
planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interfer-
ence to or from adjacent equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
3
e UR SERIES
Figure 3–1: C60 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS

3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
Figure 3–2: C60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION

Figure 3–3: C60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS
Figure 3–4: C60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS

3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the
unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or con-
WARNING
nected equipment, or undesired operation!
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with
modules while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with
like modules in their original factory configured slots.
The faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown below. This
allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
3
Figure 3–5: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION

WITHDRAWAL: The ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously to
release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record
the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
INSERTION: Ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips
located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted
into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips
have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Type 9C and 9D CPU modules are equipped with 10Base-T and 10Base-F Ethernet connectors for communica-
tions. These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before the it can be removed from the
NOTE
chassis.

3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
834707A9.CDR
Figure 3–6: REAR TERMINAL VIEW

Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in
order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the
first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following
figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
Figure 3–7: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F & H SLOTS

3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3.2WIRING 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
3 A
52 52
B
C
CONNECTION CONNECTION
AS REQUIRED AS REQUIRED
F 1b
F 2b
F 3b
F 4b
M 1b
M 2b
M 3b
M 4b
F 5a
F 6a
F 7a
F 8a
F 1a
F 2a
F 3a
F 4a
M 5a
M 6a
M 7a
M 8a
M 1a
M 2a
M 3a
M 4a
F 5c
F 6c
F 7c
F 8c
F 1c
F 2c
F 3c
F 4c
M 5c
M 6c
M 7c
VX M 8c
M 1c
M 2c
M 3c
M 4c
VX
VB
VC
VB
VC
VA
VA
VX
VX
VB
VC
VB
VC
IG5
IG1
IG5
IG1
VA
VA
IG
IG
IA5
IA1
IA5
IA1
IA
IA
IB
IB
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC
IC1
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC
IC1
VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS
8A / 8B 8A / 8B
H 5a CONTACT IN H 5a DIGITAL I/O 6G I H 1a

H 5c CONTACT IN H 5c H1 H 1b
V
H 6a CONTACT IN H 6a H 1c
H 6c CONTACT IN H 6c I H 2a
H 5b COMMON H5b H2 H 2b
V
H 2c
H 7a CONTACT IN H 7a I H 3a
H 7c CONTACT IN H 7c
H3 H 3b
H 8a CONTACT IN H 8a V
H 3c
CURRENT SUPV.
H 8c CONTACT IN H 8c I H 4a
H 7b COMMON H7b
VOLT &
H4 H 4b
V
H 8b SURGE H 4c
P 5a CONTACT IN P 5a DIGITAL I/O 6G I P 1a TC1
P 5c CONTACT IN P 5c P1 P 1b
V
P 6a CONTACT IN P 6a P 1c
P 6c CONTACT IN P 6c I P 2a
P 5b COMMON P5b P2 P 2b
VOLTAGE SUPV.
V
P 2c
P 7a CONTACT IN P 7a I P 3a
P 7c CONTACT IN P 7c
P3 P 3b TC2
P 8a CONTACT IN P 8a V
P 3c
P 8c CONTACT IN P 8c I P 4a
P 7b COMMON P7b
P4 P 4b
V
( DC ONLY )
P 8b SURGE P 4c
B 1b
1
CRITICAL
B 1a UR COMPUTER
FAILURE
B 2b
1 1 8
B 3a 48 VDC GE Multilin 2 2 3 RXD
DC TXD
POWER SUPPLY
B 3b OUTPUT
RXD 3 3 2 TXD
B5b HI
AC or DC B 6b LO
CONTROL
POWER
C60 4
SGND 5
4
5
20
7 SGND
B 6a
BREAKER MANAGEMENT RELAY 6 6 6
B 8a SURGE
7 7 4
B 8b FILTER
8 8 5
9 9 22
Tx1
Rx110BaseF NORMAL
9D
Fibre
9 PIN 25 PIN
Optic Tx2
Rx210BaseF ALTERNATE COM CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1
10BaseT TEST ONLY
D3b CONTACTS SHOWN
RS-232
RS485
D4b WITH NO
COM 2 DB-9
D5b COM CONTROL POWER
(front) PERSONAL
D5a
IRIG-B COMPUTER
CPU
D6a
Co-axial
D7b SURGE GROUND
No. 10AWG
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
834701BB.CDR
Minimum
GROUND BUS X W V U T S R P N M L K J H G F D B
MODULES MUST BE 6 8 6 8 9 1
GROUNDED IF
TERMINAL IS I/O CT/VT I/O CT/VT CPU Power
PROVIDED Supply
(Rear View)
This diagram is based on the following order code: C60-A00-HCL-F8A-H6B-M6K-P5F.

The purpose of this diagram is to provide an example of how the relay is typically wired, not specifically how to wire your own relay. Please
CAUTION
refer to the following pages for examples to help you wire your relay correctly based on your own relay configuration and order code.
Figure 3–8: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of UR module hardware is shown in the following table:

Table 3–1: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE MODULE FUNCTION TERMINALS DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
TYPE (AC)
FROM TO
1 Power Supply High (+); Low (+); (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute 1
1 Power Supply 48 V DC (+) and (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute 1
1 Power Supply Relay Terminals Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute 1
2 Reserved for Future N/A N/A N/A
3 Reserved for Future N/A N/A N/A
4
5
Reserved for Future
Analog I/O
N/A
All except 8b
N/A
Chassis
N/A
< 50 V DC
3
6 Digital I/O All (See Precaution 2) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
8 CT/VT All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
9 CPU All except 7b Chassis < 50 VDC
1
See TEST PRECAUTION 1 below.
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in module hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak volt-
age transients, radio frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components
can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one
minute. For testing of dielectric strength where the test interval may exceed one minute, always observe the following pre-
cautions:
1. The connection from ground to the Filter Ground (Terminal 8b) and Surge Ground (Terminal 8a) must be removed
before testing.
2. Some versions of the digital I/O module have a Surge Ground connection on Terminal 8b. On these module types, this
connection must be removed before testing.

3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY
RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY
CAUTION
OCCUR!
The C60 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well
known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be
NOTE
avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
The power supply module can be ordered with either of two possible voltage ranges. Each range has a dedicated input
connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical Specifications section for details):
• LO range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal
3 • HI range: 125 to 250 V nominal

The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical Wiring Diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a Form-C that will be energized once control power is applied
and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a
critical failure (see the Self-Test Errors Table in Chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.
Figure 3–9: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES
A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on Channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or Channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels
1 and 5 are intended for connection to Phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 2 and 6 are intended for
connection to Phase B, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to Phase C and
are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single phase source. If voltage, this
channel is labelled the auxiliary voltage (VX). If current, this channel is intended for connection to a CT between a system
neutral and ground, and is labelled the ground current (IG).
a) CT INPUTS
VERIFY THAT THE CONNECTION MADE TO THE RELAY NOMINAL CURRENT OF 1 A OR 5 A MATCHES
THE SECONDARY RATING OF THE CONNECTED CTs. UNMATCHED CTs MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
DAMAGE OR INADEQUATE PROTECTION.

The CT/VT module may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current inputs (Type
8A) or with a sensitive ground input (Type 8B) which is 10 times more sensitive (see the Technical Specifications section for
more details). Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the
input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Cur-
rent transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram.
The exact placement of a Zero Sequence CT so that ground fault current will be detected is shown below. Twisted pair
cabling on the zero sequence CT is recommended.
Figure 3–10: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION
b) VT INPUTS
The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the Synchrocheck and Volts/Hertz features.
~ 1b
~ 2b
~ 3b
~ 4b
~ 5a
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 8a
~ 1a
~ 2a
~ 3a
~ 4a
~ 2c
~ 5c
~ 6c
~ 7c
~ 8c
~ 1c
~ 3c
~ 4c
VX
VB
VC
VA
VX
VB
VC
IG5
IG1
VA
IG
IA5
IA1
IA
IB
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC
IC1
VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS

8A / 8B
827831A8-X5.CDR
~ 1b
~ 2b
~ 3b
~ 4b
~ 5b
~ 6b
~ 7b
~ 8b
~ 1a
~ 2a
~ 3a
~ 5a
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 4a
~ 8a
~ 1c
~ 2c
~ 6c
~ 3c
~ 4c
~ 5c
~ 7c
~ 8c
IG5
IG1
IG5
IG1
IG
IG
IA5
IA1
IA5
IA1
IA
IA
IB
IB
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC
IC1
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC
IC1
CURRENT INPUTS
8C / 8D
827831A8-X3.CDR
Figure 3–11: CT/VT MODULE WIRING

Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE

3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Every digital input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as 3 terminals per row, with 8 rows in
total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for Form-C relay outputs, the
terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a Form-A out-
put, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered. The
terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications. When a Digital I/O module is ordered with con-
tact inputs, they are arranged in groups of four and use two rows of three terminals. Ideally, each input would be totally iso-
lated from any other input. However, this would require that every input have two dedicated terminals and limit the available
number of contacts based on the available number of terminals. So, although each input is individually optically isolated,
each group of four inputs uses a single common as a reasonable compromise. This allows each group of four outputs to be
supplied by wet contacts from different voltage sources (if required) or a mix of wet and dry contacts.
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may
3 be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
position, row number, and column position.
UR RELAY FORM-A OUTPUT CONTACTS:
Some Form-A outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC cur-
rent through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic
“On = 1” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to “On = 1” when the cur-
rent is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to “On = 1” when the current exceeds about 80 to 100 mA.
The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in
the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. The block diagrams of the circuits are below above
for the Form-A outputs with:
a) optional voltage monitor
b) optional current monitor
c) with no monitoring
If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion

~#a ~#a otherwise Cont Op x Ioff +
I I If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von

otherwise Cont Op x Voff
If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von
~#b + ~#b Load
V Load V
~#c ~#c
- -
a) Voltage with optional
current monitoring Voltage monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring

~#a ~#a otherwise Cont Op x Ioff +
V V If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von

~#b + ~#b Load
otherwise Cont Op x Ioff
I I
Load
~#c ~#c
- -
b) Current with optional
voltage monitoring Current monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring
(external jumper a-b is required)
~#a
~#b +
Load
~#c
c) No monitoring -
827821A4.CDR
Figure 3–12: FORM-A CONTACT FUNCTIONS

The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (Cont Op # Von,
Cont Op # Voff, Cont Op # Ion, and Cont Op # Ioff) which can be used in protection, control and alarm logic. The typical
application of the voltage monitor is Breaker Trip Circuit Integrity monitoring; a typical application of the Current monitor is
seal-in of the control command. Refer to the Digital Elements section of Chapter 5 for an example of how Form-A contacts
can be applied for Breaker Trip Circuit Integrity Monitoring.
Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to
be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure proper insula-
WARNING
tion levels!
USE OF FORM-A OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE For Form-A output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit has
an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitoring
equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the Form-
A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance.
3
The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the
Form-A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power sup-
ply is used as a source, a 500 Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the
Form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module; wherever a number
sign "#" appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the Form-A contact outputs, the FlexLogic™ operand driving
the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in situ-
NOTE
ations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup
value).
Table 3–2: DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A I/O MODULE ~6B I/O MODULE ~6C I/O MODULE ~6D I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-C ~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-C ~2a, ~2c 2 Inputs
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3a, ~3c 2 Inputs
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4a, ~4c 2 Inputs
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6E I/O MODULE ~6F I/O MODULE ~6G I/O MODULE ~6H I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-C ~1 Fast Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~6K I/O MODULE ~6L I/O MODULE ~6M I/O MODULE ~6N I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-C ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
3
~6P I/O MODULE ~6R I/O MODULE ~6S I/O MODULE ~6T I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-A ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6U I/O MODULE ~4A I/O MODULE ~4B I/O MODULE ~4C I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Form-A ~1 Not Used ~1 Not Used ~1 Not Used
~2 Form-A ~2 Solid-State ~2 Solid-State ~2 Solid-State
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Not Used ~7 Not Used ~7 Not Used
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Solid-State ~8 Solid-State ~8 Solid-State
~4L I/O MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT
~1 2 Outputs
~2 2 Outputs
~3 2 Outputs
~4 2 Outputs
~5 2 Outputs
~6 2 Outputs
~7 2 Outputs
~8 Not Used

827719CX-X1.dwg
Figure 3–13: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)

– MOSFET Solid State Contact 82719CX-X2.dwg
Figure 3–14: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING (2 of 2)

CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS OR EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
CAUTION

A dry contact has one side connected to Terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power sup-
ply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact
is connected to the required contact input terminal. In addition, the negative side of the external source must be connected
to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact input group. The maximum external source voltage for this
arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
(Dry) DIGITAL I/O 6B (Wet) DIGITAL I/O 6B

~ 7a + CONTACT IN
~ 7c + CONTACT IN
~ 8a + CONTACT IN
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a
~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a
3
~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c 24-250V ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c
~ 7b - COMMON ~ 7b ~ 7b - COMMON ~ 7b
~ 8b SURGE ~ 8b SURGE
B 1b
B 1a CRITICAL
FAILURE
B 2b
POWER SUPPLY
B 3a - 48 VDC
B 3b + OUTPUT
B 5b HI+
CONTROL
B 6b LO+
POWER
B 6a -
B 8a SURGE
B 8b FILTER
827741A4.CDR
Figure 3–15: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS

NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as Form-A or Form-C. The Form A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervi-
sion. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the
circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the Form-A contact closes. If enabled, the cur-
rent monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the Form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized
inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We
recommend using an external DC supply.
NOTE

3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Transducer input/output modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance
temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and
convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three ter-
minals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a"
having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/
output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to Terminal 8b. The figure below illus-
trates the transducer module types (5C, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay.
3 NOTE
~ 1a Hot ~ 1a ~ 1a
5C
5E
dcmA In ~ 1
5F
RTD ~ 1 dcmA In ~ 1
~ 1c Comp ~ 1c ~ 1c
~ 1b Return for RTD ~1 & ~ 2 ~ 2a dcmA In ~ 2 ~ 2a dcmA In ~ 2
~ 2a Hot ~ 2c ~ 2c
RTD ~ 2
~ 2c Comp
~ 3a ~ 3a
~ 2b Return for RTD ~2 & ~ 3 ~ 3c dcmA In ~ 3 dcmA In ~ 3
~ 3c
~ 3a Hot ~ 4a ~ 4a
RTD ~ 3 dcmA In ~ 4 dcmA In ~ 4
~ 3c Comp ~ 4c ~ 4c
~ 3b Return for RTD ~3 & ~4
~ 5a Hot ~ 5a
~ 4a Hot RTD ~ 5 dcmA In ~ 5
RTD ~ 4 ~ 5c Comp ~ 5c
~ 4c Comp
~ 5b Return for RTD ~ 5 & ~ 6 ~ 6a
~ 4b Return for RTD ~4 & ~5 dcmA In ~ 6
~ 6a Hot ~ 6c
~ 6c RTD ~ 6
~ 5a Hot Comp
RTD ~ 5 ~ 7a
ANALOG I/O
~ 5c Comp ~ 6b Return for RTD ~ 6 & ~ 7 dcmA In ~ 7
~ 7c
~ 5b Return for RTD ~5 & ~ 6
~ 7a Hot ~ 8a
~ 6a Hot RTD ~ 7 dcmA In ~ 8
RTD ~ 6 ~ 7c Comp ~ 8c
~ 6c Comp
ANALOG I/O
~ 7b Return for RTD ~ 7 & ~ 8

~ 6b Return for RTD ~6 & ~ 7 ~ 8a Hot
~ 8b SURGE
RTD ~ 8
~ 7a Hot ~ 8c Comp
RTD ~ 7
~ 7c Comp
~ 8b
ANALOG I/O
Return for RTD

SURGE
~ 7b ~7 & ~ 8
~ 8a Hot
RTD ~ 8
~ 8c Comp
~ 8b SURGE 827831A8-X1.CDR
Figure 3–16: TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING

3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the relay’s faceplate for programming with a portable (personal) computer. All that
is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the URPC software provided with the relay. Cabling for the
RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors.
Note that the baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
Figure 3–17: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION
3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS
a) OPTIONS
In addition to the RS232 port on the faceplate, the relay provides the user with two additional communication port(s)
depending on the CPU module installed.
CPU TYPE COM1 COM2

9A RS485 RS485
9C 10BASE-F RS485
9D Redundant 10Base-F RS485
D2a Tx Tx1
Rx 10BaseF NORMAL Rx110BaseF NORMAL
9C
9D
RS485
9A
D3a COM
COM 1 1 Tx2
ALTERNATE COM
D4a COM 10BaseT TEST ONLY Rx210BaseF 1
D3b D3b 10BaseT TEST ONLY
RS485 RS485
D4b D4b
COM 2 COM 2 D3b
D5b COM D5b COM RS485
D4b
D5a D5a COM 2
IRIG-B IRIG-B D5b COM
CPU
CPU
D6a D6a
D5a
D7b SURGE D7b SURGE IRIG-B
CPU
D6a
D7b SURGE GROUND
827831A8-X6.CDR
Figure 3–18: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING

b) RS485 PORTS
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternat-
ing over the same two wires. Through the use of these port(s), continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,
SCADA system or PLC is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–”
terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when pro-
vided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to
the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For
larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to
increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
3 communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An iso-
lated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
TWISTED
RELAY
SHIELD
ZT (*) PAIR D2a RS485 +
DATA RS485 PORT DATA
D3a RS485 -
36V
COM
D7b SURGE
Required
CHASSIS GROUND
D4a COMP 485COM
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER
GROUND SHIELD AT
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY
OR AT UR RELAY ONLY
RELAY
(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT
D2a RS485 +
EACH END (TYPICALLY 120 Ohms and 1 nF)
D3a 485 -
D7b SURGE
D4a COMP 485COM
UP TO 32 DEVICES,
MAXIMUM 4000 FEET RELAY
ZT (*)
D2a 485 +
D3a 485 -
D7b SURGE
D4a COMP 485COM LAST DEVICE
827757A5.DWG
Figure 3–19: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION

c) 10BASE-F FIBER OPTIC PORT

ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED
CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps. Optical fiber
may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nanometers in multimode. Optical fiber is only available for
CPU types 9C and 9D. The 9D CPU has a 10BaseF transmitter and receiver for optical fiber communications and a second
pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm and 100/140 µm. The fiber optic port is designed such
that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 µm or less in diameter. For optical power budgeting, splices are
required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair (the ST type connector contributes for a connector loss of 0.2 dB). 3
When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or dis-
engage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.
3.2.9 IRIG-B
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
IRIG-B RELAY
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE
TIME CODE
GENERATOR + D5a IRIG-B(+)
(DC SHIFT OR RECEIVER
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
- D6a IRIG-B(-)
827756A4.CDR
TO OTHER DEVICES
Figure 3–20: IRIG-B CONNECTION

IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within
1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or ampli-
tude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.

3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE
3.3DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The C60 Direct I/O feature makes use of the Type 7 series of communications modules. These modules are also used by
the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The Direct I/O feature uses the communications channel(s)
provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is available on all UR relays
models except for the L60 and L90 Line relays.
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one mod-
ule is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver
of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four UR
relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx.
The maximum number of UR relays that can be connected in a single ring is eight.
Tx
3 UR #1
Rx
Tx
UR #2
Rx
Tx
UR #3
Rx
Tx
UR #4
Rx
842006A1.CDR
Figure 3–21: DIRECT I/O SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION

The following diagram shows the interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules. Two channel modules
allow for a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path.
The required connections are as follows: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1
to UR1-Rx1 for the first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, UR2-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, and UR4-Tx2 to UR1-
Rx2 for the second ring.
Tx1
Rx1
UR #1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR #2
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR #3
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR #4
Tx2
Rx2
842007A1.CDR
Figure 3–22: DIRECT I/O DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION

3 HARDWARE 3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
The following diagram shows the interconnection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication chan-
nels. UR1 and UR3 have single Type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication
channels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the Direct I/O data to ‘cross-over’ from
Channel 1 to Channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be “Enabled” on UR2. This forces UR2
to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
Tx
UR #1
Rx
Channel #1
Tx1
Rx1
UR #2
Tx2
3
Rx2
Channel #2
Tx
UR #3
Rx
842013A1.CDR
Figure 3–23: DIRECT I/O SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION

The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of Type 7 commu-
nications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors.
Table 3–3: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS

MODULE SPECIFICATION
TYPE
7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
7L Channel 1: RS422, Channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels
74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION

3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module: 7A / 7B / 7C 7H / 7I / 7J
Connection Location: Slot X Slot X
RX1 RX1
TX1 TX1
3
RX2
TX2
1 Channel 2 Channels 831719A2.CDR
Figure 3–24: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module: 72/ 7D 73/ 7K

Connection Location: Slot X Slot X
TX1 TX1
RX1 RX1
TX2
RX2
1 Channel 2 Channels 831720A3.CDR
Figure 3–25: LASER FIBER MODULES

When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum
Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING

3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Con-
necting the shield to Pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if
Pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
X 1a Shld.
7R
X 1b Tx -
G.703
X 2a Rx -
CHANNEL 1
X 2b Tx +
X 3a
X 3b
Rx +
SURGE
3
X 6a Shld.
X 6b Tx -
L90 COMM.
X 7a Rx - G.703
CHANNEL 2
X 7b Tx +
X 8a Rx +
X 8b SURGE
Figure 3–26: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrange-
ment of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Shld. X 1a X 1a Shld.
7R
7R
Tx - X 1b X 1b Tx -
G.703 G.703
CHANNEL 1
Rx - X 2a X 2a Rx -
CHANNEL 1
Tx + X 2b X 2b Tx +
Rx + X 3a X 3a Rx +
SURGE X 3b X 3b SURGE
Shld. X 6a X 6a Shld.
Tx - X 6b X 6b Tx -
L90 COMM.
L90 COMM.
G.703 G.703
CHANNEL 2
Rx - X 7a X 7a Rx -
CHANNEL 2
Tx + X 7b X 7b Tx +
Rx + X 8a X 8a Rx +
SURGE X 8b X 8b SURGE
Figure 3–27: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES

Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see
pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that “A” is equivalent to “+”
NOTE
and “B” is equivalent to “–”.
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES

1. Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2. Remove the module cover screw.
3. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes.
5. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
6. Re-insert the G.703 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as

the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the
clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 3–28: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
Table 3–4: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS

SWITCHES FUNCTION
S1 OFF → Octet Timing Disabled
ON → Octet Timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6 S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF → Loop Timing Mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF → Internal Timing Mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON → Minimum Remote Loopback Mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON → Dual Loopback Mode
c) OCTET TIMING (SWITCH S1)

If Octet Timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of Bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connect-
ing to higher order systems. When L90's are connected back to back, Octet Timing should be disabled (OFF).
d) TIMING MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6)

• Internal Timing Mode: The system clock generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the
Internal Timing Mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For Back to Back Connections, set for Octet Timing
(S1 = OFF) and Timing Mode = Internal Timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
• Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection
should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (UR-
to-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to Octet Timing (S1 = ON) and set Timing Mode = Loop Timing (S5 = OFF and S6
= OFF).

e) TEST MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6)

MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE:
In Minimum Remote Loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 Line Side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer
and then returns to the transmitter. The Differential Received Data is processed and passed to the G.703 Transmitter mod-
ule after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 Receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMR G7X DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
3
DMX G7R
DUAL LOOPBACK MODE:

In Dual Loopback Mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each Receiver/
Transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester Receiver module and then is returned to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 Receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 Transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One
source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the Differential Manchester side of the interface.
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMR G7X DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMX G7R

3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the RS422 2-Terminal interface configuration at 64K baud. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is rec-
ommended for external connections. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices which optically iso-
lated.
SHIELD TERMINATION
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a and/or 7b; Site 2: Terminate shield to ‘COM’ pin 2b.
The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
W 3b Tx -
3
W7W
W 3a Rx -
RS422
W 2a Tx +
CHANNEL 1
W 4b Rx +
W 6a Shld.
W 5b Tx -
W 5a Rx -
RS422
W 4a Tx +
CHANNEL 2
W 6b Rx +
W 7b Shld.
W 7a +
CLOCK
W 8b -
W 2b com
W 8a SURGE
RS422.CDR
p/o 827831A6.CDR
Figure 3–29: RS422 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two RS422 interfaces. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Tx - W 3b W 3b Tx -
7T
RS422
Rx - W 3a W 3a Rx -
RS422 7T
Tx + W 2a W 2a Tx +
CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1
Rx + W 4b W 4b Rx +
Shld. W 6a W 6a Shld.
+ W 7a W 7a +
CLOCK CLOCK
- W 8b W 8b -
com W 2b + W 2b com
SURGE W 8a W 8a SURGE
64 KHz
831728A3.CDR
Figure 3–30: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES
b) TWO CHANNEL APPLICATIONS VIA MULTIPLEXERS

The RS422 Interface may be used for ‘1 channel’ or ‘2 channel’ applications over SONET/SDH and/or Multiplexed systems.
When used in 1 channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing Tx,
Rx, and Send Timing connections. However, when used in 2 channel applications, certain criteria have to be followed due
to the fact that there is 1 clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connec-
tions are observed and your Data Module has a feature called Terminal Timing. Terminal Timing is a common feature to
most Synchronous Data Units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the Terminal Timing
feature, 2 channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The Send Timing outputs from the Multi-
plexer - Data Module 1, will connect to the Clock inputs of the UR–RS422 interface in the usual fashion. In addition, the
Send Timing outputs of Data Module 1 will also be paralleled to the Terminal Timing inputs of Data Module 2. By using this
configuration the timing for both Data Modules and both UR–RS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As
a result, data sampling for both of the UR–RS422 channels will be synchronized via the Send Timing leads on Data Module
1 as shown in the following figure. If the Terminal Timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.

Data Module 1
Pin No. Signal Name
7W
Tx1(+) W 2a SD(A) - Send Data
Tx1(-) W 3b SD(B) - Send Data
RS422
Rx1(+) W 4b RD(A) - Received Data
CHANNEL 1
Rx1(-) W 3a RD(B) - Received Data
Shld. W 6a RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS)
+ W 7a RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS)
CLOCK
- W 8b RT(A) - Receive Timing
Tx2(+) W 4a RT(B) - Receive Timing
Tx2(-) W 5b CS(A) - Clear To Send
RS422
Rx2(+) W 6b CS(B) - Clear To Send
L90 COMM. CHANNEL 2
Rx2(-) W 5a Local Loopback
Shld. W 7b Remote Loopback
com W 2b Signal Ground
SURGE W 8a ST(A) - Send Timing
ST(B) - Send Timing
Data Module 2
3
Pin No. Signal Name
TT(A) - Terminal Timing
TT(B) - Terminal Timing
SD(A) - Sand Data
SD(B) - Sand Data
RD(A) - Received Data
RD(B) - Received Data
RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS)
CS(A) - Clear To Send
CS(B) - Clear To Send
Local Loopback
Remote Loopback
Signal Ground
ST(A) - Send Timing
ST(B) - Send Timing
831022A2.CDR
Figure 3–31: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION

Data Module 1 provides timing to the C60 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data Module 1 also provides
timing to Data Module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The Data Module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer.
c) TRANSIT TIMING
The RS422 Interface accepts one clock input for Transmit Timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz Transmit
Timing clock of the Multiplexer Interface is sampling the data in the center of the Transmit Data window. Therefore, it is
important to confirm Clock and Data Transitions to ensure Proper System Operation. For example, the following figure
shows the positive edge of the Tx Clock in the center of the Tx Data bit.
Tx Clock
Tx Data
Figure 3–32: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS

d) RECEIVE TIMING
The RS422 Interface utilizes NRZI-MARK Modulation Code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx Clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx Clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (Digital Phase Lock Loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is over-sampled 16X, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data
clock that can be used as the SCC (Serial Communication Controller) receive clock.
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74
modules are used in 2-terminal with a redundant channel or 3-terminal configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the
RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and Channel 2 via direct fiber.
3 AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at
one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly.
WARNING
W 3b Tx1 -
W7L, M, N, P and 74
W 3a Rx1 -
RS422
W 2a Tx1 +
CHANNEL 1
W 4b Rx1 +
W 6a Shld.
Tx2
FIBER
CHANNEL 2
Rx2
W 7a + CLOCK
W 8b - (CHANNEL1)
W 2b com
W 8a SURGE
L907LMNP.CDR
P/O 827831A6.CDR
Figure 3–33: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (Data Communications Equipment) units.
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75
modules are used in configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and
Channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the
shield to Pin 1A at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See pre-
vious sections for more details on the G.703 and Fiber interfaces.
WARNING
X 1a Shld.
W7E, F, G and Q
X 1b Tx -
G.703
X 2a Rx -
CHANNEL 1
X 2b Tx +
X 3a Rx +
X 3b SURGE
Tx2
FIBER
CHANNEL 2
Rx2
Figure 3–34: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (76 and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94 compliant
digital multiplexer and/or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with Direct I/O applications on firmware
revision 3.3x. The IEEE C37.94 Standard defines a point to point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer
and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1,
2, …12. The UR series C37.94 communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International
Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommendation G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame
is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 × 64 kbps optical fiber interface
Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber
Fiber optic mode: multi-mode
Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km
3
Fiber optic connector: Type ST
Wavelength: 830 ±40 nm
Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to an compliant digital multiplexer that supports
the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
IEEE C37.94
Fiber Interface
Digital
UR series Multiplexer
relay IEEE C37.94
compliant
up to 2 km
The UR series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a
non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard as
shown below.
IEEE C37.94 RS422

Fiber Interface Interface
Digital
UR series IEEE C37.94 Multiplexer
relay Converter with EIA-422
up to 2 km Interface
The UR series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The func-
tions of the control switches is shown below.
Internal Timing Mode Loop Timed
te te
xt xt
ON ON
te te
xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te
xt xt xt xt OFF xt xt xt xt xt xt OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Switch Internal Loop Timed

1 ON OFF
2 ON OFF
3 OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF
5 OFF OFF
6 OFF OFF

For the Internal Timing Mode, the system clock is generated internally; therefore, the timing switch selection should be
Internal Timing for Relay 1 and Loop Timed for Relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the Looped Timing Mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal; therefore, the timing selection
should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems.
The C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the C37.94 module (76 or 77):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2. Remove the module cover screw.
3 3. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
5. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
6. Re-insert the C37.94 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot posi-
tion. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position
as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage
the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 3–35: C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1URPC INTERFACE 4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The URPC software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device. The alternate
human interface is implemented via the device’s faceplate keypad and display (see Faceplate Interface section in this
chapter).
URPC provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation of relay functions, con-
nected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (i.e. off-line) or connected (i.e.
on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In on-line
mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time.
The URPC software, provided with every C60 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows® 95, 98,
or NT. This chapter provides a summary of the basic URPC software interface features. The URPC Help File provides
details for getting started and using the URPC software interface.
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST
To start using the URPC software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the URPC Help File or
refer to the Connecting URPC with the C60 section in Chapter 1 for details.
4.1.3 URPC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW 4

a) ENGAGING A DEVICE
The URPC software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a UR relay. Communicat-
ing relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays
selected from the UR product series.
b) USING SETTINGS FILES

The URPC software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
• In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
• While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then
save the settings to the relay.
• You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
• Device Definition
• Product Setup
• System Setup
• FlexLogic™
• Grouped Elements
• Control Elements
• Inputs/Outputs
• Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
c) CREATING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS

You can create or edit a FlexLogic™ equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically
generated logic diagram.
d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.

4.1 URPC INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS

While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified
parameters, via one of the following:
• Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest.
• Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of
power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT
• Execution: Any URPC file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus to the
already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from the Set-
tings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu.
• Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target
for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any
Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabet-
ically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu
4 in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device.
g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES
The firmware of a UR device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the URPC® software. The corresponding instructions
are provided by the URPC® Help program under the topic “Upgrading Firmware”.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default
values, min/max values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The
NOTE
addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. The
“EEPROM DATA ERROR” message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test
message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This
message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC INTERFACE
4.1.4 URPC SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
The URPC software main window supports the following primary display components:
a. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view
b. Main window menu bar
c. Main window tool bar
d. Site List control bar window
e. Settings List control bar window
f. Device data view window(s), with common tool bar
g. Settings File data view window(s), with common tool bar
h. Workspace area with data view tabs
i. Status bar
Figure 4–1: URPC SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2.1 FACEPLATE
The keypad/display/LED interface is one of two alternate human interfaces supported. The other alternate human interface
is implemented via the URPC software. The UR faceplate interface is available in two configurations: horizontal or vertical.
The faceplate interface consists of several functional panels.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over
the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following two figures show the horizontal
and vertical arrangement of faceplate panels.
LED PANEL 1 LED PANEL 2 LED PANEL 3 DISPLAY
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TROUBLE CURRENT RESET
TEST MODE
TRIP
FREQUENCY
OTHER USER 1
GE Multilin
ALARM PHASE A
PICKUP PHASE B USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3
MENU 7 8 9
1 3 5 7 9 11
4
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL HELP MESSAGE 4 5 6
ESCAPE 1 2 3
2 4 6 8 10 12 ENTER VALUE 0 . +/-

USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
USER-PROGRAMMABLE KEYPAD
PUSHBUTTONS 1-12 827801A4.CDR
Figure 4–2: UR HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS
DISPLAY
MENU 7 8 9
HELP MESSAGE 4 5 6
ESCAPE 1 2 3 KEYPAD
ENTER VALUE 0 . +/-
LED PANEL 3
LED PANEL 2
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP
ALARM
PICKUP
OTHER
PHASE A
PHASE B
USER 1
USER 2
LED PANEL 1
827830A1.CDR
PHASE C
Figure 4–3: UR VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.2 LED INDICATORS
a) LED PANEL 1
This panel provides several LED indicators, several keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any
latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset
via the SETTINGS !" INPUT/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING menu). The USER keys are used by the Breaker Control feature. The
RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC.
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP OTHER USER 1
ALARM PHASE A
PICKUP PHASE B USER 2
PHASE C
Figure 4–4: LED PANEL 1

STATUS INDICATORS:
• IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the
4
relay has been programmed.
• TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
• TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.
• TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; the RESET command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
• ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
• PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:
These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has a latched flag
waiting to be reset.
• VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.
• CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.
• FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.
• OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.
• PHASE A: Indicates Phase A was involved.
• PHASE B: Indicates Phase B was involved.
• PHASE C: Indicates Phase C was involved.
• NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates neutral or ground was involved.

b) LED PANELS 2 AND 3

These panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a custom-
ized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-Programmable LEDs section in Chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
Figure 4–5: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)
c) DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2

4
SETTINGS IN USE BREAKER 1 SYNCHROCHECK
GROUP 1 OPEN NO1 IN-SYNCH
GROUP 2 CLOSED NO2 IN-SYNCH
GROUP 3 TROUBLE
GROUP 4 RECLOSE
GROUP 5 BREAKER 2 ENABLED
GROUP 6 OPEN DISABLED
GROUP 7 CLOSED IN PROGRESS
GROUP 8 TROUBLE LOCKED OUT
Figure 4–6: LED PANEL 2 DEFAULT LABELS

The default labels are intended to represent:
• GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.
• BREAKER n OPEN: The breaker is open.
• BREAKER n CLOSED: The breaker is closed.
• BREAKER n TROUBLE: A problem related to the breaker has been detected.
• SYNCHROCHECK NO n IN-SYNCH: Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element.
• RECLOSE ENABLED: The recloser is operational.
• RECLOSE DISABLED: The recloser is not operational.
• RECLOSE IN PROGRESS: A reclose operation is in progress.
• RECLOSE LOCKED OUT: The recloser is not operational and requires a reset.
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support
six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight
NOTE
setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-Programmable LEDs section of Chapter 5 . The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both LED panels 2 and 3
as explained in the next section.

d) CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS

Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL:
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/
This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures
are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x)
edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.
1. Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1501-0014).
Push in
and gently lift
up the cover.
2. Pop out the LED Module and/or the Blank Module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the
plastic. 4
( LED MODULE ) ( BLANK MODULE )
3. Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.
4. Put the clear Lexan Front Cover back into place.
e) CUSTOMIZING THE LED DISPLAY

The following items are required to customize the UR display module:
• Black and white or color printer (color preferred)
• Microsoft Word 97 or later software
• 1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069),
and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015)
1. Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on
the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required.
2. When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use.
3. Print the template(s) to a local printer.
4. From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide.
5. Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the
clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.

4.2.3 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 × 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting con-
ditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the
aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will
default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and
appear on the display.
4.2.4 KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into ‘pages’ under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Tar-
gets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement
numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit
mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The key may be
pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values.
4
MENU 7 8 9
HELP MESSAGE 4 5 6
ESCAPE 1 2 3
ENTER VALUE 0 . +/-
Figure 4–7: KEYPAD
4.2.5 BREAKER CONTROL
a) INTRODUCTION
The C60 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker,
which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually
initiated from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic™ operand. A setting is provided to assign names
to each breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for
two breakers; the user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker No. 1.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" BREAKERS ! BREAKER n ! BREAKER FUNC-
TION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.
b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING

Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-Pole), or in the one and three-pole (1-
Pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as 3-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed position.
If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in agree-
ment to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" BREAKERS ! BREAKER n !" BREAKER
PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is "Enabled" for each breaker..
c) FACEPLATE (USER KEY) CONTROL

After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS

For the following example setup, the symbol (Name) represents the user-programmed variable name.

For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker No. 1 and breaker No. 2.
The USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2
key is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.
ENTER COMMAND This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a
PASSWORD COMMAND PASSWORD is required; i.e. if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no com-
mands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.
Press USER 1 This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This mes-
To Select Breaker sage will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2)
and (3) below:
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is
To Close BKR1-(Name) pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to close breaker No. 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is 4
To Open BKR1-(Name) pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to open breaker No. 1.
(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1),
(2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers.
Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.
e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER

For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker No. 1 only. Operation for this application is identical
to that described for two breakers.
4.2.6 MENUS
a) NAVIGATION
Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as
illustrated below.
! ! !
ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS
" " " "
## ACTUAL VALUES ## SETTINGS ## COMMANDS No Active

## STATUS ## PRODUCT SETUP ## VIRTUAL INPUTS Targets
!
USER DISPLAYS
(when in use)
"
User Display 1

b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (##), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (#). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the
MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually
pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)

## SETTINGS
## SYSTEM SETUP
c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION

4
## ACTUAL VALUES Press the key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This
## STATUS page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the
MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers.
"
## SETTINGS Press the key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page
## PRODUCT SETUP contains settings to configure the relay.
"
## SETTINGS Press the MESSAGE key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains
## SYSTEM SETUP settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display
the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header.
"
# PASSWORD From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE key
# SECURITY once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).
"
ACCESS LEVEL: Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first setting for Pass-
Restricted word Security. Pressing the MESSAGE key repeatedly will display the remaining
" setting messages for this sub-header.
# PASSWORD Press the MESSAGE key once to move back to the first sub-header message.
# SECURITY
"
# DISPLAY Pressing the MESSAGE key will display the second setting sub-header associ-
# PROPERTIES ated with the Product Setup header.
"
FLASH MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first setting for Dis-
TIME: 1.0 s play Properties.
"
DEFAULT MESSAGE To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader,
INTENSITY: 25% repeatedly press the MESSAGE key. The last message appears as shown.

4.2.7 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA

Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
FLASH MESSAGE For example, select the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES ! FLASH
TIME: 1.0 s MESSAGE TIME setting.
"
MINIMUM: 0.5 Press the key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the key
MAXIMUM: 10.0 again to view the next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
• 0 to 9 and (decimal point): The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A num-
ber is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the
MESSAGE key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
• VALUE : The VALUE key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value
allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE
upward from the minimum value. The VALUE
key again will allow the setting selection to continue
key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the
4
minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to con-
tinue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
TIME: 2.5 s numeric keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are
" being entered.
NEW SETTING Until is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press
HAS BEEN STORED to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as
confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will
be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA

Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is
comprised of two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL: For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command",
Restricted "Setting", and "Factory Service".
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE key displays the next selection while the
VALUE key displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL: If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selec-
Setting tion is displayed. Press at any time for the context sensitive help messages.
"
NEW SETTING Changes are not registered by the relay until the key is pressed. Pressing
HAS BEEN STORED stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirma-
tion of the storing process.

c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT

Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper
case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific appli-
cations. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example: to enter the text, “Breaker #1”
1. Press to enter text edit mode.
2. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press to advance the cursor to the next position.
3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4. Press to store the text.
5. If you have any problem, press to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for sev-
eral seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing displays how to edit and store new values.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY
4 RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and
this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is
safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings
have not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the
"Programmed" state.
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:
1. Press the key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message
appears on the display.
2. Press the MESSAGE key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
SETTINGS
"
## SETTINGS # PASSWORD
## PRODUCT SETUP # SECURITY
# DISPLAY
# PROPERTIES
↓
# USER-DEFINABLE
# DISPLAYS
# INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS:
# Not Programmed
5. After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the
selection to "Programmed".
6. Press the key.
RELAY SETTINGS: RELAY SETTINGS: NEW SETTING

Not Programmed Programmed HAS BEEN STORED

7. When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the
In Service LED will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS

To enter the initial Setting (or Command) Password, proceed as follows:
1. Press the key until the 'SETTINGS' header flashes momentarily and the ‘SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP’ mes-
sage appears on the display.
2. Press the MESSAGE key until the ‘ACCESS LEVEL:’ message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE key until the ‘CHANGE SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD:’ message appears on the
display.
SETTINGS
"
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No 4
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ----------
ENCRYPTED SETTING
4. After the 'CHANGE...PASSWORD' message appears on the display, press the VALUE key or the VALUE key to
change the selection to Yes.
5. Press the key and the display will prompt you to 'ENTER NEW PASSWORD'.
6. Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the key.
7. When the 'VERIFY NEW PASSWORD' is displayed, re-type in the same password and press .
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING ENTER NEW VERIFY NEW

PASSWORD: Yes PASSWORD: ########## PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
8. When the 'NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED' message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will
be active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD

To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will
prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding Encrypted Password from the PASSWORD
SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding.


5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
## SETTINGS # PASSWORD
See page 5-7.
## PRODUCT SETUP # SECURITY
# DISPLAY
See page 5-8.
# PROPERTIES
# CLEAR RELAY
See page 5-9.
# RECORDS
# COMMUNICATIONS
See page 5-10.
#
# MODBUS USER MAP
See page 5-16.
#
# REAL TIME
See page 5-16.
# CLOCK
# FAULT REPORT
See page 5-17.
#
# OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 5-18.
#
# DATA LOGGER
See page 5-20.
#
5
# DEMAND
See page 5-20.
#
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
See page 5-22.
# LEDS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
See page 5-25.
# SELF TESTS
# CONTROL
See page 5-25.
# PUSHBUTTONS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
See page 5-26.
# PUSHBUTTONS
# FLEX STATE
See page 5-28.
# PARAMETERS
# USER-DEFINABLE
See page 5-28.
# DISPLAYS
# DIRECT I/O
See page 5-30.
#
# INSTALLATION
See page 5-35.
#
## SETTINGS # AC INPUTS
See page 5-36.
## SYSTEM SETUP #
# POWER SYSTEM
See page 5-37.
#
# SIGNAL SOURCES
See page 5-38.
#

5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS
# LINE
See page 5-40.
#
# BREAKERS
See page 5-41.
#
# FLEXCURVES
See page 5-44.
#
## SETTINGS # FLEXLOGIC
See page 5-63.
## FLEXLOGIC # EQUATION EDITOR
# FLEXLOGIC
See page 5-63.
# TIMERS
# FLEXELEMENTS
See page 5-64.
#
# NON-VOLATILE
See page 5-68.
# LATCHES
## SETTINGS # SETTING GROUP 1

See page 5-69.
## GROUPED ELEMENTS #
# SETTING GROUP 2
#
5 ↓
# SETTING GROUP 6
#
## SETTINGS # SETTING GROUPS

See page 5-95.
## CONTROL ELEMENTS #
# SELECTOR SWITCH
See page 5-96.
#
# SYNCHROCHECK
See page 5-101.
#
# AUTORECLOSE
See page 5-105.
#
# DIGITAL ELEMENTS
See page 5-116.
#
# DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 5-119.
#
# MONITORING
See page 5-121.
# ELEMENTS
## SETTINGS # CONTACT INPUTS

See page 5-124.
## INPUTS / OUTPUTS #
# VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 5-126.
#
# CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 5-127.
#

# LATCHING OUTPUTS
See page 5-127.
#
# VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 5-129.
#
# REMOTE DEVICES
See page 5-130.
#
# REMOTE INPUTS
See page 5-131.
#
# REMOTE OUTPUTS
See page 5-132.
# DNA BIT PAIRS
# REMOTE OUTPUTS
See page 5-133.
# UserSt BIT PAIRS
# RESETTING
See page 5-133.
#
# DIRECT INPUTS
See page 5-133.
#
# DIRECT OUTPUTS
See page 5-133.
#
## SETTINGS # DCMA INPUTS

## TRANSDUCER I/O #
See page 5-137.
5
# RTD INPUTS
See page 5-138.
#
## SETTINGS TEST MODE

See page 5-139.
## TESTING FUNCTION:
# FORCE CONTACT
See page 5-139.
# INPUTS
# FORCE CONTACT
See page 5-140.
# OUTPUTS
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
In the design of UR relays, the term “element” is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The com-
parator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to deter-
mine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as “setting the flag”. A single
comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a
Pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an Operate flag when the input current has been at a level
above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators, except the Digital Ele-
ment which uses a logic state as the input, use analog parameter actual values as the input.
Elements are arranged into two classes, GROUPED and CONTROL. Each element classed as a GROUPED element is
provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a GROUPED ele-
ment is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a CONTROL element is independent
of the selected active setting group.
The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the input(s), settings, fixed
logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).
Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)

• For current elements, the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. Where the current
source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the ‘base quantity’ will be the common secondary or primary current
to which the sum is scaled (i.e. normalized to the larger of the 2 rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and
CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the ‘base quantity’ will be 5 A
secondary or 300 A primary.
• For voltage elements, the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal secondary or primary voltage of the VT.
Some settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
• FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as "Enabled". The factory
default is "Disabled". Once programmed to "Enabled", any element associated with the Function becomes active and
all options become available.
• NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
• SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.
• PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or
below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the
range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.
• PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the Pickup
and Operate output states.
• RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
• BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set”. The comparator
remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN
input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise
5 the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
• TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no
target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to Self-
Reset, the target message and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once the oper-
ate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the
element output returns to logic 0 - until a RESET command is received by the relay.
• EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
Enabled, events are created for:
(Element) PKP (pickup)
(Element) DPO (dropout)
(Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not ‘0’.
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND
The C60 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two
three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker fail-
ure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying
and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each
of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. These requirements can be satisfied with a single UR, equipped
with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the
AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements.
Selection of the parameter(s) to measure is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control
comparator by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component,
total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to measure. The user completes the process

by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some of the parameters calculated from these channels.
The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of
phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation.
A mechanism called a "Source" configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems.
Sources, in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source
contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all
or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary
voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
To illustrate the concept of Sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. In this
application, the current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location
or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer Winding 1. The current into Winding 1 is the phasor sum (or
difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT
connections). The same considerations apply to transformer Winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net
current for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.
CT1 CT2
Through Current
WDG 1
UR Power
Platform
Transformer
WDG 2
CT3 CT4 827791A2.CDR
Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME

In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of
all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to
perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions
have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summa-
tion are applied internally via configuration settings.
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for
example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features
that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure.
Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to
select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device.
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name
through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can
be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above
diagram, the configures one Source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this Source as “Wdg 1 Current”.
Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the pro-
tection elements and as metered quantities.
b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION

CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage,
phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental
frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each
channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.

A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the
module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group,
hereafter called a “bank,” and all four are either current or voltage, as are Channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6,
7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and
from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
< bank 1 > < bank 3 > < bank 5 >
< bank 2 > < bank 4 > < bank 6 >
The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The
result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of
Sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM MAXIMUM NUMBER
CT/VT Module 3
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) 6
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) 3
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically
generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of
channels in a given product. The ‘bank’ naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by
5 the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot
in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents
the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them
in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,
F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5.
The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument
transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element
and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and
voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make
multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a
watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes.
The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An applica-
tion example of the grouping of parameters in a Source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is mea-
sured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.

5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP ! PASSWORD SECURITY
# PASSWORD ACCESS LEVEL: Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

# SECURITY Restricted Factory Service (for factory use only)
CHANGE COMMAND Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND Range: 0 to 9999999999
MESSAGE Note: ---------- indicates no password
ENCRYPTED SETTING Range: 0 to 9999999999
MESSAGE Note: ---------- indicates no password
Two levels of password security are provided: Command and Setting. Operations under password supervision are:
• COMMAND: operating the breakers via faceplate keypad, changing the state of virtual inputs, clearing the event
records, clearing the oscillography records, clearing fault reports, changing the date and time, clearing
the breaker arcing amps, clearing energy records, clearing the data logger
• SETTING: changing any setting, test mode operation
The Command and Setting passwords are defaulted to "Null" when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password
is set to "Null", the password security feature is disabled.
Programming a password code is required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical charac- 5
ters. When a CHANGE ... PASSWORD setting is set to "Yes", the following message sequence is invoked:
1. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________
2. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________
3. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
To gain write access to a "Restricted" setting, set ACCESS LEVEL to "Setting" and then change the setting, or attempt to
change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access
will be allowed. If no keys are pressed for longer than 30 minutes or control power is cycled, accessibility will automatically
revert to the "Restricted" level.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD.
The UR provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing a
password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic™ operand
is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORISED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS !" CLEAR RECORDS !" RESET UNAUTHORISED
ALARMScommand. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected.
The operand does not generate events or targets. If these are required, the operand can be assigned to a digital element
programmed with event logs and/or targets enabled.
If the SETTING and COMMAND passwords are identical, this one password allows access to both commands
and settings.
NOTE
When URPC is used to access a particular level, the user will continue to have access to that level as long
as there are open windows in URPC. To re-establish the Password Security feature, all URPC windows
NOTE
must be closed for at least 30 minutes.

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES
# DISPLAY FLASH MESSAGE Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

# PROPERTIES TIME: 1.0 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
MESSAGE Visible only if a VFD is installed
INTENSITY: 25 %
SCREEN SAVER Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE Visible only if an LCD is installed
FEATURE: Disabled
SCREEN SAVER Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE Visible only if an LCD is installed
WAIT TIME: 30 min
CURRENT CUT-OFF Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
LEVEL: 1.0 V
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
• FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several
seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal mes-
5 sages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
• DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a
default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values.
• DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be
attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
• SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the C60 has a liquid
crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is "Enabled", the LCD backlighting
is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys
have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD
backlighting is turned on.
• CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the
rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others
prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The C60 applies a cut-
off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substi-
tuted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical compo-
nents. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by
communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
• VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measure-
ments (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed
as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual sig-
nal. The C60 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below
the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical
components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those
used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals
as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of "0.02
NOTE
pu" for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and "1.0 V" for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.

5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
# CLEAR RELAY CLEAR FAULT REPORTS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# RECORDS Off
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAG
No
CLEAR DATA LOGGER: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAG
Off
CLEAR ARC AMPS 1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAG
Off
CLEAR ARC AMPS 2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAG
Off
CLEAR DEMAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAG
Off
CLEAR ENERGY: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAG
Off
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAG
Off 5
CLEAR DIR I/O STATS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand.
MESSAG Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
Off
The C60 allows selected records to be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic™ operands. Setting
user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. The C60 responds
to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic™ operands. As such, the operand must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take
effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-program-
mable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programma-
ble pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
Application Example:
User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 is to be used to clear demand records. The following settings should be applied.
Assign the Clear Demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !"
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”

Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT
SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.20 s”

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS
# COMMUNICATIONS # SERIAL PORTS

See below.
# #
# NETWORK
MESSAGE See page 5–11.
#
# MODBUS PROTOCOL
#
# DNP PROTOCOL
#
# UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
#
# WEB SERVER
# HTTP PROTOCOL
# TFTP PROTOCOL
#
# IEC 60870-5-104
# PROTOCOL
5 MESSAGE
# SNTP PROTOCOL
#
See page 5–16.
b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS ! SERIAL PORTS
# SERIAL PORTS RS485 COM1 BAUD Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
# RATE: 19200 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only
active if CPU 9A is ordered.
RS485 COM1 PARITY: Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type 9A is ordered
None
RS485 COM1 RESPONSE Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type 9A is ordered
MIN TIME: 0 ms
RS485 COM2 BAUD Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
MESSAGE 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200
RATE: 19200
RS485 COM2 PARITY: Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE
None
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
The C60 is equipped with up to 3 independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local
use and has fixed parameters of 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type will depend on the CPU ordered: it
may be either an Ethernet or an RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate
and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is
connected to these ports. Any of these ports may be connected to a personal computer running URPC. This software is
used for downloading or uploading setting files, viewing measured parameters, and upgrading the relay firmware to the lat-
est version. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports.
For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be
set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after
NOTE
each transmission.

c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK
# NETWORK IP ADDRESS: Range: Standard IP address format

# 0.0.0.0 Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
SUBNET IP MASK: Range: Standard IP address format

MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
0.0.0.0
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS: Range: Standard IP address format
0.0.0.0
# OSI NETWORK Range: Press the MESSAGE ! key to enter the OSI
MESSAGE NETWORK ADDRESS. Only active if CPU Type
# ADDRESS (NSAP)
9C or 9D is ordered.
ETHERNET OPERATION Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex
MODE: Half-Duplex
ETHERNET PRI LINK Range: Disabled, Enabled
MONITOR: Disabled
ETHERNET SEC LINK Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type 9D is ordered.
MONITOR: Disabled
These messages appear only if the C60 is ordered with an Ethernet card. The ETHERNET PRI LINK MONITOR and ETHERNET
SEC LINK MONITOR settings allow internal self-test targets to be triggered when either the Primary or Secondary ethernet link
status indicates a connection loss. When both channels are healthy, the primary Ethernet link will be the active link. In the
event of a communication failure on the primary Ethernet link, the secondary link becomes the active link until the primary
link failure has been rectified. 5
The IP addresses are used with DNP/Network, Modbus/TCP, MMS/UCA2, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols.
The NSAP address is used with the MMS/UCA2 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has
a setting for the TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should nor-
mally be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple URs behind a
router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR, the router can map the URs to the
same external IP address. The client software (URPC, for example) must be configured to use the correct port number if
these settings are used.
When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP Port Number, or any User Map setting (when used with DNP) is changed,
it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (OFF/ON).
NOTE
Do not set more than one protocol to use the same TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER, as this will result in unreliable
operation of those protocols.
WARNING
d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL
# MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS SLAVE Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

# ADDRESS: 254
MODBUS TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 502
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP operation (see the DNP Protocol
description below). This allows the URPC software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device only. When
using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the C60 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed.
For the RS485 ports each C60 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all
Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or
conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting
at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol.

e) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" DNP PROTOCOL
# DNP PROTOCOL DNP PORT: Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT
# NONE PANEL - RS232, NETWORK
DNP ADDRESS: Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
255
# DNP NETWORK Range: Press the MESSAGE ! key to enter the DNP
MESSAGE NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
# CLIENT ADDRESSES
DNP TCP/UDP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 20000
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 5 s
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MAX RETRIES: 10
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEST ADDRESS: 1
USER MAP FOR DNP Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
ANALOGS: Disabled
5 NUMBER OF SOURCES Range: 1 to 4 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IN ANALOG LIST: 1
DNP CURRENT SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP POWER SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP ENERGY SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP OTHER SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP POWER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP TIME SYNC IIN Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PERIOD: 1440 min

DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
SIZE: 240
# DNP BINARY INPUTS
MESSAGE
# USER MAP
The C60 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The C60 can be used as a DNP slave device con-
nected to a single DNP master (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the C60 maintains one set of DNP data
change buffers and connection information, only one DNP master should actively communicate with the C60 at one time.
The DNP PORT setting selects the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol; only a single port can be assigned.
Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in
non-ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to “Network”, the DNP protocol can be used over either TCP/IP or UDP/IP.
Refer to Appendix E for more information on the DNP protocol. The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This
number identifies the C60 on a DNP communications link. Each DNP slave should be assigned a unique address. The DNP
NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS setting can force the C60 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be “Disabled” for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the C60 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the C60 retransmits an unsolic-
ited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of “255” allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL
RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolic-
ited responses are sent is determined by the C60 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting allows the large pre-defined Analog Inputs points list to be replaced by the much
smaller Modbus User Map. This can be useful for users wishing to read only selected Analog Input points from the C60.
See Appendix E for more information.
The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that
are included in the Analog Inputs points list. This allows the list to be customized to contain data for only the sources that 5
are configured. This setting is relevant only when the User Map is not used.
The DNP SCALE FACTOR settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the C60 Ana-
log Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all Analog
Input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to a value of 1000, all DNP Analog
Input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value of 72000 V on the C60 will be
returned as 72). These settings are useful when Analog Input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP
masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be 10 times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing Analog Input data. These
settings group the C60 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the
default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the C60
when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set to “15”. Note that
these settings are the deadband default values. DNP Object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the
default, for each individual DNP Analog Input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the C60, the default
deadbands will be in effect.
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the C60.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be
necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
The DNP BINARY INPUTS USER MAP setting allows for the creation of a custom DNP Binary Inputs points list. The default DNP
Binary Inputs list on the C60 contains 928 points representing various binary states (contact inputs and outputs, virtual
inputs and outputs, protection element states, etc.). If not all of these points are required in the DNP master, a custom
Binary Inputs points list can be created by selecting up to 58 blocks of 16 points. Each block represents 16 Binary Input
points. Block 1 represents Binary Input points 0 to 15, block 2 represents Binary Input points 16 to 31, block 3 represents
Binary Input points 32 to 47, etc. The minimum number of Binary Input points that can be selected is 16 (1 block). If all of
the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings are set to “Not Used”, the standard list of 928 points will be in effect. The C60 will form the
Binary Inputs points list from the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings up to the first occurrence of a setting value of “Not Used”.

When using the User Maps for DNP data points (Analog Inputs and/or Binary Inputs) for relays with ether-
net installed, check the “DNP Points Lists” C60 web page to ensure the desired points lists are created.
NOTE
This web page can be viewed using a web browser by entering the C60 IP address to access the C60 “Main
Menu”, then by selecting the “Device Information Menu” > “DNP Points Lists” menu item.
f) UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
# UCA/MMS PROTOCOL DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1. See UserSt Bit Pairs in the
# TIME: 60 s Remote Outputs section of this Chapter.
UCA LOGICAL DEVICE: Range: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters representing

MESSAGE the name of the UCA logical device.
UCADevice
UCA/MMS TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 102
GOOSE FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Enabled
GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
The C60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by the Utility Communication
Architecture (UCA). UCA/MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over eth-
ernet. The C60 operates as a UCA/MMS server. The Remote Inputs/Outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-
peer GOOSE message scheme.
5 The UCA LOGICAL DEVICE setting represents the MMS domain name (UCA logical device) where all UCA objects are
located. The GOOSE FUNCTION setting allows for the blocking of GOOSE messages from the C60. This can be used during
testing or to prevent the relay from sending GOOSE messages during normal operation. The GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS setting
selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide the state of the UCA GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS data item. Refer to Appendix C:
UCA/MMS Communications for additional details on the C60 UCA/MMS support.
g) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
# WEB SERVER HTTP TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

# HTTP PROTOCOL NUMBER: 80
The C60 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. This feature is available only if the C60 has the ethernet option installed. The web
pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the C60 “Main Menu”. Web pages are available
showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, Event Records, Fault Reports, etc. The web pages can
be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The Main Menu will be displayed in the web
browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the C60 into the “Address” box on the web browser.
h) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" TFTP PROTOCOL
# TFTP PROTOCOL TFTP MAIN UDP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

# NUMBER: 69
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the UR over a network. The C60 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file
obtained from the C60 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).

i) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
# IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-5-104 Range: Enabled, Disabled

# PROTOCOL FUNCTION: Disabled
IEC TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 2404
IEC COMMON ADDRESS Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
OF ASDU: 0
IEC CYCLIC DATA Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PERIOD: 60 s
NUMBER OF SOURCES Range: 1 to 4 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IN MMENC1 LIST: 1
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC POWER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 5
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
The C60 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The C60 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to
a single master (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the C60 maintains one set of IEC 60870-5-104
data change buffers, only one master should actively communicate with the C60 at one time. For situations where a second
master is active in a “hot standby” configuration, the UR supports a second IEC 60870-5-104 connection providing the
standby master sends only IEC 60870-5-104 Test Frame Activation messages for as long as the primary master is active.
The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC1 LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that
are included in the M_ME_NC_1 (Measured value, short floating point) Analog points list. This allows the list to be custom-
ized to contain data for only the sources that are configured.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are the values used by the UR to determine when to trigger spontaneous
responses containing M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the UR analog data into types: current, voltage,
power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that
type. For example, in order to trigger spontaneous responses from the UR when any current values change by 15 A, the
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the dead-
bands. P_ME_NC_1 (Parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold val-
ues, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the UR,
the default thresholds will be in effect.
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols can not be used at the same time. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNC-
TION setting is set to “Enabled”, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it
NOTE
will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (Off/On).

j) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" SNTP PROTOCOL
# TFTP PROTOCOL SNTP FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled

# Disabled
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR: Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
SNTP UDP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 123
The C60 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the C60 can obtain clock time
over an Ethernet network. The C60 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a ded-
icated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the C60 clock for
as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If
either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the C60 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is
set and SNTP FUNCTION is “Enabled”, the C60 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time
values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the C60 clock is closely synchronized with
the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to one minute for the C60 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to “0.0.0.0” and SNTP FUNCTION to “Enabled”. The
C60 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the “all ones” broadcast address for the subnet. The C60 waits up to eighteen
minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error.
5 The UR does not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality.
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" MODBUS USER MAP
# MODBUS USER MAP ADDRESS 1: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

# VALUE: 0
↓
ADDRESS 256: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
VALUE: 0
The Modbus User Map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired
address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is dis-
played in the VALUE line. A value of “0” in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous
ADDRESS lines incremented by “1”. An address value of “0” in the initial register means “none” and values of “0” will be dis-
played for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
These settings can also be used with the DNP protocol. See the DNP Analog Input Points section in Appen-
dix E for details.
NOTE
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" REAL TIME CLOCK
# REAL TIME IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE: Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
# CLOCK None
The date and time for the relay clock can be synchronized to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy
as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month. An IRIG-B signal may be connected to the relay to synchronize
the clock to a known time base and to other relays. If an IRIG-B signal is used, only the current year needs to be entered.
See also the COMMANDS " SET DATE AND TIME menu for manually setting the relay clock.

5.2.7 FAULT REPORT
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" FAULT REPORT
# FAULT REPORT FAULT REPORT Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

# SOURCE: SRC 1
FAULT REPORT TRIG: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
The fault report stores data, in non-volatile memory, pertinent to an event when triggered. The captured data includes:
• Name of the relay, programmed by the user
• Date and time of trigger
• Name of trigger (specific operand)
• Active setting group
• Pre-fault current and voltage phasors (one-quarter cycle before the trigger)
• Fault current and voltage phasors (three-quarter cycle after the trigger)
• Target Messages that are set at the time of triggering
• Events (9 before trigger and 7 after trigger)
The captured data also includes the fault type and the distance to the fault location, as well as the reclose shot number.
The trigger can be any FlexLogic™ operand, but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand, usually a vir-
tual output, that is used to drive an output relay to trip a breaker. To prevent the overwriting of fault events, the disturbance
detector should not be used to trigger a fault report.
If a number of protection elements are ORed to create a fault report trigger, the first operation of any element causing the 5
OR gate output to become high triggers a fault report. However, If other elements operate during the fault and the first oper-
ated element has not been reset (the OR gate output is still high), the fault report is not triggered again. Considering the
reset time of protection elements, there is very little chance that fault report can be triggered twice in this manner. As the
fault report must capture a usable amount of pre and post-fault data, it can not be triggered faster than every 20 ms.
Each fault report is stored as a file; the relay capacity is ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file. The operand
selected as the fault report trigger automatically triggers an oscillography record which can also be triggered independently.
URPC is required to view all captured data. The relay faceplate display can be used to view the date and time of trigger, the
fault type, the distance location of the fault, and the reclose shot number
The FAULT REPORT SOURCE setting selects the Source for input currents and voltages and disturbance detection. The FAULT
REPORT TRIG setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand representing the protection element/elements requiring operational
fault location calculations. The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal.
See also SETTINGS " SYSTEM SETUP !" LINE menu for specifying line characteristics and the ACTUAL VALUES " RECORDS
! FAULT REPORTS menu.

5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" OSCILLOGRAPHY
# OSCILLOGRAPHY
#
NUMBER OF RECORDS: Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1

15
TRIGGER MODE: Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

Automatic Overwrite
TRIGGER POSITION: Range: 0 to 100 in steps of 1

50%
TRIGGER SOURCE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

Off
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle

16 samples/cycle
# DIGITAL CHANNELS Range: 2 to 63 channels

#
DIGITAL CHANNEL 1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

Off
↓
5 DIGITAL CHANNEL 63: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
# ANALOG CHANNELS Range: 1 to 16 channels

#
ANALOG CHANNEL 1: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

Off See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
↓
ANALOG CHANNEL 16: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
Off See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic™ operand. Multiple oscillography records may be cap-
tured simultaneously.
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational CT/VT modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage
for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES !"
RECORDS !" OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sam-
ple configurations with corresponding cycles/record.

Table 5–1: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE

# RECORDS # CT/VTS SAMPLE # DIGITALS # ANALOGS CYCLES/
RATE RECORD
1 1 8 0 0 1872.0
1 1 16 16 0 1685.0
8 1 16 16 0 266.0
8 1 16 16 4 219.5
8 2 16 16 4 93.5
8 2 16 64 16 93.5
8 2 32 64 16 57.6
8 2 64 64 16 32.3
32 2 64 64 16 9.5
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to “Automatic Overwrite”.
The TRIGGER POSITION is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position
of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data.
The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic™ parameter (element state, contact
input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.
The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (i.e. current and voltage) are
stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling
rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle, i.e. it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
An ANALOG CHANNEL setting selects the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscil-
lography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to ‘Off’ are ignored. The param-
5
eters available in a given relay are dependent on: (a) the type of relay, (b) the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules
installed, and (c) the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automati-
cally prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A:
FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the
parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/
display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB desig-
nates the IB signal on Terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F. If there are no CT/VT modules and Analog Input modules,
no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear.
When the NUMBER OF RECORDS setting is altered, all oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING

5.2.9 DATA LOGGER
PATH: SETTINGS !" PRODUCT SETUP !" DATA LOGGER
# DATA LOGGER DATA LOGGER RATE: Range: 1 sec; 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30
# 1 min min, 60 min
DATA LOGGER CHNL 1: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:
MESSAGE FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
Off
Off
↓
Off
DATA LOGGER CONFIG: Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
MESSAGE
0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may
be downloaded to the URPC software and displayed with ‘parameters’ on the vertical axis and ‘time’ on the horizontal axis.
All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost.
For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of
channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use.
Changing any setting affecting Data Logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
5 NOTE
• DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded.
• DATA LOGGER CHNL 1 (16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of
the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/
VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup,
the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is
shown in Appendix A: Flexanalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to
expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of
parameters via the relay keypad/display – entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding
parameter to be displayed.
• DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not
selected to “Off” without over-writing old data.
5.2.10 DEMAND
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DEMAND
# DEMAND CRNT DEMAND METHOD: Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval,

# Thermal Exponential Rolling Demand
POWER DEMAND METHOD: Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval,

MESSAGE Rolling Demand
Thermal Exponential
DEMAND INTERVAL: Range: 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
MESSAGE
15 MIN
DEMAND TRIGGER: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE Note: for calculation using Method 2a
Off

The relay measures current demand on each phase, and three-phase demand for real, reactive, and apparent power. Cur-
rent and Power methods can be chosen separately for the convenience of the user. Settings are provided to allow the user
to emulate some common electrical utility demand measuring techniques, for statistical or control purposes. If the CRNT
DEMAND METHOD is set to "Block Interval" and the DEMAND TRIGGER is set to “Off”, Method 2 is used (see below). If
DEMAND TRIGGER is assigned to any other FlexLogic™ operand, Method 2a is used (see below).
The relay can be set to calculate demand by any of three methods as described below:
CALCULATION METHOD 1: THERMAL EXPONENTIAL
This method emulates the action of an analog peak recording thermal demand meter. The relay measures the quantity
(RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) on each phase every second, and assumes the circuit quan-
tity remains at this value until updated by the next measurement. It calculates the 'thermal demand equivalent' based on the
following equation:
d(t) = D(1 – e–kt) d = demand value after applying input quantity for time t (in minutes)
D = input quantity (constant)
k = 2.3 / thermal 90% response time.
100
80
Demand (%)
60
40
20
0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30
Time (min)
Figure 5–2: THERMAL DEMAND CHARACTERISTIC 5

See the 90% thermal response time characteristic of 15 minutes in the figure above. A setpoint establishes the time to
reach 90% of a steady-state value, just as the response time of an analog instrument. A steady state value applied for twice
the response time will indicate 99% of the value.
CALCULATION METHOD 2: BLOCK INTERVAL
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over
the programmed demand time interval, starting daily at 00:00:00 (i.e. 12:00 am). The 1440 minutes per day is divided into
the number of blocks as set by the programmed time interval. Each new value of demand becomes available at the end of
each time interval.
CALCULATION METHOD 2a: BLOCK INTERVAL (with Start Demand Interval Logic Trigger)
the interval between successive Start Demand Interval logic input pulses. Each new value of demand becomes available at
the end of each pulse. Assign a FlexLogic™ operand to the DEMAND TRIGGER setting to program the input for the new
demand interval pulses.
If no trigger is assigned in the DEMAND TRIGGER setting and the CRNT DEMAND METHOD is "Block Interval", use cal-
culating method #2. If a trigger is assigned, the maximum allowed time between 2 trigger signals is 60 minutes. If
NOTE
no trigger signal appears within 60 minutes, demand calculations are performed and available and the algorithm
resets and starts the new cycle of calculations. The minimum required time for trigger contact closure is 20 µs.
CALCULATION METHOD 3: ROLLING DEMAND
the programmed demand time interval, in the same way as Block Interval. The value is updated every minute and indicates
the demand over the time interval just preceding the time of update.

5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE # LED TEST

See below
# LEDS #
# TRIP & ALARM
# LEDS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# LED 1
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
MESSAGE
# LED 2
↓
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
MESSAGE
# LED 48
b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS ! LED TEST
# LED TEST LED TEST FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled.

# Disabled
5 MESSAGE
LED TEST CONTROL: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
When enabled, the LED Test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-program-
mable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs,
including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The test consists of three stages.
Stage 1: All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is “burned”. This stage
lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.
Stage 2: All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine
starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures
that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
Stage 3: All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at
the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that
lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitor-
ing features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and
stores the actual LED states (On or Off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting
from relay response during testing. The Reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic™ operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is ini-
tiated, the LED Test Initiated event is stored in the Event Recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, Stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and Stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL set-
ting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.

READY TO TEST
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
rising edge of the
operand
control input
Start the software image of Restore the LED states

the LEDs from the software image
Set the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
control input is on
STAGE 1 time-out
(all LEDs on) (1 minute)
dropping edge of the

control input
rising edge of the

Wait 1 second
control input
STAGE 2 rising edge of the

(one LED on at a time) control input
Wait 1 second
rising edge of the
control input
5
rising edge
STAGE 3
of the control
(one LED off at a time) input
842011A1.CDR
Figure 5–3: LED TEST SEQUENCE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1:
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is “burned” through User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The following set-
tings should be applied.
Configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-
PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
Configure the LED test to recognize User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS !
PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS ! LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: “Enabled”

LED TEST CONTROL: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
The test will be initiated when the User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for
as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then
automatically start Stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2:
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via User-Programmable Pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in Application Example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next,
release the pushbutton to automatically start Stage 2. Once Stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When
Stage 2 is completed, Stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.

c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS !" TRIP & ALARM LEDS
# TRIP & ALARM TRIP LED INPUT: Range: Disabled, Enabled

# LEDS Disabled
ALARM LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
The Trip and Alarm LEDs are on LED Panel 1. Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the
selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the Logic 1 state.
d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# LED 1 Off
LED 1 TYPE: Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illumi-
nate when the selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the Logic 1 state.
• LEDs 1 through 24 inclusive are on LED Panel 2; LEDs 25 through 48 inclusive are on LED Panel 3.
Refer to the LED Indicators section in Chapter 4 for the locations of these indexed LEDs. This menu selects the operands
to control these LEDs. Support for applying user-customized labels to these LEDs is provided. If the LED X TYPE setting is
5 “Self-Reset” (default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED X TYPE setting
is ‘Latched’, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communi-
cations channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
Table 5–2: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR LED PANEL 2 LABELS

SETTING PARAMETER SETTING PARAMETER
LED 1 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 1 LED 13 Operand Off
LED 2 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 2 LED 14 Operand BREAKER 2 OPEN
LED 3 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 3 LED 15 Operand BREAKER 2 CLOSED
LED 4 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 4 LED 16 Operand BREAKER 2 TROUBLE
LED 5 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 5 LED 17 Operand SYNC 1 SYNC OP
LED 6 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 6 LED 18 Operand SYNC 2 SYNC OP
LED 7 Operand Off LED 19 Operand Off
LED 8 Operand Off LED 20 Operand Off
LED 9 Operand BREAKER 1 OPEN LED 21 Operand AR ENABLED
LED 10 Operand BREAKER 1 CLOSED LED 22 Operand AR DISABLED
LED 11 Operand BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED 23 Operand AR RIP
LED 12 Operand Off LED 24 Operand AR LO
Refer to the Control of Setting Groups example in the Control Elements section of this Chapter for group activation.

5.2.12 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE DIRECT RING BREAK Range: Disabled, Enabled.

# SELF TESTS FUNCTION: Enabled Valid for units equipped with Direct I/O Module.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled.

MESSAGE Valid for units equipped with Direct I/O Module.
FUNCTION: Enabled
REMOTE DEVICE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE Valid for units equipped with CPU Type C or D.
FUNCTION: Enabled
PRI. ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
FUNCTION: Disabled
SEC. ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE Valid for units equipped with CPU Type D.
FUNCTION: Disabled
BATTERY FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
SNTP FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
FUNCTION: Enabled
IRIG-B FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic™ operands, events, and targets.
Most of the Minor Alarms can be disabled if desired. 5
When in the “Disabled” mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic™ operand, write to the event recorder, display target
messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the “Enabled” mode,
minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay Self-Tests section in Chapter
7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms.
5.2.13 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ! CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(3)
# CONTROL CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

# PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The three standard pushbuttons located on the top left panel of the faceplate are user-programmable and can be used for
various applications such as performing an LED test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-pro-
grammable displays, etc. Firmware revisions 3.2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control. This
functionality has been retained – if the Breaker Control feature is configured to use the three pushbuttons, they cannot be
used as user-programmable control pushbuttons. The location of the control pushbuttons in shown below.
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP OTHER USER 1
ALARM PHASE A CONTROL
PICKUP PHASE B USER 2 PUSHBUTTONS
PHASE C
Figure 5–4: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

The control pushbuttons are typically not used for critical operations. As such, they are not protected by the control pass-
word. However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable the control pushbuttons
for security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic™ operand, CONTROL PUSHBTN 1(3) ON. These operands should be
configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is
pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton
manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the Event Record (as per used setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed; no event is logged
when the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously – a given
key must be released before the next one can be pressed.
The control pushbuttons become user-programmable only if the Breaker Control feature is not configured for manual con-
trol via the User 1 through User 3 pushbuttons as shown below. Typically, if configured for manual control, the Breaker Con-
trol feature will use the larger, optional user-programmable pushbuttons, making the control pushbuttons available for any
other user application.
SETTING
{
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON
1 FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
When applicable
AND RUN
Enabled=1
OFF TIMER
5 SYSTEM SETUP/ FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/ ON 0 CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON 100 msec
CONTROL:
842010A2.CDR
Enabled=1
Figure 5–5: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC
5.2.14 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1(12)
# USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

# FUNCTION: Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE
TIME: 0.00 s
PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGETS: Disabled
PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The C60 has 12 optional user-programmable pushbuttons available, each configured via 12 identical menus. The pushbut-
tons provide an easy and error-free method of manually entering digital information (On, Off) into FlexLogic™ equations as
well as protection and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, ground protec-
tion blocking, and setting groups changes.

The user-configurable pushbuttons are shown below. They can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, avail-
able online at www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 6 8 10 12
Figure 5–6: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic™ operands, respectively. FlexLogic™ operands should be used to
program desired pushbutton actions. The operand names are PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF.
A pushbutton may be programmed to latch or self-reset. An indicating LED next to each pushbutton signals the present sta-
tus of the corresponding "On" FlexLogic™ operand. When set to "Latched", the state of each pushbutton is stored in non-
volatile memory which is maintained during any supply power loss.
Pushbuttons states can be logged by the Event Recorder and displayed as target messages. User-defined messages can
also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is ON.
• PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to “Disabled”, the push-
button is deactivated and the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (both “On” and “Off”) are de-asserted. If set to
“Self-reset”, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the “On” corresponding FlexLogic™ operand as long as the
pushbutton is being pressed. As soon as the pushbutton is released, the FlexLogic™ operand is de-asserted. The
“Off” operand is asserted/de-asserted accordingly.
5
If set to “Latched”, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic™ operand between “On” and
“Off” on each push of the button. When operating in “Latched” mode, FlexLogic™ operand states are stored in non-vol-
atile memory. Should power be lost, the correct pushbutton state is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.
• PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on
how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
• PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is in the “on” position. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on
entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
• PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the On to the Off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is
“Latched”. This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Self-reset” as the pushbutton operand
status is implied to be “Off” upon its release. All user text messaging durations for the pushbuttons are configured with
the PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES ! FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
• PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting specifies a drop-out time delay for a pushbutton in the self-reset mode. A
typical applications for this setting is providing a select-before-operate functionality. The selecting pushbutton should
have the drop-out time set to a desired value. The operating pushbutton should be logically ANDed with the selecting
pushbutton in FlexLogic™. The selecting pushbutton LED remains on for the duration of the drop-out time, signaling
the time window for the intended operation.
For example, consider a relay with the following settings: PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: “AUTORECLOSER”, PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
“DISABLED - CALL 2199", and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: “ENABLED”. When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the “On” posi-
tion, the following AUTOCLOSER DISABLED – Call 2199 message is displayed: When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the
“Off” position, the message will change to AUTORECLOSER ENABLED.
User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP relay faceplate. If an HP-type faceplate was ordered sepa-
rately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the HP faceplate option. This can be done via URPC with
NOTE
the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command.

5.2.15 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
# FLEX STATE PARAMETER 1: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand

# PARAMETERS Off
PARAMETER 2: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
PARAMETER 256: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand

MESSAGE
Off
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic™ operand states can be used for efficient moni-
toring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic™ operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed
so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states
which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
The state bits may be read out in the "Flex States" register array beginning at Modbus address 900 hex. 16 states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are 16 registers in total to accom-
modate the 256 state bits.
5.2.16 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
a) MAIN MENU
5 PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
# USER-DEFINABLE INVOKE AND SCROLL: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# DISPLAYS Off
# USER DISPLAY 1 Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
#
↓
# USER DISPLAY 16 Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
#
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing
sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facili-
tate text entry and Modbus Register data pointer options for defining the User Display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
• KEYPAD: Use the Menu key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note
that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the Up and Down keys. The dis-
play disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES
!" DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
• USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL
setting. Any FlexLogic™ operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navi-
gate the programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the Down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first
one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the Down keypad key operate concurrently.
The INVOKE AND SCROLL input is active since the last activity for the time specified by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT
setting. When this time expires, the feature resets and the next activity of the input invokes the first display. The INVOKE
AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.

b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ! USER DISPLAY 1(16)
# USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

#
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
DISP 1 ITEM 5: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available User Display by selecting the existing display and
pressing the key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting “Yes”, a message indi-
cates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are
automatically configured with the proper content – this content may subsequently be edited.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and/or user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular User 5
Display. Each User Display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The Tilde (~) character is used to mark the
start of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to 5 separate data fields (ITEM 1(5)) can be
entered in a User Display - the nth Tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the URPC interface (preferred for convenience). The following
procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:
1. Select the line to be edited.
2. Press the key to enter text edit mode.
3. Use either Value key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4. Press the key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6. The key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
7. Press the key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the 5 items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate key-
pad, use the number keypad. Use the value of ‘0’ for any items not being used. Use the key at any selected system
display (Setting, Actual Value, or Command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus
address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (URPC usage conveniently facilitates this conversion).
Use the key to go to the User Displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show
in sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a User Display, press the key and then select the ‘Yes”
option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the key again to exit the User Displays menu.

An example User Display setup and result is shown below:
# USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
# Current X ~ A
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
Current Y ~ A
DISP 1 ITEM 1: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register
MESSAGE Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker.
6016
DISP 1 ITEM 2: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus
MESSAGE Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker.
6357
DISP 1 ITEM 3: This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
MESSAGE Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
0
MESSAGE Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
0
MESSAGE
0 Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
USER DISPLAYS Current X 0.850 A Shows the resultant display content.

→
Current Y 0.327 A
5.2.17 DIRECT I/O

5
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O
# DIRECT I/O DIRECT OUTPPUT Range: 1 to 8

# DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O DATA Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps
MESSAGE
RATE: 64 kbps
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CROSSOVER: Disabled
# CRC ALARM CH1
#
# CRC ALARM CH2
#
# UNRETURNED
# MESSAGES ALARM CH1
# UNRETURNED
# MESSAGES ALARM CH2
Direct I/Os are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR relays connected directly via
Type-7 UR digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to UCA GOOSE, except that communications
takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On Type 7 cards that support two channels,

Direct Output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends Direct Output messages both
ways around a ring configuration. On Type 7 cards that support one channel, Direct Output messages are sent only in one
direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at the receiver.
Direct Output message timing is similar to GOOSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at
least every 500 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the out-
puts unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two Self-Tests are performed and signaled by the
following FlexLogic™ operands:
1. DIRECT RING BREAK (Direct I/O Ring Break). This FlexLogic™ operand indicates that Direct Output messages sent
from a UR are not being received back by the UR.
2. DIRECT DEVICE X OFF (Direct Device Offline). This FlexLogic™ operand indicates that Direct Output messages from
at least one Direct Device are not being received.
Direct I/O settings are similar to Remote I/O settings. The equivalent of the Remote Device name strings for Direct I/O, is
the Direct Output Device ID.
The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID identifies this UR in all Direct Output messages. All UR IEDs in a ring should have unique
numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of the Direct I/O message.
If the Direct I/O scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes"), all Direct Output mes-
sages should be received back. If not, the Direct I/O Ring Break Self Test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the
DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic™ operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the capabilities of the communications channel. Back-to-back connections of the
local relays may be set to 128 kbps. All IEDs communicating over Direct I/Os must be set to the same data rate. UR IEDs
equipped with dual-channel communications cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for Direct I/O
messages is approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each
“bridge”.
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to C60s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing
5
over messages from Channel 1 to Channel 2. This places all UR IEDs into one Direct I/O network regardless of the physical
media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for Direct I/O configuration. Please refer to the Inputs/Out-
puts section later in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic™ operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.
Example 1: Extending the I/O Capabilities of a UR relay
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of program-
mable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR IED, such as
the C30, to satisfy the additional I/Os and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-chan-
nel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
Figure 5–7: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS

In the above application, the following settings should be applied:
UR IED 1: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1"
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes"
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"

DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"

The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); i.e., from Device 1 to Device 2, and from
Device 2 to Device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (fiber,
G.703, or RS422).
Example 2: Interlocking Busbar Protection
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.
UR IED 1 BLOCK
UR IED 2 UR IED 3 UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5–8: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.
TX1 RX1
UR IED 1
RX2 TX2
5 RX1
UR IED 2
TX2 RX2
UR IED 4
TX1
TX1 RX2 TX2 RX1
TX2 RX2
UR IED 3
RX1 TX1
842716A1.CDR
Figure 5–9: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT I/OS

UR IED 1: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1” UR IED 2: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes” DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of "bridges" between the ori-
gin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum "communications distance" by a factor of two.
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle;
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
If one ring is broken (say TX2/RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of power sys-
tem cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of power system
cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings,
failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the Direct I/O feature would be primarily
used to address these concerns.

Example 3: Pilot-Aided Schemes

Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5–10: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION

A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute
a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):
TX1 RX1 RX2

UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 TX1 TX2
5
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5–11: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as
explained in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and,
ideally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below.
TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2

UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1
TX1 RX1
UR IED 3
RX2 TX2
842715A1.CDR
Figure 5–12: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION


In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and
cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture.
b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !" CRC ALARM CH1(2)
# CRC ALARM CH1 CRC ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

CRC ALARM CH1 Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 10
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
5
The C60 checks integrity of the incoming Direct I/O messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC Alarm function is available for
monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The monitoring func-
tion counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds up messages
that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC ALARM CH1
THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM Flex-
Logic™ operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT set-
ting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly.
The CRC Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of Direct I/O messages that failed the CRC
check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT INPUTS !" CRC FAIL COUNT CH1(2) actual value.
Message Count and Length of the Monitoring Window:

To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 2 messages per second (at 64 kbps) or 4 messages per second (128
kbps) even if there is no change in the Direct Outputs. For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to
“10000”, corresponds a time window of about 80 minutes at 64 kbps and 40 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent
faster as a result of Direct Outputs activity, the monitoring time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when
determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time
interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 × 60 × 2 = 1200.
Correlation of Failed CRC and Bit Error Rate (BER):

The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail
rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A Direct I/O packet
containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000
bits. A BER of 10–4 implies 1 bit error for every 10,000 bits sent/received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a
failed packet, having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10–4.

c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !" UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
# UNRETURNED UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

# MESSAGES ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 10
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The C60 checks integrity of the Direct I/O communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring configuration,
all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The Unreturned Messages
Alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unreturned mes-
sages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed to return.
When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESH-
OLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM Flex-
Logic™ operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE
COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly.
The Unreturned Messages Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration. 5
The total number of unreturned Direct I/O messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT INPUTS !"
UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1(2) actual value.
5.2.18 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" INSTALLATION
# INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS: Range: Not Programmed, Programmed

# Not Programmed
RELAY NAME: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Relay-1
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output
relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name
is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet com-
munications channel using the UCA2/MMS protocol.

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5.3SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 AC INPUTS
a) CURRENT BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS ! CURRENT BANK F1(M5)
# CURRENT BANK F1 PHASE CT F1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

# PRIMARY: 1 A
PHASE CT F1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PRIMARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 1 A
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing CT characteristics.
NOTE
Four banks of phase/ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {1, 5}.
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
5 ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
in Wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = Neutral Current = 3Io) is used as the
input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground
CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to Chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct opera-
tion, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the
following current banks:
F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio; F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio; M1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio
The following rule applies:
SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + M1 (EQ 5.1)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be
adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then
a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).

5 SETTINGS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
b) VOLTAGE BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE BANK F5(M5)
# VOLTAGE BANK F5 PHASE VT F5 Range: Wye, Delta

# CONNECTION: Wye
PHASE VT F5 Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
PHASE VT F5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RATIO: 1.00 :1
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
CONNECTION: Vag
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 1.00
MESSAGE
RATIO: 1.00 :1
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing VT characteristics.
CAUTION
Two banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {5}.
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
5
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CON-
NECTION made to the system as “Wye” or “Delta”. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as “Delta”. See
the Typical Wiring Diagram in Chapter 3 for details.
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal
voltage is applied to the VT primary.
NOTE
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a Delta connec-
tion, the secondary voltage would be 115, i.e. (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a Wye connection, the voltage value
entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a Delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage
value entered would be 120, i.e. 14400 / 120.
5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM
# POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY: Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1

# 60 Hz
PHASE ROTATION: Range: ABC, ACB
MESSAGE
ABC
FREQUENCY AND PHASE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
REFERENCE: SRC 1
FREQUENCY TRACKING: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Enabled
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency
cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before
reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe
period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.

The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be con-
nected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for
phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source:
phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the
phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2V A – V B – V C ) ⁄ 3 ) for better performance dur-
ing fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of
whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this sig-
nal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR relays if they have
the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between differ-
ent UR relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
FREQUENCY TRACKING should only be set to "Disabled" in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for spe-
cial variable-frequency applications.
NOTE
5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES
5 PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" SIGNAL SOURCES ! SOURCE 1(4)
# SOURCE 1 SOURCE 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters

# SRC 1
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of
MESSAGE any 5 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of
MESSAGE any 5 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5
MESSAGE Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 AUX VT: Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5
MESSAGE Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.
None
Four identical Source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate for
the associated source.
“F” and “M” represent the module slot position. The number directly following these letters represents either the first bank of
four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called “1” or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called “5” in a particular CT/VT module.
Refer to the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details on this concept.
It is possible to select the sum of up to five (5) CTs. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be referred.
For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from channels “F1” and “F5”, scaled to whichever CT
has the higher ratio. Selecting “None” hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC Sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type,
ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each Source is entered,
including specifying which CTs will be summed together.

User Selection of AC Parameters for Comparator Elements:

CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the
specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the ele-
ment specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for Source selection. In elements where the parame-
ter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting
specifies the Source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
AC Input Actual Values:
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and volt-
age sections of Actual Values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be dis-
played here. All parameters contained within a configured Source are displayed in the Sources section of Actual Values.
Disturbance Detectors (Internal):
The 50DD element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on the protected system. 50DD
is intended for use in conjunction with measuring elements, blocking of current based elements (to prevent maloperation as
a result of the wrong settings), and starting oscillography data capture. A disturbance detector is provided for each Source.
The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector scheme
logic is as follows:
SETTING
ACTUAL
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
SOURCE 1 PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CURRENT PHASOR CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1 I_1 - I_1’ >2*CUT-OFF FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
I_2 I_2 - I_2’ >2*CUT-OFF OR SRC 1 50DD OP
I_0 I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
Where I’ is 2 cycles old
ACTUAL
SETTING
5
I_0 I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
Where I’ is 2 cycles old
SETTING
ACTUAL
I_0 I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
Where I’ is 2 cycles old 827092A3.CDR
Figure 5–13: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC DIAGRAM

The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold
is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting (PROD-
UCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES !" CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector
accordingly.
Example Use of Sources:
An example of the use of Sources, with a relay with two CT/VT modules, is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have
the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
CTs VTs not applicable
This configuration could be used on a two winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half sys-
tem. The following figure shows the arrangement of Sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and
the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.

F1 DSP Bank
F5
Source 1 Source 2
Amps Amps
Source 3
51BF-1 51BF-2
U1 Volts Amps
A W Var 87T
A W Var 51P
Volts Amps
M1
M1 Source 4
UR Relay
M5
Figure 5–14: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES
5.3.4 LINE
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" LINE
# LINE Range: 0.01 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01

5 #
POS SEQ IMPEDANCE
MAGNITUDE: 3.00 Ω
POS SEQ IMPEDANCE Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ANGLE: 75°
ZERO SEQ IMPEDANCE Range: 0.01 to 650.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MAGNITUDE: 9.00 Ω
ZERO SEQ IMPEDANCE Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ANGLE: 75°
LINE LENGTH UNITS: Range: km, miles
MESSAGE
km
LINE LENGTH (km ): Range: 0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
100.0
These settings specify the characteristics of the line. The line impedance value should be entered as secondary ohms.
This data is used for fault location calculations. See the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" FAULT REPORT menu for assigning
the Source and Trigger for fault calculations.

5.3.5 BREAKERS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" BREAKERS ! BREAKER 1(2)
# BREAKER 1 BREAKER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CONTROL: Disabled
BREAKER 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Bkr 1
BREAKER 1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
3-Pole
BREAKER 1 OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 φA/3-POLE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 φB: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 φC: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off 5
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ALARM Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
TIME: 0.000 s
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
UCA XCBR1 PwrSupSt0: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
UCA XCBR1 PresSt: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
UCA XCBR1 TrpCoil: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
# BREAKER 2
As for Breaker 1 above
#
# UCA XCBR SBO TIMER BKR XCBR SBO TIMEOUT: Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
# 30 s
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in Chapter 4. Only informa-
tion concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two breakers; a
user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be Breaker No. 1.
• BREAKER 1(2) FUNCTION: Set to "Enable" to allow the operation of any breaker control feature.

• BREAKER1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to "Enable" to allow faceplate push button operations.
• BREAKER 1(2) NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to 6 characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in
flash messages related to Breaker No. 1.
• BREAKER 1(2) MODE: Selects "3-pole" mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or "1-pole" mode
where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
• BREAKER 1(2) OPEN: Selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open
Breaker No. 1.
• BREAKER 1(2) CLOSE: Selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close
Breaker No. 1.
• BREAKER 1(2) ΦA/3-POLE: Selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position
tracking mechanism. This input can be either a 52/a or 52/b contact, or a combination the 52/a and 52/b contacts, that
must be programmed to create a logic 0 when the breaker is open. If BREAKER 1 MODE is selected as "3-Pole", this set-
ting selects a single input as the operand used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as
"1-Pole", the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and settings BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC select
operands to track phases B and C, respectively.
• BREAKER 1(2) ΦB: If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as 1-pole,
this input is used to track phase B as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1(2) ΦC: If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as 1-pole,
this input is used to track phase C as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1(2) EXT ALARM: Selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker alarm
reporting contact.
• BREAKER 1(2) ALARM DELAY: Sets the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three pole
5 position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement, to allow for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.
• MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: Sets the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after an operator has
initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.
• BREAKER 1(2) OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that Breaker No. 1 is out-of-service.
• UCA XCBR1(2) PwrSupSt0: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) PwrSupSt bit 0
data item.
• UCA XCBR1(2) PresSt: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) PresSt data item.
• UCA XCBR1(2) TrpCoil: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) TrpCoil data item.
• BKR XCBR SBO TIMEOUT: The Select-Before-Operate timer specifies an interval from the receipt of the UCA
Breaker Control Select signal until the automatic de-selection of the breaker, so that the breaker does not remain
selected indefinitely. This setting applies only to UCA SBO operation.

Figure 5–15: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC

5.3.6 FLEXCURVES™
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" FLEXCURVES ! FLEXCURVE A(D)
# FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

# 0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
FlexCurves™ A through D have settings for entering times to Reset/Operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98 /
1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into 2 continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a cus-
tom FlexCurve™, enter the Reset/Operate time (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
Table 5–3: FLEXCURVE™ TABLE

RESET TIME RESET TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME
MS MS MS MS MS MS
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
5 0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0
The relay using a given FlexCurve™ applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered
points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of
NOTE
1, i.e. 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear
approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.

b) FLEXCURVE™ CONFIGURATION WITH URPC

URPC allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves™ and their associated data points. Prospective Flex-
Curves™ can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data
points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file (.csv format) by selecting the
Import Data From URPC setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves™ are customized
by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at
zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING

Recloser Curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response
time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite oper-
ating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro-
tective devices have different operating characteristics. The Recloser Curve configuration window shown below appears
when the Initialize From URPC setting is set to “Recloser Curve” and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each
curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting

defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests
a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating
characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower
than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time;
5
otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears
when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum
curve time.
High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple

from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is
normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio
defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the
operating time.
842721A1.CDR
Figure 5–16: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION

Multiplier and Adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings.
The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT Ratio.
NOTE

d) EXAMPLE
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then
enabled at 8 times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately 4 times pickup, the curve operating time is
equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
842719A1.CDR
Figure 5–17: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED

With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
842720A1.CDR
Figure 5–18: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED

Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this
is attempted, the URPC software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES

The standard Recloser curves available for the C60 are displayed in the following graphs.

1 GE106
0.5
0.2
TIME (sec)
GE103
GE104 GE105
0.1
0.05
GE101 GE102
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 842723A1.CDR
5
Figure 5–19: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106
50
20 GE142
10
5
GE138
TIME (sec)
1 GE120
GE113
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–20: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142

50
20
10
GE201
TIME (sec)
GE151
2
GE134 GE140
1
GE137
0.5
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20

CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
5 Figure 5–21: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
842730A1.CDR
50
GE152
20
TIME (sec)
GE141
10
GE131
5
GE200
2
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–22: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200

50
20
GE164
10
2
TIME (sec)
GE162
1
0.5
GE133
0.2
GE165
0.1
0.05
GE161
0.02 GE163
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–23: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165 5
20
GE132
10
1
TIME (sec)
0.5 GE139
0.2
GE136
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE118 GE117
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–24: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139

20
10
5
GE122
2
1
TIME (sec)
0.5
GE114
0.2
GE111
GE121
0.1
0.05 GE115 GE112

GE107
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
5 Figure 5–25: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
GE202
10
TIME (sec)
GE135
2 GE119
0.5
0.2
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–26: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202

5 SETTINGS 5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5.4FLEXLOGIC™ 5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through
elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic
through FlexLogic™. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital
outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 5–27: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW

The states of all digital signals used in the UR are represented by flags (or FlexLogic™ operands, which are described later
in this section). A digital "1" is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an ele-
ment from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic™ equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of
the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme
where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This
capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human
operators.
If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic™. For example, if it is desired to
have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of
the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic™ equation. This equation
ANDs the two control inputs to produce a ‘virtual output’ which is then selected when programming the phase time overcur-
rent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic™ equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic™ minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.

5.4 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available
internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic™).
FlexLogic™ allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as
inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual out-
put. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic™ equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parame-
ters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e.
flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of oper-
ands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different
types of operands are listed in the table below.
Table 5–4: UR FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES

OPERAND TYPE STATE EXAMPLE FORMAT CHARACTERISTICS
[INPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...]
Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact
closed).
Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external
contact open).
5 Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact.
only) Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exists across the contact.
Current On Cont Op 1 IOn Current is flowing through the contact.
Current Off Cont Op 1 IOff Current is not flowing through the contact.
Direct Input On DIRECT INPUT 1 On The direct input is presently in the ON state.
Element Pickup PHASE TOC1 PKP The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting
(Analog) of an element which responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element which responds to falling
values.
Dropout PHASE TOC1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate PHASE TOC1 OP The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup
setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing.
Block PH DIR1 BLK The output of the comparator is set to the block function.
Element Pickup Dig Element 1 PKP The input operand is at logic 1.
(Digital)
Dropout Dig Element 1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate Dig Element 1 OP The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed
pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.
Element Higher than Counter 1 HI The number of pulses counted is above the set number.
(Digital Counter)
Equal to Counter 1 EQL The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number.
Lower than Counter 1 LO The number of pulses counted is below the set number.
Fixed On On Logic 1
Off Off Logic 0
Remote Input On REMOTE INPUT 1 On The remote input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Input On Virt Ip 1 On The virtual input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Output On Virt Op 1 On The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e.
evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual
output results in a "1").

The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.
Table 5–5: C60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 4)
OPERAND TYPE OPERAND SYNTAX OPERAND DESCRIPTION
CONTROL CONTROL PUSHBTN n ON Control Pushbutton n (n = 1 to 3) is being pressed.
PUSHBUTTONS
DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
DIRECT DEVICE 8 On Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT DEVICE 1 Off Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
DIRECT DEVICE 8 Off Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT I/O DIR IO CH1(2) CRC ALARM The rate of Direct Input messages received on Channel 1(2) and failing the
CHANNEL CRC exceeded the user-specified level.
MONITORING DIR IO CRC ALARM The rate of Direct Input messages failing the CRC exceeded the user-
specified level on Channel 1 or 2.
DIR IO CH1(2) UNRET ALM The rate of returned Direct I/O messages on Channel 1(2) exceeded the
user-specified level (ring configurations only).
DIR IO UNRET ALM The rate of returned Direct I/O messages exceeded the user-specified level
on Channel 1 or 2 (ring configurations only).
ELEMENT: AR ENABLED Autoreclosure is enabled and ready to perform
Autoreclose AR DISABLED Autoreclosure is disabled
(1P/3P) AR RIP Autoreclosure is in "Reclose in Progress" state
AR 1-P RIP A single-pole reclosure is in progress
AR 3-P/1 RIP A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via DEAD TIME 1
AR 3-P/2 RIP A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via DEAD TIME 2
AR LO Autoreclosure is in lockout state
AR BKR1 BLK Reclosure of Breaker 1 is blocked
AR BKR2 BLK Reclosure of Breaker 2 is blocked
AR CLOSE BKR1 Reclose Breaker 1 signal
AR CLOSE BKR2 Reclose Breaker 2 signal
AR FORCE 3-P TRIP Force any trip to a three-phase trip
AR SHOT CNT > 0
AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
The first "CLOSE BKR X" signal has been issued
The Zone 1 Distance function must be set to the extended overreach value
5
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ The incomplete sequence timer timed out
AR RESET AR has been reset either manually or by the reset timer
ELEMENT: AUX OV1 PKP Auxiliary Overvoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary OV AUX OV1 DPO Auxiliary Overvoltage element has dropped out
AUX OV1 OP Auxiliary Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: AUX UV1 PKP Auxiliary Undervoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary UV AUX UV1 DPO Auxiliary Undervoltage element has dropped out
AUX UV1 OP Auxiliary Undervoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: BKR ARC 1 OP Breaker Arcing 1 is operated
Breaker Arcing BKR ARC 2 OP Breaker Arcing 2 is operated
ELEMENT BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker Failure BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes)
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes)
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP Breaker Failure 1 re-trip 3-phase
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 is operated
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP Breaker Failure 1 trip is operated
BKR FAIL 2 Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1
ELEMENT: BREAKER 1 OFF CMD Breaker 1 OFF command
Breaker Control BREAKER 1 ON CMD Breaker 1 ON command
BREAKER 1 φA CLSD Breaker 1 phase A is closed
BREAKER 1 φB CLSD Breaker 1 phase B is closed
BREAKER 1 φC CLSD Breaker 1 phase C is closed
BREAKER 1 CLOSED Breaker 1 is closed
BREAKER 1 OPEN Breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 DISCREP Breaker 1 has discrepancy
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE Breaker 1 trouble alarm
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS Breaker 1 manual close
BREAKER 1 TRIP A Breaker 1 trip phase A command
BREAKER 1 TRIP B Breaker 1 trip phase B command
BREAKER 1 TRIP C Breaker 1 trip phase C command
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN At least one pole of Breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN Only one pole of Breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 OOS Breaker 1 is out of service
BREAKER 2 Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1


ELEMENT: Counter 1 HI Digital Counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Digital Counter Counter 1 EQL Digital Counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Counter 1 LO Digital Counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
↓ ↓
Counter 8 HI Digital Counter 8 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Counter 8 EQL Digital Counter 8 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Counter 8 LO Digital Counter 8 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
ELEMENT: Dig Element 1 PKP Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital Element Dig Element 1 OP Digital Element 1 is operated
Dig Element 1 DPO Digital Element 1 is dropped out
↓ ↓
Dig Element 16 PKP Digital Element 16 is picked up
Dig Element 16 OP Digital Element 16 is operated
Dig Element 16 DPO Digital Element 16 is dropped out
ELEMENT: SRCx 50DD OP Source x Disturbance Detector is operated
Disturbance
Detector
ELEMENT: FxE 1 PKP FlexElement™ 1 has picked up
FlexElements™ FxE 1 OP FlexElement™ 1 has operated
FxE 1 DPO FlexElement™ 1 has dropped out
↓ ↓
FxE 8 PKP FlexElement™ 8 has picked up
FxE 8 OP FlexElement™ 8 has operated
FxE 8 DPO FlexElement™ 8 has dropped out
ELEMENT LATCH 1 ON Non-Volatile Latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-Volatile LATCH 1 OFF Non-Voltage Latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
Latches ↓ ↓
LATCH 16 ON Non-Volatile Latch 16 is ON (Logic = 1)
LATCH 16 OFF Non-Voltage Latch 16 is OFF (Logic = 0)
5 ELEMENT:
Neutral OV
NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
Neutral Overvoltage element has picked up
Neutral Overvoltage element has dropped out
NEUTRAL OV1 OP Neutral Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: PHASE IOC1 PKP At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
Phase IOC PHASE IOC1 OP At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 DPO At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 PKP A Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP B Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP C Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 OP A Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 OP B Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 OP C Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 DPO A Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO B Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO C Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1
ELEMENT: PHASE TOC1 PKP At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
Phase TOC PHASE TOC1 OP At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 DPO At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 PKP A Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 PKP B Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 PKP C Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 OP A Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 OP B Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 OP C Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 DPO A Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 DPO B Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 DPO C Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1


ELEMENT: PHASE UV1 PKP At least one phase of UV1 has picked up
Phase UV PHASE UV1 OP At least one phase of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 DPO At least one phase of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 PKP A Phase A of UV1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 PKP B Phase B of UV1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 PKP C Phase C of UV1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 OP A Phase A of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 OP B Phase B of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 OP C Phase C of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 DPO A Phase A of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 DPO B Phase B of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 DPO C Phase C of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
ELEMENT: SELECTOR 1 POS Y Selector Switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands).
Selector Switch SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2 Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged.
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged.
SELECTOR 1 ALARM Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged.
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM Position of Selector Switch 1 is undetermined when the relay powers up and
synchronizes to the 3-bit input.
SELECTOR 2 Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1
ELEMENT: SETTING GROUP ACT 1 Setting Group 1 is active
Setting Group ↓ ↓
SETTING GROUP ACT 6 Setting Group 6 is active
ELEMENT: SYNC 1 DEAD S OP Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated
Synchrocheck SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO
SYNC 1 SYNC OP
Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated
5
SYNC 1 SYNC DPO Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out
SYNC 1 CLS OP Synchrocheck 1 close has operated
SYNC 1 CLS DPO Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out
SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage
SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage
SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage
SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage
SYNC 2 Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1
ELEMENT: SRCx VT FF OP Source x VT Fuse Failure detector has operated
VTFF SRCx VT FF DPO Source x VT Fuse Failure detector has dropped out
SRCx VT FF VOL LOSS Source x has lost voltage signals (V2 above 25% or V1 below 70%
of nominal)
FIXED OPERANDS Off Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list;
used as ‘Disable’ by other features.
On Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Ip 1 On (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact Inputs Cont Ip 2 On (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
Cont Ip 1 Off (will not appear unless ordered)
Cont Ip 2 Off (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 IOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact Outputs, Cont Op 2 IOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Current ↓ ↓
(from detector on
Form-A output only) Cont Op 1 IOff (will not appear unless ordered)
Cont Op 2 IOff (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 VOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact Outputs, Cont Op 2 VOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Voltage ↓ ↓
(from detector on
Form-A output only) Cont Op 1 VOff (will not appear unless ordered)
Cont Op 2 VOff (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT INPUT 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Direct Inputs ↓ ↓
DIRECT INPUT 32 On Flag is set, logic=1


INPUTS/OUTPUTS: REMOTE INPUT 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Remote Inputs ↓ ↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Ip 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual Inputs ↓ ↓
Virt Ip 32 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Op 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual Outputs ↓ ↓
Virt Op 64 On Flag is set, logic=1
LED TEST LED TEST IN PROGRESS An LED test has been initiated and has not finished.
REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 On Flag is set, logic=1
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off Flag is set, logic=1
RESETTING RESET OP Reset command is operated (set by all 3 operands below)
RESET OP (COMMS) Communications source of the reset command
RESET OP (OPERAND) Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING menu) source
of the reset command
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command
SELF- ANY MAJOR ERROR Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
DIAGNOSTICS ANY MINOR ERROR Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
ANY SELF-TEST Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
BATTERY FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
DIRECT RING BREAK See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
5 DSP ERROR
EEPROM DATA ERROR
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
IRIG-B FAILURE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
LATCHING OUT ERROR See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
LOW ON MEMORY See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
NO DSP INTERRUPTS See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
PRI ETHERNET FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
PROGRAM MEMORY See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
REMOTE DEVICE OFF See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
SEC ETHERNET FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
SNTP FAILURE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
SYSTEM EXCEPTION See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
WATCHDOG ERROR See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
UNAUTHORIZED UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password-protected
ACCESS ALARM level of the relay.
USER- PUSHBUTTON x ON Pushbutton Number x is in the ’On’ position
PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON x OFF Pushbutton Number x is in the ’Off’ position
PUSHBUTTONS
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name/
ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in
the FlexLogic™ Operands table above.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic™ are listed in the Flex-
Logic™ Operators table.

Table 5–6: FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS

GATES NUMBER OF INPUTS OUTPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...
NOT 1 input is ‘0’
OR 2 to 16 any input is ‘1’
AND 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘1’
NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘0’
NAND 2 to 16 any input is ‘0’
XOR 2 only one input is ‘1’
Table 5–7: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS

TYPE SYNTAX DESCRIPTION NOTES
Editor INSERT Insert a parameter in an equation list.
DELETE Delete a parameter from an equation list.
End END The first END encountered signifies the last entry in
the list of processed FlexLogic™ parameters.
One Shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge. A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate
that generates a pulse in response to an
NEGATIVE ONE One shot that responds to a negative going edge. edge on the input. The output from a ‘one
SHOT shot’ is True (positive) for only one pass
DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both the positive and through the FlexLogic™ equation. There is
negative going edges. a maximum of 32 ‘one shots’.
Logic NOT Logical Not Operates on the previous parameter.
Gate
OR(2) 2 input OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
OR(16)
↓
16 input OR gate
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
5
AND(2) 2 input AND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
AND(16) 16 input AND gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NOR(2) 2 input NOR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
NOR(16) 16 input NOR gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NAND(2) 2 input NAND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
NAND(16) 16 input NAND gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
LATCH (S,R) Latch (Set, Reset) - reset-dominant The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is
the Reset input. The parameter preceding
the Reset input is the Set input.
Timer TIMER 1 Timer set with FlexLogic™ Timer 1 settings. The timer is started by the preceding
↓ ↓ parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER 32 Timer set with FlexLogic™ Timer 32 settings. TIMER #.
Assign = Virt Op 1 Assigns previous FlexLogic™ parameter to Virtual The virtual output is set by the preceding
Virtual ↓ Output 1. parameter
Output = Virt Op 64 ↓
Assigns previous FlexLogic™ parameter to Virtual
Output 64.
5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES
When forming a FlexLogic™ equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
2. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3. Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation.
4. A timer operator (e.g. "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (e.g. " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is
broken, a syntax error will be declared.

5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION
Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
FlexLogic™ provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the
set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; i.e. they reset on the re-application of control
CAUTION
power.
When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic™ equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting
value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic™ during
testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.
5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite impor-
tant as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure
below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.
In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce Virtual Outputs 1 and 2, and is
only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic™, it is important to make a note of each Virtual Output
used – a Virtual Output designation (1 to 64) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
OR #1 Reset
5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
XOR
Timer 2
Time Delay Operate Output
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2
on Dropout Relay H1
State=Pickup
(200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 Timer 1

State=Operated Time Delay
AND
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c 827025A2.vsd
State=Closed
Figure 5–28: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME

1. Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic™ opera-
tors. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs
to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic™ limits, which is unlikely but possible. If
the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs
from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator
is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a Virtual Output.
For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must
therefore be made a Virtual Output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output
must also be assigned to a Virtual Output as Virtual Output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section
to operate relay H1 (i.e. Output Contact H1).

Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic™ equations with outputs of Virtual Output 3 and
Virtual Output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
on Dropout
State=Pickup (200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 Timer 1

State=Operated Time Delay
AND
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD
Figure 5–29: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

2. Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce Virtual Output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the
Virtual Output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these
operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific Virtual Output). The logic for
Virtual Output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
AND(2) VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 5

CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
Figure 5–30: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

3. Prepare a logic diagram for Virtual Output 4, replacing the logic ahead of Virtual Output 3 with a symbol identified as
Virtual Output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay VIRTUAL
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2
on Dropout OUTPUT 4
State=Pickup
(200 ms)
Timer 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 Time Delay
State=ON on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed 827028A2.VSD
Figure 5–31: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

4. Program the FlexLogic™ equation for Virtual Output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic™ parameters.
The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the
output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to
list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99,
and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic™, it is suggested that
a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.

01
02
03
04
05
.....
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 5–32: FLEXLOGIC™ WORKSHEET

5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
99: The final output of the equation is Virtual Output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter
is therefore "= Virt Op 3."
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2-
input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic™ rules require that the number of inputs to most
types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the
two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is
5 “NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next.
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be
set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact.
The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2.
This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3:
[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] NOT
[98] AND(2)
[99] = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 3 dia-
gram as a check.
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
95 DIG ELEM 2 OP VIRTUAL
AND
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OUTPUT 3
96 Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
97 NOT
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
98 AND (2)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
99 =Virt Op 3
827030A2.VSD
Figure 5–33: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

6. Repeating the process described for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, select the FlexLogic™ parameters for Virtual Output 4.
99: The final output of the equation is VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
98: The operator preceding the output is Timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the
timer are established in the timer programming section.

97: The operator preceding Timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
94: The input to Timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which
is parameter “OR(4)”.
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".
The equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 is:
[85] Virt Op 4 On
[86] Virt Op 1 On
[87] Virt Op 2 On
[88] Virt Ip 1 On
[89]
[90]
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
5
[91] Virt Op 3 On
[92] OR(4)
[93] LATCH (S,R)
[94] Virt Op 3 On
[95] TIMER 1
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] OR(3)
[98] TIMER 2
[99] = Virt Op 4
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 4 dia-
gram as a check.

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
85 Virt Op 4 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
86 Virt Op 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
87 Virt Op 2 On
Set
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
88 Virt Ip 1 On
LATCH
XOR OR Reset
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
89 DIG ELEM 1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
90 XOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
91 Virt Op 3 On VIRTUAL
OR T2 OUTPUT 4
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
92 OR (4)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
93 LATCH (S,R)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
94 Virt Op 3 On T1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
95 TIMER 1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
96 Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
97 OR (3)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
98 TIMER 2
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
99 =Virt Op 4 827031A2.VSD
5 Figure 5–34: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

7. Now write the complete FlexLogic™ expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the
equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases
where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause
problems as all logic is calculated at least 4 times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by
sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic™ before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, Virtual Output 3 is used as an input to both Latch 1 and Timer 1 as arranged in the order
shown below:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In the expression above, the Virtual Output 4 input to the 4-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a
form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.

8. The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past.
Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic™ equations. The equations
will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC ! FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
# FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1: Range: FlexLogic™ parameters

# EQUATION EDITOR END
↓
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512: Range: FlexLogic™ parameters

MESSAGE
END
There are 512 FlexLogic™ entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default ‘END’ entry settings. If a "Disabled" Ele-
ment is selected as a FlexLogic™ entry, the associated state flag will never be set to ‘1’. The ‘+/–‘ key may be used when
editing FlexLogic™ equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC !" FLEXLOGIC TIMERS ! FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
# FLEXLOGIC Range: millisecond, second, minute

# TIMER 1
TIMER 1
TYPE: millisecond
5
TIMER 1 PICKUP Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
TIMER 1 DROPOUT Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
There are 32 identical FlexLogic™ timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic™ equations.
• TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.
• TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".
• TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".

5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: SETTING !" FLEXLOGIC !" FLEXELEMENTS ! FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
# FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
FxE1
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT Range: Signed, Absolute
MESSAGE
MODE: Signed
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP Range: Level, Delta
MESSAGE
MODE: Level
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Over, Under
MESSAGE
DIRECTION: Over
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
5 MESSAGE
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes
MESSAGE
UNIT: milliseconds
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
20
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BLOCK: Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
A FlexElement™ is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a
net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as
per user's choice.

SETTING
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE:
Enabled = 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE:
Disabled = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION:
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
AND HYSTERESIS:
Off = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: SETTINGS
SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: PICKUP DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: FLEXELEMENT 1
RUN RESET DELAY:
Actual Value FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
+ tPKP
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: FxE 1 OP
- tRST
Actual Value FxE 1 DPO
FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
FlexElement 1 OpSig 842004A2.CDR
Figure 5–35: FLEXELEMENT™ SCHEME LOGIC

The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. 5
This FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the
element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not
operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build
the effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to “Signed”. The ele-
ment responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to “Absolute”. Sample applications for the
“Absolute” setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both
directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of
decreases.
The element responds directly to its operating signal – as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN and FLEX-
ELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings – if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Threshold”. The element responds to
the rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Delta”. In this case the FLEXELE-
MENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The
following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYS-
TERESIS settings.

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
PICKUP
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
PICKUP
842705A1.CDR
Figure 5–36: FLEXELEMENT™ DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS

In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra charac-
teristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
5 FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A1.CDR
Figure 5–37: FLEXELEMENT™ INPUT MODE SETTING

The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set
to “Over”, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to “Under”, the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal
and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexEle-
ment™ can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP set-
ting is entered in pu values using the following definitions of the base units:
Table 5–8: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS

BREAKER ARCING AMPS BASE = 2000 kA2 × cycle
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
dcmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
(Positive and Negative Watthours,
Positive and Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SYNCHROCHECK
(Max Delta Volts)
VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and –IN inputs 5
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement™ Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis dia-
gram.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta”. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the
rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta”.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting
specifies the reset delay of the element.

5.4.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC !" NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ! LATCH 1(16)
# LATCH 1 LATCH 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

LATCH 1 TYPE: Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
Reset Dominant
LATCH 1 SET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
LATCH 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
LATCH 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
LATCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as
Autorecloser, until a deliberate HMI action resets the latch. The settings, logic, and element operation are described below:
• LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
• LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operands 'sets' Latch 1.
5 • LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operand 'resets' Latch 1.
LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N

TYPE SET RESET ON OFF SETTING SETTING
Reset ON OFF ON OFF LATCH 1 FUNCTION: LATCH 1 TYPE:

Dominant Disabled = 0
OFF OFF Previous Previous RUN
State State Enabled = 1
SET
ON ON OFF ON
SETTING
OFF ON OFF ON FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
LATCH 1 SET:
Set ON OFF ON OFF LATCH LATCH 1 ON
Dominant Off = 0
ON ON ON OFF
LATCH 1 OFF
OFF OFF Previous Previous SETTING
State State
LATCH 1 RESET:
OFF ON OFF ON Off = 0 RESET
Figure 5–38: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N=1 TO 16) AND LOGIC

5 SETTINGS 5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to Setting Group designations 1 to 6.
The performance of these elements is defined by the active Setting Group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the
user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (e.g. altered power system configuration,
season of the year). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the Control Ele-
ments section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter.
5.5.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6)
# SETTING GROUP 1 # BREAKER FAILURE

See page 5-70.
# #
# PHASE CURRENT
MESSAGE See page 5-79.
#
# VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
#
# SENSITIVE
# DIRECTIONAL POWER
Each of the six Setting Group menus is identical. SETTING GROUP 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active
if no other group is active (see the Control Elements section for additional details).

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5.5.3 BREAKER FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" BREAKER FAILURE ! BREAKER FAILURE 1
# BREAKER FAILURE 1 BF1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

# Disabled
BF1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

MESSAGE
3-Pole
BF1 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE
SRC 1
BF1 USE AMP SUPV: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 USE SEAL-IN: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 PH AMP SUPV Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 N AMP SUPV Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
5 MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 USE TIMER 1: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
Yes
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
Yes
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 PH AMP HISET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 N AMP HISET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 PH AMP LOSET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu

BF1 N AMP LOSET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 LOSET TIME Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 TARGET Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
BF1 EVENTS Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
BF1 PH A INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
Off
BF1 PH B INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 PH C INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 BKR POS1 φB Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 BKR POS1 φC Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 BKR POS2 φB Range: FlexLogic™ operand 5
Off
BF1 BKR POS2 φC Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
There are 2 identical Breaker Failure menus available, numbered 1 and 2.

In general, a breaker failure scheme determines that a breaker signaled to trip has not cleared a fault within a definite time,
so further tripping action must be performed. Tripping from the breaker failure scheme should trip all breakers, both local
and remote, that can supply current to the faulted zone. Usually operation of a breaker failure element will cause clearing of
a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. Because breaker failure can result in tripping a large number of
breakers and this affects system safety and stability, a very high level of security is required.
Two schemes are provided: one for three-pole tripping only (identified by the name "3BF") and one for three pole plus sin-
gle-pole operation (identified by the name "1BF"). The philosophy used in these schemes is identical. The operation of a
breaker failure element includes three stages: initiation, determination of a breaker failure condition, and output.
INITIATION STAGE:
A FlexLogic™ operand representing the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker must be selected to initiate the
scheme. The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before the breaker failure timers have
finished timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset when the fault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete
sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the initiating operand to also initiate a FlexLogic™ timer, set longer
than any breaker failure timer, whose output operand is selected to block the breaker failure scheme.
Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any application to
decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current-supervised initiate results in the breaker failure ele-
ment not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it, which may be the case for trans-
former faults. For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1 PH
AMP SUPV PICKUP or the BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP setting, a current supervised initiate should not be used. This feature
should be utilized for those situations where coordinating margins may be reduced when high speed reclosing is used.
Thus, if this choice is made, fault levels must always be above the supervision pickup levels for dependable operation of
the breaker fail scheme. This can also occur in breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations where the first breaker closes
into a fault; the protection trips and attempts to initiate breaker failure for the second breaker, which is in the process of
closing, but does not yet have current flowing through it.

When the scheme is initiated, it immediately sends a trip signal to the breaker initially signaled to trip (this feature is usually
described as Re-Trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that results from a declaration of a failed breaker.
DETERMINATION OF A BREAKER FAILURE CONDITION:
The schemes determine a breaker failure condition via three ‘paths’. Each of these paths is equipped with a time delay,
after which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delayed
paths are associated with Breaker Failure Timers 1, 2, and 3, which are intended to have delays increasing with increasing
timer numbers. These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow for maximum flexibility.
Timer 1 logic (Early Path) is supervised by a fast-operating breaker auxiliary contact. If the breaker is still closed (as indi-
cated by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. Operation of the
breaker auxiliary switch indicates that the breaker has mechanically operated. The continued presence of current indicates
that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit.
Timer 2 logic (Main Path) is not supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact. If fault current is detected after the delay interval,
an output is issued. This path is intended to detect a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current; the
logic therefore does not use a breaker auxiliary contact.
The Timer 1 and 2 paths provide two levels of current supervision, Hi-set and Lo-set, that allow the supervision level to
change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after
resistor insertion. The Hi-set detector is enabled after timeout of Timer 1 or 2, along with a timer that will enable the Lo-set
detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between Hi-set and Lo-set is the expected breaker opening time. Both
current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small multiples of the pickup value. The overcurrent detectors
are required to operate after the breaker failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting overcurrent detec-
tors.
Timer 3 logic (Slow Path) is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact and a control switch contact used to indicate that the
breaker is in/out of service, disabling this path when the breaker is out of service for maintenance. There is no current level
5 check in this logic as it is intended to detect low magnitude faults and it is therefore the slowest to operate.
OUTPUT:
The outputs from the schemes are:
• FlexLogic™ operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme
• FlexLogic™ operand used to re-trip the protected breaker
• FlexLogic™ operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an
adjustable period.
• Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared
• Illumination of the faceplate Trip LED (and the Phase A, B or C LED, if applicable)
MAIN PATH SEQUENCE:
ACTUAL CURRENT MAGNITUDE

FAILED INTERRUPTION
0
AMP CALCULATED CURRENT MAGNITUDE
CORRECT INTERRUPTION
Rampdown
0
PROTECTION OPERATION BREAKER INTERRUPTING TIME
(ASSUMED 1.5 cycles) (ASSUMED 3 cycles)
MARGIN BACKUP BREAKER OPERATING TIME
(Assumed 2 Cycles) (Assumed 3 Cycles)
BREAKER FAILURE TIMER No. 2 (±1/8 cycle)

INITIATE (1/8 cycle)
BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT DETECTOR PICKUP (1/8 cycle)

BREAKER FAILURE OUTPUT RELAY PICKUP (1/4 cycle)
FAULT cycles
OCCURS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
827083A6.CDR
Figure 5–39: BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE

SETTINGS:
• BF1 MODE: This setting is used to select the breaker failure operating mode: single or three pole.
• BF1 USE AMP SUPV: If set to "Yes", the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above
the supervision pickup level.
• BF1 USE SEAL-IN: If set to "Yes", the element will only be sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the
supervision pickup level.
• BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that will initiate 3-pole tripping of the breaker.
• BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level.
Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as
necessary (lower than breaker resistor current or lower than load current) - Hiset and Loset current supervision will
guarantee correct operation.
• BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal-in supervision level. Gener-
ally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. Neutral current supervision is
used only in the three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for three-pole tripping
schemes.
• BF1 USE TIMER 1: If set to "Yes", the Early Path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status-1 to
open, from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin.
• BF1 USE TIMER 2: If set to "Yes", the Main Path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. This
safety margin was historically intended to allow for measuring and timing errors in the breaker failure scheme equip-
ment. In microprocessor relays this time is not significant. In C60 relays, which use a Fourier transform, the calculated
current magnitude will ramp-down to zero one power frequency cycle after the current is interrupted, and this lag
5
should be included in the overall margin duration, as it occurs after current interruption. The Breaker Failure Main Path
Sequence diagram below shows a margin of two cycles; this interval is considered the minimum appropriate for most
applications.
Note that in bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be
significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
• BF1 USE TIMER 3: If set to "Yes", the Slow Path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 3 is set to the same interval as Timer 2, plus an increased safety margin.
Because this path is intended to operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300 to 500 ms.
• BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker early-type
auxiliary switch contact (52/a). When using 1-Pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected
breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This is normally a non-multiplied Form-A contact. The contact
may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact (52/a). When using 1-Pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected breaker auxil-
iary switch contact on pole A. This may be a multiplied contact.
• BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker In-Ser-
vice/Out-of-Service switch set to the Out-of-Service position.
• BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
• BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
Neutral current supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid
only for 3-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current).

• BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current). This setting is valid only for 3-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion.
• BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This
timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure ele-
ment sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a Transfer Trip
signal on longer than the "reclaim" time.
• BF1 PH A INITIATE / BF1 PH B INITIATE / BF 1 PH C INITIATE: These settings select the FlexLogic™ operand to ini-
tiate phase A, B, or C single-pole tripping of the breaker and the phase A, B, or C portion of the scheme, accordingly.
This setting is only valid for 1-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS1 φB / BF1 BKR POS 1 φC: These settings select the FlexLogic™ operand to represents the protected
breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on poles B or C, accordingly. This contact is normally a non-multiplied Form-
A contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. This setting is valid only for
1-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φB: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact on pole B (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. This setting is valid only for 1-pole breaker failure
schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φC: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type
auxiliary switch contact on pole C (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. For single-pole operation, the scheme has
the same overall general concept except that it provides re-tripping of each single pole of the protected breaker. The
approach shown in the following single pole tripping diagram uses the initiating information to determine which pole is
supposed to trip. The logic is segregated on a per-pole basis. The overcurrent detectors have ganged settings. This
5 setting is valid only for 1-pole breaker failure schemes.
Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command, a 3-pole trip command should be given
via output operand "BF1 TRIP OP".

In D60 Only
From Trip Output
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP PHASE C
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP 3-POLE
TRIP PHASE A
SETTING
BF1 FUNCTION:
Enable=1
Disable=0
SETTING AND
BF1 BLOCK :
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 PH A INITIATE:
OR
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA

SETTING OR
OR
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE : AND
Off=0 Initiated Ph A
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
SETTING
BF1 USE SEAL-IN:
YES=1
NO=0
AND
AND
SEAL-IN PATH
5
SETTING OR
BF1 USE AMP SUPV:
YES=1
NO=0 OR
OR
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND (Initiated)
SETTING
OR
BF1 PH B INITIATE : OR BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB
AND
Off=0 AND
SEAL-IN PATH
Initiated Ph B
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
OR
SETTING OR
BF1 PH C INITIATE : FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC
Off=0
AND
SETTING AND
SETTING SEAL-IN PATH
BF1 PH AMP SUPV
BF1 SOURCE : PICKUP : Initiated Ph C
RUN TO SHEET 2 OF 2
IA IA PICKUP
RUN
IB IB PICKUP OR
RUN
IC IC PICKUP
} TO SHEET 2 OF 2
(827070.CDR)
827069A5.CDR
Figure 5–40: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE [INITIATE] (Sheet 1 of 2)

FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
(Initiated)
SETTING
SETTING
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP
BF1 USE TIMER 1: DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
YES=1 AND 0 BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP

NO=0
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS1 A/3P:
Off=0 AND
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
Initiated Ph A
OR
SETTING SETTING
BF1 USE TIMER 2: BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP
DELAY: AND
NO=0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
YES=1 AND 0
BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS1 B:
Off=0 AND
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2 OR
Initiated Ph B
5 SETTING
BF1 BKR POS1 C:
AND
Off=0 AND
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2 OR
Initiated Ph C
AND
SETTING
BF1 PH AMP HISET
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
PICKUP:
(827069.CDR)
RUN
IA IA PICKUP
RUN
IB IB PICKUP
RUN
IC IC PICKUP
SETTING SETTING
BF1 LOSET TIME SETTING
BF1 USE TIMER 3: DELAY: BF1 TRIP DROPOUT
YES=1 DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
NO=0 0 BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
OR
0
SETTING SETTING
BF1 BKR POS2 A/3P: 0 BF1 PH AMP LOSET
PICKUP :
RUN
Off=0 IA PICKUP
SETTING RUN
IB PICKUP
SETTING BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP RUN
IC PICKUP
DELAY:
BF1 BKR POS2 B:
AND 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off=0 BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS2 C:
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:
Off=0 827070A4.CDR
Figure 5–41: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE [TIMERS] (Sheet 2 of 2)

Figure 5–42: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE [INITIATE] (Sheet 1 of 2)

Figure 5–43: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE [TIMERS] (Sheet 2 of 2)

5.5.4 PHASE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" PHASE CURRENT
# PHASE CURRENT # PHASE TOC1

See page 5–84.
# #
# PHASE TOC2
#
# PHASE IOC1
#
# PHASE IOC2
#
b) INVERSE TOC CURVE CHARACTERISTICS

The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the TOC (time overcurrent) Current Elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type
IAC, and I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices. If however, none of
these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves™ may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics. The Defi-
nite Time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required.
Table 5–9: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES

IEEE IEC GE TYPE IAC OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inv.
IEEE Very Inverse
IEC Curve A (BS142)
IEC Curve B (BS142)
IAC Extremely Inv.
IAC Very Inverse
I2t
FlexCurves™ A, B, C, and D
5
IEEE Moderately Inv. IEC Curve C (BS142) IAC Inverse Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse IAC Short Inverse Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal “energy capacity” memory variable. When this variable indi-
cates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capac-
ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the
variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: “Instantaneous” and “Timed”. The Instan-
taneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity
directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays. With this setting, the energy capacity variable is decremented according to the
equation provided.
Graphs of standard time-current curves on 11” × 17” log-log graph paper are available upon request from
the GE Multilin literature department. The original files are also available in PDF format on the UR Software
NOTE
Installation CD and the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.

IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:
A tr
---------------------------------- + B ---------------------------------
-
T = TDM ×  ---------------
I - p , T = TDM ×  ---------------- 2 – 1
I (EQ 5.2)
 I pickup – 1
RESET
 I pickup
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
A, B, p = constants, TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”),
tr = characteristic constant
Table 5–10: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE A B P TR
IEEE Extremely Inverse 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85
Table 5–11: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE
5 0.5
1.0
11.341
22.682
4.761
9.522
1.823
3.647
1.001
2.002
0.648
1.297
0.464
0.927
0.355
0.709
0.285
0.569
0.237
0.474
0.203
0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068

IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K tr
--------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
-
T = TDM × ( I ⁄ I pickup ) E – 1 , T RESET = TDM × ( I ⁄ I 2 (EQ 5.3)
pickup ) – 1
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting, K, E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5–12: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE K E TR
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040 0.500
Table 5–13: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC CURVE A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297 5
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC CURVE B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC CURVE C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC SHORT TIME
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518

IAC CURVES:
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
 B D E  tr
T = TDM ×  A + ------------------------------ + -------------------------------------2- + -------------------------------------3- , T RESET = TDM × -------------------------------
- (EQ 5.4)
 ( I ⁄ I ) – C ( ( I ⁄ I ) – C ) ( ( I ⁄ I ) – C )  2
pkp pkp pkp ( I ⁄ I pkp ) – 1
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, Ipkp = Pickup Current setting, A to E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5–14: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE A B C D E TR
IAC Extreme Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 –1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 –0.4180 0.1947 0.990
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 –0.0010 0.0221 0.222
Table 5–15: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
5 1.0
2.0
3.398
6.796
1.498
2.997
0.606
1.212
0.356
0.711
0.246
0.491
0.186
0.372
0.149
0.298
0.124
0.248
0.106
0.212
0.093
0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC VERY INVERSE
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC INVERSE
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC SHORT INVERSE
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493

I2t CURVES:
The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae:
100 100
T = TDM × ------------------------2- , T RESET = TDM × --------------------------
- (EQ 5.5)
 ----------------
I I - – 2
 ---------------
 I pickup  I pickup
where: T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting;
TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 5–16: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.44 0.25 0.11 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01
0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10
1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00
10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 12.35 10.00
100.00 4444.4 2500.0 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00
600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00
FLEXCURVES™:
The custom FlexCurves™ are described in detail in the FlexCurves™ section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the
FlexCurves™ are derived from the formulae:
5
T = TDM × FlexCurve Time at  ---------------- when  ---------------- ≥ 1.00
I I
(EQ 5.6)
I pickup I pickup
T RESET = TDM × FlexCurve Time at  ---------------- when  ---------------- ≤ 0.98

I I
(EQ 5.7)
I pickup I pickup
where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE:
The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instanta-
neous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup (EQ 5.8)
T RESET = – TDM in seconds (EQ 5.9)
where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
RECLOSER CURVES:
The C60 uses the FlexCurve™ feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve™
section in this chapter for additional details.

c) PHASE TOC1(2) (PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT: ANSI 51P)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! PHASE CURRENT ! PHASE TOC1
# PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
INPUT: Phasor
PHASE TOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE TOC1 Range: See OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
PHASE TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
PHASE TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
RESET: Instantaneous
PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
RESTRAINT: Disabled
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
5 PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or
be used as a simple Definite Time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor
magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to the Inverse TOC Curves Character-
istic sub-section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time
accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instan-
taneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accom-
plished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see
the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as ‘Mvr’ times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint feature
is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.

Multiplier for Pickup Current

1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Phase-Phase Voltage ÷ VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage
818784A4.CDR
Figure 5–44: PHASE TOC VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-A :
Off=0
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
5
BLOCK-B:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
PHASE TOC1 INPUT:
BLOCK-C:
PHASE TOC1
Off=0 PICKUP:
PHASE TOC1
SETTING CURVE:
PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1
SOURCE: TD MULTIPLIER:
IA
PHASE TOC1
IB RESET: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IC AND RUN PHASE TOC1 A PKP
IA PICKUP
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB PHASE TOC1 A DPO
RUN MULTIPLY INPUTS
t PHASE TOC1 A OP
VAB VAC Set
Calculate Multiplier Set Pickup AND RUN PHASE TOC1 B PKP
RUN
Multiplier-Phase A IB PICKUP
Set PHASE TOC1 B DPO
VBC VBA Set Pickup
Calculate Multiplier t PHASE TOC1 B OP
RUN
Multiplier-Phase B
Set AND RUN PHASE TOC1 C PKP
VCA VCB IC PICKUP
Calculate Multiplier Set Pickup PHASE TOC1 C DPO
Multiplier-Phase C
t PHASE TOC1 C OP
SETTING OR PHASE TOC1 PKP
PHASE TOC1 VOLT
RESTRAINT: OR PHASE TOC1 OP
Enabled
827072A3.CDR
Figure 5–45: PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

d) PHASE IOC1(2) (PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT: ANSI 50P)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! PHASE CURRENT ! PHASE IOC 1
# PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
5 PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
Definite Time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
SETTING SETTING SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC
PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 PICKUP OPERANDS
FUNCTION: PICKUP: DELAY: PHASE IOC1 A PKP
Enabled = 1 AND RUN PHASE IOC1 RESET
Disabled = 0 DELAY: PHASE IOC1 A DPO
IA ³ PICKUP tPKP
SETTING tRST PHASE IOC1 B PKP
AND RUN
PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 B DPO
SOURCE: tPKP
IB ³ PICKUP
IA tRST PHASE IOC1 C PKP
AND RUN
IB
tPKP PHASE IOC1 C DPO
IC tRST
IC ³ PICKUP
PHASE IOC1 A OP
SETTING PHASE IOC1 B OP

PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-A: PHASE IOC1 C OP
Off = 0
OR PHASE IOC1 PKP
SETTING OR PHASE IOC1 OP

PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-B:
827033A5.VSD
Off = 0
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-C:
Off = 0
Figure 5–46: PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.5 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
# VOLTAGE ELEMENTS # PHASE

See page 5–88.
# # UNDERVOLTAGE1
# PHASE
# UNDERVOLTAGE2
# NEUTRAL OV1
#
# AUXILIARY UV1
#
# AUXILIARY OV1
#
These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as:
Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the drawn
current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used to either
cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay.
Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operating an
output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be used to block
the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.
Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its
5
normal source to a standby or emergency power source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a Definite Time delay characteristic. The Definite Time curve oper-
ates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to
600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay
characteristic. The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below.
D=5.0 2.0 1.0
D 20.0
T = ---------------------------------
-
 1 – ------------------
V  18.0
 V pickup 16.0
14.0
Time (seconds)
where: T = Operating Time 12.0

D = Undervoltage Delay Setting 10.0
(D = 0.00 operates instantaneously) 8.0
V = Secondary Voltage applied to the relay 6.0
Vpickup = Pickup Level 4.0
At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the 2.0
UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting. 0.0

NOTE 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
% of V pickup
Figure 5–47: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(2) (PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE: ANSI 27P)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ! PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1
# PHASE PHASE UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

# UNDERVOLTAGE1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE UV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE UV1 MODE: Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
MESSAGE
Phase to Ground
PHASE UV1 Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE UV1 Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
CURVE: Definite Time
PHASE UV1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE UV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
5 PHASE UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage
(phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for Wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for Delta VT connection) or as a Definite
Time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting
selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage
below which the element is blocked (a setting of "0" will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
SETTING SETTING
PHASE UV1 PHASE UV1
FUNCTION: PICKUP:
Disabled = 0
PHASE UV1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
PHASE UV1
SETTING DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PHASE UV1 AND RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP PHASE UV1 A PKP
BLOCK:
t PHASE UV1 A DPO
Off = 0 PHASE UV1 A OP
V
SETTING RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP PHASE UV1 B PKP
}
t PHASE UV1 B DPO
PHASE UV1 SOURCE:
SETTING PHASE UV1 B OP
Source VT = Delta PHASE UV1 V
VAB MINIMUM VOLTAGE: RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP PHASE UV1 C PKP
VBC VAG or VAB < Minimum t PHASE UV1 C DPO
VCA VBG or VBC < Minimum OR PHASE UV1 C OP
Source VT = Wye VCG or VCA < Minimum V
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING OR PHASE UV1 PKP
PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

VAG VAB OR PHASE UV1 OP
VBG VBC
VCG VCA
827039A9.CDR
Figure 5–48: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

c) NEUTRAL OV1 (NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE: ANSI 59N)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS !" NEUTRAL OV1
# NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The Neutral Overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to
the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from
the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase voltage channels entered under SETTINGS !" SYSTEM 5
SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE BANK ! PHASE VT SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to
be Wye connected.
SETTING
NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: SETTING
SETTING
AND RUN NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET
Off=0 DELAY :
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
3V_0 < Pickup tPKP
SETTING tRST NEUTRAL OV1 OP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
ZERO SEQ VOLT (V_0)
827848A1.CDR
Figure 5–49: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

d) AUXILIARY UV1 (AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE: ANSI 27X)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS !" AUXILIARY UV1
# AUXILIARY UV1 AUX UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX UV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
AUX UV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.700 pu
AUX UV1 CURVE: Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
Definite Time
AUX UV1 DELAY: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
1.00 s
AUX UV1 MINIMUM: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
AUX UV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AUX UV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
AUX UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
5 This element is intended for monitoring undervoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The AUX UV1 PICKUP selects the
voltage level at which the time undervoltage element starts timing. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage
channel entered under SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE BANK X5 !" AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY
is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
The AUX UV1 DELAY setting selects the minimum operating time of the auxiliary undervoltage element. Both AUX UV1 PICKUP
and AUX UV1 DELAY settings establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary undervoltage element
can be programmed to use either Definite Time Delay or Inverse Time Delay characteristics. The operating characteristics
and equations for both Definite and Inverse Time Delay are as for the Phase Undervoltage element.
The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is
blocked.
SETTING
AUX UV1
FUNCTION: SETTING
Disabled=0
AUX UV1 PICKUP:
Enabled=1
AUX UV1 CURVE:

SETTING
AUX UV1 BLOCK: AUX UV1 DELAY:

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off=0 AND RUN Vx < Pickup AUX UV1 PKP
AUX UV1 DPO
SETTING
SETTING t AUX UV1 OP
AUX UV1 MINIMUM
AUX UV1 SIGNAL VOLTAGE:
SOURCE:
AUX VOLT Vx Vx < Minimum
V
827849A2.CDR
Figure 5–50: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

e) AUXILIARY OV1 (AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE: ANSI 59X)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS !" AUXILIARY OV1
# AUXILIARY OV1 AUX OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
AUX OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
AUX OV1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
AUX OV1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
AUX OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AUX OV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
AUX OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. A typical application for this element
is monitoring the zero-sequence voltage (3V_0) supplied from an open-corner-delta VT connection. The nominal secondary
voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS "! VOLTAGE BANK X5 "! AUXILIARY VT 5
X5 SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
SETTING
AUX OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
AUX OV1 PICKUP: SETTING
SETTING
AND RUN AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
AUX OV1 RESET
Off=0 DELAY :
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Vx < Pickup tPKP
SETTING tRST AUX OV1 OP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: AUX OV1 PKP
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)
827836A2.CDR
Figure 5–51: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.6 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL... ! DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2)
# DIRECTIONAL DIR POWER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

# POWER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
DIR POWER 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
DIR POWER 1 Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RCA: 0°
DIR POWER 1 Range: 0 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
CALIBRATION: 0.00°
DIR POWER 1 STG1 Range: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SMIN: 0.100 pu
DIR POWER 1 STG1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.50 s
DIR POWER 1 STG2 Range: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SMIN: 0.100 pu
DIR POWER 1 STG2 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 20.00 s
DIR POWER 1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
5 MESSAGE
Off
DIR POWER 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-Reset
DIR POWER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The Directional Power element responds to three-phase active power and is designed for reverse power and low forward
power applications for synchronous machines or interconnections involving co-generation. The relay measures the three-
phase power from either full set of wye-connected VTs or full-set of delta-connected VTs. In the latter case, the two-wattme-
ter method is used. Refer to the UR Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6 for conventions regarding the active and
reactive powers used by the Directional Power element.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional Power Char-
acteristic diagram. The element responds to the following condition:
P cos θ + Q sin θ > SMIN (EQ 5.10)
where: P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the UR convention,
θ is a sum of the element characteristic (DIR POWER 1 RCA) and calibration (DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION) angles, and
SMIN is the minimum operating power
The operating quantity is available for display as under ACTUAL VALUES ! METERING !" SENSITIVE POWER 1(2). The ele-
ment has two independent (as to the pickup and delay settings) stages for alarm and trip, respectively.

n
io
ct
re
Di
OPERATE
RCA+
CALIBRATION
SMIN
P
+
RESTRAIN
-
Figure 5–52: DIRECTIONAL POWER CHARACTERISTIC

By making the characteristic angle adjustable and providing for both negative and positive values of the minimum operating
power a variety of operating characteristics can be achieved as presented in the figure below. For example, Figure (a)
below shows settings for reverse power application, while Figure (b) shows settings for low forward power application.
(a) Q (b) Q
RESTRAIN
OPERATE RESTRAIN OPERATE
P P
RCA = 180o RCA = 180o

5
SMIN > 0 SMIN < 0
(c) Q (d) Q
OPERATE OPERATE
P P
RESTRAIN RESTRAIN
RCA = 0o RCA = 0o
SMIN < 0 SMIN > 0
(e) Q
OPERATE
(f) Q
RESTRAIN
RESTRAIN OPERATE
P P
RCA = 90o RCA = 270o

SMIN > 0 SMIN < 0
842702A1.CDR
Figure 5–53: DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT SAMPLE APPLICATIONS

• DIR POWER 1(2) RCA: Specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional power function. Application of
this setting is threefold:
1. It allows the element to respond to active or reactive power in any direction (active overpower, active underpower,
etc.)
2. Together with a precise calibration angle, it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit more
sensitive settings.
3. It allows for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta-wye connected
power transformer and the phase angle compensation is required.
For example, the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to “0°”, reactive overpower
by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to “90°”, active underpower by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to “180°”, and reactive under-
power by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to “270°”.
• DIR POWER 1(2) CALIBRATION: This setting allows the RCA to change in small steps of 0.05°. This may be useful
when a small difference in VT and CT angular errors is to be compensated to permit more sensitive settings. This set-
ting virtually enables calibration of the Directional Power function in terms of the angular error of applied VTs and CTs.
The element responds to the sum of the DIR POWER X RCA and DIR POWER X CALIBRATION settings.
• DIR POWER 1(2) STG1 SMIN: This setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the RCA angle for the
stage 1 of the element. The positive values imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line. The negative
values imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line. Refer to the Directional Power Sample Applications
figure for an illustration. Together with the RCA, this setting enables a wide range of operating characteristics. This set-
ting applies to three-phase power and is entered in pu. The base quantity is 3 × VT pu base × CT pu base.
For example, a setting of 2% for a 200 MW machine, is 0.02 × 200 MW = 4 MW. If 7.967 kV is a primary VT voltage
and 10 kA is a primary CT current, the source pu quantity is 239 MVA, and thus, SMIN should be set at 4 MW /
5 239 MVA = 0.0167 pu ≈ 0.017 pu. If the reverse power application is considered, RCA = 180° and SMIN = 0.017 pu.
The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive-sequence current becomes virtually zero, that is, it drops below
the cutoff level.
• DIR POWER 1(2) STG1 DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for the Stage 1 of the element. For reverse power
or low forward power applications for a synchronous machine, Stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and Stage 2 for
tripping.
SETTING
DIR POWER 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
SETTINGS SETTING
SETTING DIR POWER 1 RCA: DIR POWER 1 STG1
DIR POWER 1 BLK: DELAY:
AND
DIR POWER 1 tPKP

CALIBRATION:
Off
DIR POWER 1 STG1 100ms
SMIN:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIR POWER 1 STG2 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING SMIN: DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP
RUN DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 SOURCE: DIR POWER 1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP
OR
DIRECTIONAL POWER DIR POWER 1 PKP

3Φ Active Power (P)
CHARACTERISTICS DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP
OR
DIR POWER 1 OP
3Φ Reactive Power (Q)
DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP
SETTING
DIR POWER 1 STG2
DELAY:
tPKP
100ms
842003A2.CDR
Figure 5–54: DIRECTIONAL POWER SCHEME LOGIC

5 SETTINGS 5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the
beginning of this chapter for further information.
5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS ! SETTINGS GROUPS
# SETTING GROUPS SETTING GROUPS Range: Disabled, Enabled

SETTING GROUPS BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SETTING GROUP Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The Setting Groups menu controls the activation/deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED ELE-
settings menu. The faceplate ’Settings in Use’ LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized
MENTS
LED) is in service. 5
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic™ parameter is set to
"On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the
breaker being open.
Each GROUP n ACTIVATE ON setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which, when set, will make the particular setting group
active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time – the high-
est-numbered group which is activated by its GROUP n ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered
groups. There is no "activate on" setting for Group 1 (the default active group), because Group 1 automatically becomes
active if no other group is active.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic™ equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default
settings group. The following FlexLogic™ equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications
(e.g. VIRTUAL INPUT 1) or from a local contact input (e.g. H7a) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and
requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The
assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the ON state of a particular settings group.
Figure 5–55: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC™ CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5.6.3 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" SELECTOR SWITCH ! SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
# SELECTOR SWITCH 1 SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

# Disabled
SELECTOR 1 FULL Range: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RANGE: 7
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: Range: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
5.0 s
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 ACK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
5 MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP Range: Restore, Synchronize
MESSAGE
MODE: Restore
SELECTOR 1 TARGETS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The Selector Switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The 3-bit control input allows setting
the selector to the position defined by a 3-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after time-
out or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory.
Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current 3-bit word (user setting).
Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; e.g. the 3-bit control input being out of range.
• SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through avail-
able positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (Position 1). When using a direct 3-bit
control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is
within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by
setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in
the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is “Time-out”, the setting specifies the required period of

inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEP-
UP MODE is “Acknowledge”, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is
re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT
timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set.
• SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new
position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1
FULL RANGE) to the first (Position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every
50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR 1 CHANGE
FROM Y TO Z target message is displayed, where Y is the present position and Z the pre-selected position. The mes-
sage is displayed for the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after
the selector times out (“Time-out” mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out
(“Acknowledge” mode). When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR 1 CHANGE FROM Y TO Z
message. Typically, a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input.
• SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the
selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and
does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to “Acknowledge”,
the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the
acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change
and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under “Acknowledge” mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the
last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a 3-bit control input of the selector. The 3-bit control word
pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention: 5
A2 A1 A0 POSITION
0 0 0 rest
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 7
The “rest” position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the
3-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Time-out”, the pre-selected position is applied
in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the 3-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Acknowl-
edge”, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the 3-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2) lock-
out mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the 3-bit control input is inactive; once the 3-bit control
sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to “Acknowledge”, the selector changes its posi-
tion only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a
pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT
ALARM FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the 3-bit control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic™ operand. This setting is active only under the
“Acknowledge” mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR
TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the 3-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and 3-bit control
input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).

• SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies behavior of the element on power up of the relay. When set
to “Restore”, the last selector position, stored in non-volatile memory, is restored after powering up the relay. When set
to “Synchronize”, the selector sets to the current 3-bit control input after powering up the relay. This operation does not
wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When powering up, the rest position (0, 0, 0) and the out-of-range 3-bit
control words are also ignored, the output is set to Position 0 (no output operand selected), and an alarm is established
(SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM). If the position restored from memory is out-of-range, Position 0 (no output operand
selected) is applied and an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
• SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:
EVENT NAME DESCRIPTION

SELECTOR 1 CHANGED FROM Y TO Z Selector 1 changed its position to from Y to Z.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not
been confirmed before the time out.
SELECTOR 1 3-BIT ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the 3-bit control input has not been
confirmed before the time out.
The following figures illustrate the operation of the Selector Switch. In these diagrams, “T” represents a time-out setting.
pre-existing changed to 4 with changed to 1 with changed to 2 with a changed to 7 with

position 2 a pushbutton a 3-bit input pushbutton a 3-bit input
STEP-UP
T T
5 3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
T T
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842737A1.CDR
Figure 5–56: TIME-OUT MODE

pre-existing changed to 4 with changed to 1 with changed to 2 with

position 2 a pushbutton a 3-bit input a pushbutton
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
5
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842736A1.CDR
Figure 5–57: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE

Application Example
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control Setting Groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 and from an external device via Contact Inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded 3-bit word to the external device and SCADA via out-
put contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of the
control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the 3-bit control input.
Make the following changes to Setting Group Control in the SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUPS menu:
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: “Enabled” GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 4"
SETTING GROUPS BLK: “Off” GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 2" GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 3"
Make the following changes to Selector Switch element in the SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" SELECTOR SWITCH !
SELECTOR SWITCH 1 menu to assign control to User Programmable Pushbutton 1 and Contact Inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: “Enabled” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: “CONT IP 1 ON”
SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: “4” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: “CONT IP 2 ON”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: “Time-out” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: “CONT IP 3 ON”
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: “5.0 s” SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON” SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: “Off”
SELECTOR 1 ACK: “Off” SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: “Synchronize”
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the Selector Switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"
“SELECTOR 1 BIT 1"
5 OUTPUT H2 OPERATE:
OUTPUT H3 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"
Finally, assign configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT
SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:

PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
The logic for the selector switch is shown below:
SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE:
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: ACTUAL VALUE

SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 POSITION
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:
Enabled = 1 RUN
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off step up SELECTOR 1 POS 1
2
SELECTOR 1 ACK: 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2
3
Off acknowledge SELECTOR 1 POS 3
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: 4
SELECTOR 1 POS 4
Off on SELECTOR 1 POS 5
3-bit control in
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: 7 5

SELECTOR 1 POS 6
Off 6
SELECTOR 1 POS 7
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
3-bit
Off
acknowledge 3-bit position out SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
OR
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A1.CDR
Figure 5–58: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC

5.6.4 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" SYNCHROCHECK ! SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
# SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHK1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

# Disabled
SYNCHK1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SRC 1
SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SRC 2
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT Range: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DIFF: 10000 V
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE Range: 0 to 100° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DIFF: 30°
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ Range: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DIFF: 1.00 Hz
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ Range: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
HYSTERESIS: 0.06 Hz
SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2, DV1 or DV2,
MESSAGE
SELECT: LV1 and DV2 DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2
5
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
SYNCHK1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
SYNCHK1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The are two identical synchrocheck elements available, numbered 1 and 2.

The synchronism check function is intended for supervising the paralleling of two parts of a system which are to be joined
by the closure of a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locations where the two parts of the
system are interconnected through at least one other point in the system.
Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker are within set limits
of magnitude, angle and frequency differences. The time that the two voltages remain within the admissible angle differ-
ence is determined by the setting of the phase angle difference ∆Φ and the frequency difference ∆F (slip frequency). It can
be defined as the time it would take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2 × ∆Φ at a frequency equal
to the frequency difference ∆F. This time can be calculated by:
1
T = -------------------------------
- (EQ 5.11)
360°
------------------ × ∆F
2 × ∆Φ
where: ∆Φ = phase angle difference in degrees; ∆F = frequency difference in Hz.

As an example; for the default values (∆Φ = 30°, ∆F = 0.1 Hz), the time while the angle between the two voltages will be
less than the set value is:
1 1
T = ------------------------------- - = 1.66 sec.
- = ------------------------------------------ (EQ 5.12)
360° 360°
------------------ × ∆F ------------------- × 0.1 Hz
2 × ∆Φ 2 × 30°
If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuit breaker using
undervoltage control to by-pass the synchrocheck measurements (Dead Source function).
• SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V1 (see NOTES below).
• SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V2, which must not be the same as used for the
V1 (see NOTES below).
• SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: This setting selects the maximum primary voltage difference in ‘kV’ between the two
sources. A primary voltage magnitude difference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permis-
sible limit for synchronism.
• SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: This setting selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two
sources. An angular difference between the two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit
for synchronism.
• SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: This setting selects the maximum frequency difference in ‘Hz’ between the two sources.
A frequency difference between the two input voltage systems below this value is within the permissible limit for syn-
chronism.
• SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: This setting specifies the required hysteresis for the maximum frequency differ-
ence condition. The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX
FREQ DIFF. Once the Synchrocheck element has operated, the frequency difference must increase above the SYNCHK1
5 MAX FREQ DIFF + SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS sum to drop out (assuming the other two conditions, voltage and
angle, remain satisfied).
• SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by-pass
synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2)
are below the maximum voltage threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level. Six
options are available:
None: Dead Source function is disabled
LV1 and DV2: Live V1 and Dead V2
DV1 and LV2: Dead V1 and Live V2
DV1 or DV2: Dead V1 or Dead V2
DV1 Xor DV2: Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live)
DV1 and DV2: Dead V1 and Dead V2
• SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in 1 ‘pu’. Below this
magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Dead” or de-energized.
• SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Below this
magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Dead” or de-energized.
• SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in ‘pu’. Above this mag-
nitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Live” or energized.
• SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Above this mag-
nitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Live” or energized.

Notes on the Synchrocheck Function:

1. The selected Sources for synchrocheck inputs V1 and V2 (which must not be the same Source) may include both a
three-phase and an auxiliary voltage. The relay will automatically select the specific voltages to be used by the synch-
rocheck element in accordance with the following table.
NO. V1 OR V2 V2 OR V1 AUTO-SELECTED AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE

(SOURCE Y) (SOURCE Z) COMBINATION
SOURCE Y SOURCE Z
1 Phase VTs and Phase VTs and Phase Phase VAB
Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT
2 Phase VTs and Phase VT Phase Phase VAB
Auxiliary VT
3 Phase VT Phase VT Phase Phase VAB
4 Phase VT and Auxiliary VT Phase Auxiliary V auxiliary
Auxiliary VT (as set for Source z)
5 Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT Auxiliary Auxiliary V auxiliary
(as set for selected sources)
The voltages V1 and V2 will be matched automatically so that the corresponding voltages from the two Sources will be
used to measure conditions. A phase to phase voltage will be used if available in both sources; if one or both of the
Sources have only an auxiliary voltage, this voltage will be used. For example, if an auxiliary voltage is programmed to
VAG, the synchrocheck element will automatically select VAG from the other Source. If the comparison is required on a
specific voltage, the user can externally connect that specific voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this
"Auxiliary Voltage" to check the synchronism conditions.
If using a single CT/VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage, ensure that only the auxiliary voltage 5
is programmed in one of the Sources to be used for synchrocheck.
Exception: Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye con-
nected auxiliary voltage.
NOTE
2. The relay measures frequency and Volts/Hz from an input on a given Source with priorities as established by the con-
figuration of input channels to the Source. The relay will use the phase channel of a three-phase set of voltages if pro-
grammed as part of that Source. The relay will use the auxiliary voltage channel only if that channel is programmed as
part of the Source and a three-phase set is not.

SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SYNCHK1 FUNCTION: SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN
Enable=1 SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN
Disable=0 SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX
SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX
SETTING AND
SYNCHK1 BLOCK: SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SYNC1 DEAD S OP
Off=0
SELECT: SYNC1 DEAD S DPO
None
AND
LV1 and DV2
AND
DV1 and LV2

AND
DV1 or DV2
AND OR
DV1 Xor DV2

AND
DV1 and DV2

AND
SETTING
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1
MAX VOLT:
V1 Max
XOR
SETTING
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2
MAX VOLT: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OR
V2 Max OR SYNC1 CLS OP
SYNC1 CLS DPO
SETTING
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1
MIN VOLT:
AND
V1 Min
SETTING
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2
5
MIN VOLT:
AND
V2 Min
SETTING
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT
SETTING CALCULATE
DIFF:
SYNCHK1 V1 SIGNAL Magnitude V1 Calculate
V Max
SOURCE: Angle 1 I V1-V2 I= V
SRC 1 Frequency F1 ACTUAL VALUE SETTING
SYNC1: V AND
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE
DIFF:
Calculate
Max
I 1- 2 I=
ACTUAL VALUE SETTING IN SYNCH 1
SYNC1: SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIFF: SYNC1 SYNC OP
SETTING CALCULATE
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ SYNC1 SYNC DPO
SYNCHK1 V2 SIGNAL Magnitude V2
HYSTERESIS:
SOURCE: Angle 2 Calculate
F Max
SRC 2 Frequency F2 I F1-F2 I= F
ACTUAL VALUE
SYNC1: F 827076AA.CDR
Figure 5–59: SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC

5.6.5 AUTORECLOSE
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" AUTORECLOSE ! AUTORECLOSE
# AUTORECLOSE AR FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

# Disabled
AR MODE: Range: 1 & 3 Pole, 1 Pole, 3 Pole-A, 3 Pole-B
MESSAGE
1 & 3 Pole
AR MAX NUMBER OF Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
SHOTS: 2
AR BLOCK BKR1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1: Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
0.10 s
AR BKR MAN CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR BLK TIME UPON MAN Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
CLS: 10.00 s
AR 1P INIT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR 3P INIT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off 5
AR 3P TD INIT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR MULTI-P FAULT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR ONE POLE OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 3 POLE OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1: Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
0.50 s
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2: Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
1.20 s
AR EXTEND DEAD T 1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR DEAD TIME 1 Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
EXTENSION: 0.50 s
AR RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR RESET TIME: Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
60.00 s
AR BKR CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off

AR PAUSE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TIME: 5.00 s
AR BLOCK BKR2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR CLOSE TIME BKR2: Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
0.10 s
AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
No
AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
No
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION: Range: Continue, Lockout
MESSAGE
Continue
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION: Range: Continue, Lockout
MESSAGE
Continue
AR 1-P DEAD TIME: Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
1.00 s
AR BKR SEQUENCE: Range: 1, 2, 1&2, 1–2, 2–1
MESSAGE
1-2
5 MESSAGE
AR TRANSFER TIME: Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
4.00 s
AR EVENT: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The autoreclose scheme is intended for use on transmission lines with circuit breakers operated in both the single pole and
three pole modes, in one or two breaker arrangements. The autoreclose scheme provides four programs with different
operating cycles, depending on the fault type. Each of the four programs can be set to trigger up to two reclosing attempts.
The second attempt always performs three pole reclosing and has an independent dead time delay.
When used in two breaker applications, the reclosing sequence is selectable. The reclose signal can be sent to one
selected breaker only, to both breakers simultaneously or to both breakers in sequence (one breaker first and then, after a
delay to check that the reclose was successful, to the second breaker). When reclosing in sequence, the first breaker
should trip and reclose single pole or three pole, according to the fault type and reclose mode; the second breaker should
always trip and reclose 3-Pole. When reclosing simultaneously, for the first shot both breakers should trip and reclose either
single pole or three pole, according to the fault type and the reclose mode.
The signal used to initiate the autoreclose scheme is the trip output from protection. This signal can be single pole tripping
for single phase faults and three phase tripping for multiphase faults.
The autoreclose scheme has five operating states, defined below.
Table 5–17: AUTORECLOSE OPERATION
STATE CHARACTERISTICS
Enabled Scheme is permitted to operate
Disabled Scheme is not permitted to operate
Reset Scheme is permitted to operate and shot count is reset to 0
Reclose In Progress Scheme has been initiated but the reclose cycle is not finished (successful or not)
Lockout Scheme is not permitted to operate until reset received

AR PROGRAMS:
The autorecloser provides four programs that can cause one or two reclose attempts (shots). The second reclose will
always be three pole. If the maximum number of shots selected is "1" (only one reclose attempt) and the fault is persistent,
after the first reclose the scheme will go to Lockout upon another Initiate signal.
For the 3-pole reclose programs (modes 3 and 4), an "AR FORCE 3-P" FlexLogic™ operand is set. This operand can be
used in connection with the tripping logic to cause a three-pole trip for single-phase faults.
Table 5–18: AUTORECLOSE PROGRAMS
MODE AR MODE FIRST SHOT SECOND SHOT
SINGLE-PHASE MULTI-PHASE SINGLE-PHASE MULTI-PHASE FAULT
FAULT FAULT FAULT
1 1 & 3 POLE 1 POLE 3 POLE 3 POLE or Lockout 3 POLE or Lockout
2 1 POLE 1 POLE LO 3 POLE or Lockout 3 POLE or Lockout
3 3 POLE-A 3 POLE LO 3 POLE or Lockout Lockout
4 3 POLE-B 3 POLE 3 POLE 3 POLE or Lockout 3 POLE or Lockout
• Mode 1, 1 & 3 Pole: When in this mode the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer for the first shot if the autore-
close is single-phase initiated, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer if the autoreclose is three-phase initiated, and the AR 3-P
DEAD TIME 2 timer if the autoreclose is three-phase time delay initiated. If two shots are enabled, the second shot is
always three-phase and the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 timer is started.
• Mode 2, 1 Pole: When in this mode the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME for the first shot if the fault is single
phase. If the fault is three-phase the scheme goes to lockout without reclosing. If two shots are enabled, the second
shot is always three-phase and starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2.
• Mode 3, 3 Pole-A: When in this mode the autorecloser is initiated only for single phase faults, although the trip is three
pole. The autorecloser uses the “AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1" for the first shot if the fault is single phase. If the fault is multi 5
phase the scheme will go to Lockout without reclosing. If two shots are enabled, the second shot is always three-phase
and starts “AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2".
• Mode 4, 3 Pole-B: When in this mode the autorecloser is initiated for any type of fault and starts the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1
for the first shot. If the initiating signal is AR 3P TD INIT the scheme starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 for the first shot. If two
shots are enabled, the second shot is always three-phase and starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2.
BASIC RECLOSING OPERATION:
Reclosing operation is determined primarily by the AR MODE and AR BKR SEQUENCE settings. The reclosing sequences are
started by the initiate inputs. A reclose initiate signal will send the scheme into the Reclose In Progress (RIP) state, assert-
ing the "AR RIP" operand. The scheme is latched into the RIP state and resets only when an "AR CLS BKR 1" (autoreclose
breaker 1) or "AR CLS BKR 2" (autoreclose breaker 2) operand is generated or the scheme goes to the Lockout state.
The dead time for the initial reclose operation will be determined by either the AR 1-P DEAD TIME, AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1, or AR
3-P DEAD TIME 2 setting, depending on the fault type and the mode selected. After the dead time interval the scheme will
assert the "AR CLOSE BKR 1" or "AR CLOSE BKR 2" operands, as determined by the sequence selected. These oper-
ands are latched until the breaker closes or the scheme goes to Reset or Lockout.
There are three initiate programs: single pole initiate, three pole initiate and three pole, time delay initiate. Any of these
reclose initiate signals will start the reclose cycle and set the "Reclose in progress" (AR RIP) operand. The reclose in
progress operand is sealed-in until the Lockout or Reset signal appears.
The three-pole initiate and three-pole time delay initiate signals are latched until the "Close Bkr1 or Bkr2" or Lockout or
Reset signal appears.
AR PAUSE:
The pause input offers the possibility of freezing the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This may be done
when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or loss of guard fre-
quency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. The pause signal blocks all three dead timers. When the “pause” signal
disappears the autoreclose cycle is resumed by initiating the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2.
This feature can be also used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a reclose is not desirable until the
transformer is removed from the line. In this case, the reclose scheme is “paused” until the transformer is disconnected.
The AR PAUSE input will force a three-pole trip through the 3-P DEADTIME 2 path.

EVOLVING FAULTS:
1.25 cycles after the single pole dead time has been initiated, the “AR FORCE 3P TRIP” operand is set and it will be reset
only when the scheme is reset or goes to Lockout. This will ensure that when a fault on one phase evolves to include
another phase during the single pole dead time of the auto-recloser the scheme will force a 3 pole trip and reclose.
RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR ONE BREAKER:
• Permanent Fault: Consider Mode 1, which calls for 1-Pole or 3-Pole Time Delay 1 for the first reclosure and 3-Pole
Time Delay 2 for the second reclosure, and assume a permanent fault on the line. Also assume the scheme is in the
Reset state. For the first single-phase fault the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer will be started, while for the first multi-phase fault
the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer will be started. If the AR 3P TD INIT signal is high, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 will be started for
the first shot.
If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to "1", upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again
detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the "AR SHOT COUNT >0"
that will set the "AR FORCE 3P" operand. Because the shot counter has reached the maximum number of shots per-
mitted the scheme is sent to the Lockout state.
If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to "2", upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again
detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the "AR SHOT COUNT >0"
that will set the "AR FORCE 3P" operand. After the second reclose the shot counter is set to 2. Upon reclosing, the
fault is again detected by protection, the breaker is tripped three-pole, and reclose is initiated again. Because the shot
counter has reached the maximum number of shots permitted the scheme is sent to the lockout state.
• Transient Fault: When a reclose output signal is sent to close the breaker the reset timer is started. If the reclosure
sequence is successful (there is no initiating signal and the breaker is closed) the reset timer will time out returning the
scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to "0" making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR TWO BREAKERS:
5 • Permanent Fault: The general method of operation is the same as that outlined for the one breaker applications
except for the following description, which assumes AR BKR SEQUENCE is “1-2” (reclose Breaker 1 before Breaker 2.)
The signal output from the dead time timers passes through the breaker selection logic to initiate reclosing of Breaker
1. The Close Breaker 1 signal will initiate the Transfer Timer. After the reclose of the first breaker the fault is again
detected by the protection, the breaker is tripped three pole and the autoreclose scheme is initiated. The Initiate signal
will stop the transfer timer. After the 3-P dead time times out the Close Breaker 1 signal will close first breaker again
and will start the transfer timer. Since the fault is permanent the protection will trip again initiating the autoreclose
scheme that will be sent to Lockout by the “Shot Count = Max” signal.
• Transient Fault: When the first reclose output signal is sent to close Breaker 1, the reset timer is started. The close
Breaker 1 signal initiates the transfer timer that times out and sends the close signal to the second breaker. If the reclo-
sure sequence is successful (both breakers closed and there is no initiating signal) the reset timer will time out, return-
ing the scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to 0. The scheme will be ready for a new reclose cycle.
AR BKR1(2) RECLS FAIL:
If the selected sequence is “1–2” or “2–1” and after the first or second reclose attempt the breaker fails to close, there are
two options. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL OPTION is set to “Lockout”, the scheme will go to lockout state. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL
OPTION is set to “Continue”, the reclose process will continue with Breaker 2. At the same time the shot counter will be
decreased (since the closing process was not completed).
SCHEME RESET AFTER RECLOSURE:
When a reclose output signal is sent to close either breaker 1 or 2 the reset timer is started. If the reclosure sequence is
successful (there is no initiating signal and the breakers are closed) the reset timer will time out, returning the scheme to
the reset state, with the shot counter set to 0, making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
In two breaker schemes, if one breaker is in the Out of Service state and the other is closed at the end of the reset time, the
scheme will also reset. If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the Out of Service state, is open
the scheme will be sent to Lockout.
The reset timer is stopped if the reclosure sequence is not successful: an initiating signal present or the scheme is in Lock-
out state. The reset timer is also stopped if the breaker is manually closed or the scheme is otherwise reset from lockout.

LOCKOUT:
When a reclose sequence is started by an initiate signal the scheme moves into the Reclose In Progress state and starts
the Incomplete Sequence Timer. The setting of this timer determines the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose
shot. If a close breaker 1 or 2 signal is not present before this time expires, the scheme goes to "Lockout".
There are four other conditions that can take the scheme to the Lockout state, as shown below:
• Receipt of "Block" input while in the Reclose in Progress state
• The reclosing program logic: when a 3P Initiate is present and the autoreclose mode is either 1 Pole or 3Pole-A (3 pole
autoreclose for single pole faults only)
• Initiation of the scheme when the count is at the maximum allowed
• If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the OUT OF SERVICE state, is open the scheme will
be sent to Lockout. The scheme will be also sent to Lockout if one breaker fails to reclose and the setting AR BKR FAIL
OPTION is set to "Lockout".
Once the Lockout state is set it will be latched in until the scheme is intentionally reset from Lockout or a breaker is manu-
ally closed.
BREAKER OPEN BEFORE FAULT:
A logic circuit is provided that inhibits the Close Breaker 1(2) output if a reclose initiate (RIP) indicator is not present within
30 ms of the “Breaker any phase open” input. This feature is intended to prevent reclosing if one of the breakers was open
in advance of a reclose initiate input to the recloser. This logic circuit resets when the breaker is closed.
TRANSFER RECLOSE WHEN BREAKER IS BLOCKED:
1. When the reclosing sequence 1-2 is selected and Breaker 1 is blocked (AR BKR1 BLK operand is set) the reclose sig-
nal can be transferred direct to the Breaker 2 if AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2 is set to “Yes”. If set to “No”, the scheme will be
sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer. 5
2. When the reclosing sequence 2-1 is selected and Breaker 2 is blocked (AR BKR2 BLK operand is set) the reclose sig-
nal can be transferred direct to the Breaker 1 if AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1 is set to “Yes”. If set to “No” the scheme will be sent
to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
FORCE 3-POLE TRIPPING:
The reclosing scheme contains logic that is used to signal trip logic that three-pole tripping is required for certain conditions.
This signal is activated by any of the following:
• Autoreclose scheme is Disabled.
• Autoreclose scheme is in the Lockout state.
• Autoreclose mode is programmed for three-pole operation
• The shot counter is not at 0, i.e. the scheme is not in the Reset state. This ensures a second trip will be three-pole
when reclosing onto a permanent single phase fault.
• 1.25 cycles after the single-pole reclose is initiated by the AR 1P INIT signal.
ZONE 1 EXTENT:
The Zone 1 extension philosophy here is to apply an overreaching zone permanently as long as the relay is ready to
reclose, and reduce the reach when reclosing. Another Zone 1 extension approach is to operate normally from an under-
reaching zone, and use an overreaching distance zone when reclosing the line with the other line end open. This philoso-
phy could be programmed via the Line Pickup scheme.
"Extended Zone 1" is 0 when the AR is in LO or Disabled and 1 when the AR is in Reset.
1. When "Extended Zone 1" is 0, the distance functions shall be set to normal underreach Zone 1 setting.
2. When "Extended Zone 1" is 1, the distance functions may be set to Extended Zone 1 Reach, which is an overreaching
setting.
3. During a reclose cycle, "Extended Zone 1" goes to 0 as soon as the first CLOSE BREAKER signal is issued (AR SHOT
COUNT > 0) and remains 0 until the recloser goes back to Reset.

USE OF SETTINGS:
• AR MODE: This setting selects the AR operating mode, which functions in conjunction with signals received at the ini-
tiation inputs as described previously.
• AR MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS: This setting specifies the number of reclosures that can be attempted before reclo-
sure goes to Lockout when the fault is permanent.
• AR BLOCK BKR1: This input selects an operand that will block the reclose command for Breaker 1. This condition
can be for example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker
and a half arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic™.
• AR CLOSE TIME BKR1:This setting represents the closing time for the Breaker 1 from the moment the “Close” com-
mand is sent to the moment the contacts are closed.
• AR BKR MAN CLOSE: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that represents manual close command to a
breaker associated with the autoreclose scheme
• AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS: The autoreclose scheme can be disabled for a programmable time delay after an
associated circuit breaker is manually commanded to close, preventing reclosing onto an existing fault such as
grounds on the line. This delay must be longer than the slowest expected trip from any protection not blocked after
manual closing. If the autoreclose scheme is not initiated after a manual close and this time expires the autoreclose
scheme is set to the Reset state.
• AR 1P INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that is intended to initiate single Pole autoreclosure.
• AR 3P INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that is intended to initiate three Pole autoreclosure, first timer
(AR 3P DEAD TIME 1) that can be used for a high-speed autoreclosure.
• AR 3P TD INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that is intended to initiate three Pole autoreclosure, second
timer (AR 3P DEAD TIME 2) that can be used for a time-delay autoreclosure.
5 • AR MULTI-P FAULT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that indicates a multi-phase fault. The operand value
should be zero for single-phase to ground faults.
• BKR ONE POLE OPEN: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which indicates that the breaker(s) has opened
correctly following a single phase to ground fault and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the single pole dead
time (for 1-2 reclose sequence for example, Breaker 1 should trip single pole and Breaker 2 should trip 3 pole).
The scheme has a pre-wired input that indicates breaker(s) status.
• BKR 3 POLE OPEN: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which indicates that the breaker(s) has opened three
pole and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the three pole dead time. The scheme has a pre-wired input that indi-
cates breaker(s) status.
• AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1: This is the dead time following the first three pole trip. This intentional delay can be used for a
high-speed three-pole autoreclose. However, it should be set longer than the estimated de-ionizing time following the
three-pole trip.
• AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2: This is the dead time following the second three-pole trip or initiated by the AR 3P TD INIT
input. This intentional delay is typically used for a time delayed three-pole autoreclose (as opposed to high speed
three-pole autoreclose).
• AR EXTEND DEAD T 1: This setting selects an operand that will adapt the duration of the dead time for the first shot
to the possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. Typically this is the operand set when the communi-
cation channel is out of service
• AR DEAD TIME 1 EXTENSION: This timer is used to set the length of the dead time 1 extension for possible non-
simultaneous tripping of the two ends of the line.
• AR RESET: This setting selects the operand that forces the autoreclose scheme from any state to Reset. Typically this
is a manual reset from lockout, local or remote.
• AR RESET TIME: A reset timer output resets the recloser following a successful reclosure sequence. The setting is
based on the breaker time which is the minimum time required between successive reclose sequences.
• AR BKR CLOSED: This setting selects an operand that indicates that the breaker(s) are closed at the end of the reset
time and the scheme can reset.

• AR BLOCK: This setting selects the operand that blocks the Autoreclose scheme (it can be a sum of conditions such
as: Time Delayed Tripping, Breaker Failure, Bus Differential Protection, etc.). If the block signal is present before
autoreclose scheme initiation the AR DISABLED FlexLogic™ operand will be set. If the block signal occurs when the
scheme is in the RIP state the scheme will be sent to Lockout.
• AR PAUSE: The pause input offers the ability to freeze the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This
may be done when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or
loss of guard frequency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. When the "pause" signal disappears the autore-
close cycle is resumed. This feature can also be used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a
reclose is not desirable until the it is disconnected from the line. In this situation, the reclose scheme is "paused" until
the transformer is disconnected.
• AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME: This timer is used to set the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot. It
is started whenever a reclosure is initiated and is active until the CLOSE BKR1 or BKR2 signal is sent. If all conditions
allowing a breaker closure are not satisfied when this time expires, the scheme goes to "Lockout". The minimum per-
missible setting is established by the "3-P Dead Time 2" timer setting. Settings beyond this will determine the "wait"
time for the breaker to open so that the reclose cycle can continue and/or for the AR PAUSE signal to reset and allow
the reclose cycle to continue and/or for the AR BKR1(2) BLK signal to disappear and allow the AR CLOSE BKR1(2)
signal to be sent.
• AR BLOCK BKR2: This input selects an operand that will block the reclose command for Breaker 2. This condition
can be for example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker
and a half arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic™.
• AR BKR2 MNL CLOSE: This setting selects an operand asserted when Breaker 2 is manually commanded to close.
• AR CLOSE TIME BKR2: This setting represents the closing time for the Breaker 2 from the moment the “Close” com-
mand is sent to the moment the contacts are closed.
• AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 1-2 5
and Breaker 1 is blocked. When set to “Yes” the closing command will be transferred direct to Breaker 2 without wait-
ing the transfer time. When set to “No” the closing command will be blocked by the AR BKR1 BLK signal and the
scheme will be sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
• AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2-1
and Breaker 2 is blocked. When set to “Yes” the closing command will be transferred direct to Breaker 1 without wait-
ing the transfer time. When set to “No”, the closing command will be blocked by the AR BKR2 BLK signal and the
scheme will be sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
• AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 1-
2 and Breaker 1 has failed to close. When set to “Continue” the closing command will be transferred to Breaker 2
which will continue the reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme will reset) or unsuccessful (the scheme will go to
Lockout). When set to “Lockout” the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose Breaker 2.
• AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2-
1 and Breaker 2 has failed to close. When set to “Continue” the closing command will be transferred to Breaker 1
which will continue the reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme will reset) or unsuccessful (the scheme will go to
Lockout). When set to “Lockout” the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose Breaker 1.
• AR 1-P DEAD TIME: Set this intentional delay longer than the estimated de-ionizing time after the first single-pole trip.
• AR BREAKER SEQUENCE: This setting selects the breakers reclose sequence:
1 = reclose breaker 1 only
2 = reclose breaker 2 only
1&2 = reclose both breakers simultaneously
1-2 = reclose breakers sequentially; Breaker 1 first
2-1 = reclose breakers sequentially; Breaker 2 first
• AR TRANSFER TIME: The transfer time is used only for breaker closing sequence 1-2 or 2-1, when the two breakers
are reclosed sequentially. The transfer timer is initiated by a close signal to the first breaker. The transfer timer trans-
fers the reclose signal from the breaker selected to close first to the second breaker. The time delay setting is based on
the maximum time interval between the autoreclose signal and the protection trip contact closure assuming a perma-
nent fault (unsuccessful reclose). Therefore, the minimum setting is equal to the maximum breaker closing time plus
the maximum line protection operating time plus a suitable margin. This setting will prevent the autoreclose scheme
from transferring the close signal to the second breaker unless a successful reclose of the first breaker occurs.

5
SETTING
AR FUNCTION:
NOTE
Enable=1
5-112
Disable=0
D60 Relay Only
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LINE PICKUP OP
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR ENABLED
SETTING AR DISABLED
OR
AR INITIATE
AR BLOCK:
(To page 2, Reset AR TRANSFER TIMER)
Off = 0
S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING Latch AR RIP
R 1.25 cycle To: AR FORCE 3P TRIP
AR BKR MAN CLOSE: SETTING AND S
AR BLK TIME UPON MAN Latch (Evolving fault)
Off = 0 0
CLS :
OR R
BKR MANUAL CLOSE:
0
(From sheet 3)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
SETTING AR 1-P RIP
LO
AR 1P INIT: SETTING
SETTING
pole for any type of fault
AR EXTEND DEAD TIME

Off = 0
AR 1-P DEAD TIME: 1:
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR Off = 0
TRIP 1-POLE AND 0
OR
SETTING
SETTING OR
AR DEAD TIME 1
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
EXTENSION:
AR 3P INIT: AR 3-P/1 RIP
OR AND
Off = 0 0
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR S
AND AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1:
TRIP AR INIT 3-POLE Latch
D60 Relay Only From Trip Output

R OR
OR AND
SETTING 0
AR 3P TD INIT:
AND
Off = 0
SETTING
CLOSE (to page 2)
BKR ONE POLE OPEN: OR
Off = 0
OR
BKR ONE POLE OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
From sheet 3
SETTING
AR 3-P/2 RIP
BKR 3 POLE OPEN:
Off = 0 SETTING
OR
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2:
BKR 3 POLE OPEN
OR
OR S AND
RESET 0
Latch
CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2
OR R

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR SHOT COUNT>0
SETTING AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
From Sheet 2
BKR FAIL TO RECLS
AR PAUSE
(from sheet 2)
Off = 0 827089AF.CDR
SHOT COUNT = MAX AND
SETTING
AND
AR M0DE: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND AR LO
1 Pole SETTING
Figure 5–60: SINGLE-POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (SHEET 1 OF 3)

3 Pole - A AR INCOMPLETE SEQ.
OR
3 Pole -B TIMER: OR
1 & 3 Pole
OR 0
D60 Relay Only From Phase Selector AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND OR
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P
0
SETTING 5ms
AND
OR
AR MULTI-P FAULT:
RESET (to sheet 2)
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR AR FORCE 3P TRIP
SETTING
AR RESET: Evolving fault

OR AR DISABLED
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
5 SETTINGS
OR AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
sequence (Breaker 2 for sequence 1-2 and Breaker 1 for sequence 2-1) must be configured to trip three-
For correct operation of the autoreclose scheme, the Breaker Control feature must be enabled and config-
ured properly. When the breaker reclose sequence is “1-2” or “2-1” the breaker that will reclose second in
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
30ms
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN AND 0
5 SETTINGS
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
AR BKR 1 BLK
AR BLOCK BKR 1:
OR
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OOS
SETTING
AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2:
No = 0
AND
AND S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING Latch AR CLOSE BKR 1
R
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION:
AND
SETTING
Continue=0 LO OR
To sheet 3 AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1: AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING AND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
OR From bkr control 2ms
AR BKR SEQUENCE: LO
AND
ACTUAL VALUES
1 OR SETTING AR SHOT COUNT: 0 (1,2)
AND
2
AR MAX NO OF SHOTS:
1&2
1-2 OR Increm Shot Sh=2
Counter FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR AND OR
2-1 Sh=1 AR SHOT CNT>0
AND Decrem Shot
OR Counter Sh=0
SHOT COUNT=MAX
OR Reset Count Sh=Max
CLOSE BKR 1 OR BKR 2

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
AR RIP OR AND OR TO
OR AR TRANSFER TIME: BKR FAIL TO RECLS SHEET 1
AR INITIATE (To LO)
S
FROM
Latch AND OR
SHEET 1 0ms
OR R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR LO AND
RESET
CLOSE
SETTING
LO
AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1: AND
AND
No = 0
AND S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Latch AR CLOSE BKR 2
AND
SETTING R
LO
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR SETTING
Continue=0 AND BREAKER 2 CLOSED AR CLOSE TIME BKR 2: AND

From bkr control
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 2ms

BREAKER 2 OOS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR BKR 2 BLK
SETTING
AR BLOCK BKR 2: BKR CLOSED (from page 3)

OR
OR AND 827090A9.CDR
Off=0 SETTING

30ms AR RESET TIME:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR
AND
BREAKER 2 ANY P OPEN AND 0
AND AND 0
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
OR AR RESET
AR BKR CLOSED:
Off=0
RESET
(From Sheet 1)
5-113
5
}
}
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
From BREAKER 1 OOS
Breaker Control
Scheme FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OOS
}
AR BKR SEQUENCE:
1
2
From sheet 2 1&2
1-2
2-1
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
BKR MANUAL CLOSE

OR
(To sheet 1)
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 MNL CLS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
5
AND
BKR CLOSED
OR (To sheet 2)
OR
From
Breaker Control
Scheme
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 2 OPEN
OR BKR 3 POLE OPEN
(To sheet 1)
OR
OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 2 ONE P OPEN
OR
AND
OR BKR ONE POLE OPEN
(To sheet 1)
OR
AND
AND
827833A8.CDR

GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
1ST SHOT 2ND SHOT
F R
A T PROT E
T
U R T TRIP BKR S
L I T PROT RESET E
T P T
PREFAULT
AR 1P INIT
AR RIP
1-P DEAD TIME
AR 1-P RIP
1.25 cycle
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
CLOSE
AR CLOSE BKR1
T CLOSE BKR1 T CLOSE BKR1
AR RESET TIME
RESET TIME
AR SHOT COUNT > 0
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
T TRIP BKR T PROT RESET
T PROT
AR 3P INIT

3-P/2 DEAD TIME
AR 3P/2 RIP
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
Figure 5–63: EXAMPLE RECLOSING SEQUENCE

AR CLOSE BKR2
T CLOSE BKR2
TRANSFER TIME
AR TRANSFER TIME
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ. TIME

842703A4.CDR
5-115
5
5.6.6 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" DIGITAL ELEMENTS ! DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(16)
# DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Dig Element 1
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 16 identical Digital Elements available, numbered 1 to 16. A Digital Element can monitor any FlexLogic™ oper-
5 and and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital ele-
ment settings include a ‘name’ which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected
FlexLogic™ operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to be monitored by the Digital Element.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0".
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0”.
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0 SETTINGS
Enabled = 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
SETTING PICKUP DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
NAME: RESET DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 DIG ELEM 01 DPO
AND RUN tPKP
INPUT: DIG ELEM 01 PKP
Off = 0 DIG ELEM 01 OP
INPUT = 1 tRST
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
827042A1.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–64: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC

CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS:
Some versions of the digital input modules include an active Voltage Monitor circuit connected across Form-A contacts.
The Voltage Monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see Technical Specifications for Form-A).
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above a threshold (see Technical Specifications for Form-A), the Flex-
Logic™ operand "Cont Op # VOn" will be set. (# represents the output contact number). If the output circuit has a high
resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the FlexLogic™ operand
"Cont Op # VOff" will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the cir-
cuits in which Form-A contacts are inserted.

EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING

In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip oper-
ation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the Voltage Monitor connected across the trip output contact
detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resis-
tance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the
breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must
include the breaker position.
DC+
UR Relay - Form-A
H1a
I = Current Monitor I
H1b
V = Voltage Monitor V
H1c
52a
Trip
Coil
5
827073A1.vsd
DC–
Figure 5–65: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1
Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name, e.g.
“Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status. Using the
contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, e.g. “Cont Ip 1" and will be set “ON” when the breaker is closed.
Using Digital Element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit, the settings will be:
# DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

# FUNCTION: Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
MESSAGE
Bkr Trip Cct Out
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
MESSAGE
Cont Op 1 VOff
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.200 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.100 s
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1 Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Enabled
The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance
alarms.
NOTE

EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING

If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the fig-
ure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip
circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position – the BLOCK setting is
selected to “Off”. In this case, the settings will be:
# DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

# FUNCTION: Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
MESSAGE
Bkr Trip Cct Out
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
MESSAGE
Cont Op 1 VOff
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.200 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.100 s
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
5 MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Enabled
DC+
Table 5–19: VALUES OF RESISTOR ‘R’
UR Relay - Form-A
POWER RESISTANCE POWER
H1a SUPPLY (V DC) (OHMS) (WATTS)
I = Current Monitor I
24 1000 2
H1b
30 5000 2
V = Voltage Monitor V
H1c 48 10000 2
110 25000 5
52a By-pass
R 125 25000 5
Resistor
250 50000 5
Trip
Coil
827074A1.vsd
DC–
Figure 5–66: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2

5.6.7 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" DIGITAL COUNTERS ! COUNTER 1(8)
# COUNTER 1 COUNTER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

COUNTER 1 NAME: Range: 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Counter 1
COUNTER 1 UNITS: Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 PRESET: Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

MESSAGE
0
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
0
COUNTER 1 UP: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off 5
COUNTER 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from
Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an
external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
• COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted.
The units label will appear in the corresponding Actual Values status.
• COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case
where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
• COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic™ output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the set
value.
• COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to –2,147,483,648.
• COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is
received when the accumulated value is at the limit of –2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to
+2,147,483,647.
• COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are
blocked.

• CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will
be set to the preset value in the following situations:
1. When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled
and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
2. When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO
PRESET changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
3. When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value
1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the
value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
• COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for setting the count to either “0” or the preset value depending
on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
• COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to “0”.
• COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated
value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is
interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
SETTINGS
Enabled = 1
COUNTER 1 NAME:
5 SETTING
COUNTER 1 UP:
AND COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
RUN
Off = 0 SETTING
FLEXLOGIC
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: OPERANDS
SETTING
CALCULATE Count more than Comp. COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 DOWN: VALUE Count equal to Comp. COUNTER 1 EQL
Off = 0 Count less than Comp. COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off = 0 SET TO PRESET VALUE
SETTING SET TO ZERO

ACTUAL VALUE
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET: COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING AND ACTUAL VALUES

COUNTER 1 RESET:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
Off = 0
OR STORE DATE & TIME Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
827065A1.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
Figure 5–67: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC

5.6.8 MONITORING ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS
# MONITORING # BREAKER 1
See below.
# ELEMENTS # ARCING CURRENT
# BREAKER 2
MESSAGE See below.
# ARCING CURRENT
# VT FUSE FAILURE
#
b) BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS ! BREAKER 1(2) ARCING CURRENT
# BREAKER 1 BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: Disabled, Enabled

# ARCING CURRENT FUNCTION: Disabled
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
BKR 1 ARC AMP INIT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
5
BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT: Range: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
MESSAGE
1000 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 ARC AMP BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 2 identical Breaker Arcing Current features available for Breakers 1 and 2. This element calculates an estimate
of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current squared passing through the
breaker contacts as an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared to a
programmed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set an output operand to “1”.
The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value.
The operation of the scheme is shown in the following logic diagram. The same output operand that is selected to operate
the output relay used to trip the breaker, indicating a tripping sequence has begun, is used to initiate this feature. A time
delay is introduced between initiation and the starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the
breaker before the contacts have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary
relays and the breaker mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, the interval between change-of-state of the
operand (from 0 to 1) and contact separation should be measured for the specific installation. Integration of the measured
current continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period.
• BKR 1(2) ARC AMP INIT: Selects the same output operand that is selected to operate the output relay used to trip the
breaker.
• BKR 1(2) ARC AMP DELAY: This setting is used to program the delay interval between the time the tripping sequence
is initiated and the time the breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.
• BKR 1(2) ARC AMP LIMIT: Selects the threshold value above which the output operand is set.

Breaker
Contacts Arc
Initiate Part Extinguished
Total Area =
Breaker
Arcing
Current
(kA·cycle)
Programmable
Start Delay 100 ms
Start Stop
Integration Integration
Figure 5–68: ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AND SETTING
AMP FUNCTION:
Disabled=0 BREAKER 1 ARCING
Enabled=1 AMP DELAY: 100 ms
5 SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
OR 0 0
AMP INIT:
Off=0 AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP BLOCK:
Off=0
SETTING
RUN SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING Add to
AMP SOURCE: Accumulator BREAKER 1 ARCING
IA Integrate IA 2 -Cycle Select
AMP LIMIT: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
2
IB Integrate IB 2 -Cycle Highest KA * Cycle Limit BKR1 ARC OP
IC Integrate IC 2 -Cycle Value
Set All To Zero

COMMAND
CLEAR BREAKER 1 ACTUAL VALUE
ARCING AMPS: BKR 1 ARCING AMP A
NO=0 BKR 1 ARCING AMP B
YES=1 BKR 1 ARCING AMP C 827071A2.CDR
Figure 5–69: BREAKER ARCING CURRENT SCHEME LOGIC

c) VT FUSE FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS !" VT FUSE FAILURE
# VT FUSE FAILURE VT FUSE FAILURE Range: Disabled, Enabled

Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme.

The VT fuse failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for a full or
partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via the BLOCK
input) are distance, voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current.
There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur:
Class A: Loss of one or two phases.
Class B: Loss of all three phases.
Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of Class A failures is a significant level of negative
sequence voltage, whereas an indication of Class B failures is when positive sequence current is present and there is an
insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be present when faults
are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is pro-
vided. Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it will be sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears.
An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized; positive
sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.
The common VT FUSE FAILURE FUNCTION setting enables/disables the fuse failure feature for all sources.
AND 5
FAULT
OR
AND
SETTING
VT FUSE FAILURE
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
AND
COMPARATORS
SOURCE 1
RUN
V_2 V_2 > 0.25 p.u.
RUN OR
V_1 V_1 < 0.05 p.u. OR SET
AND FUSE FAIL
RUN
I_1 I_1 > 0.075 p.u.
RUN
V_1 < 0.7 p.u. 0 AND
AND
RUN 20 CYCLES
I_1 < 0.05 p.u. FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LATCH SRC1 VT FF OP
SRC1 50DD OP SRC1 VT FF DPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
D60 only
AND
OR RESET
Reset-dominant
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND SRC X VT FF VOL LOSS
827093AD.CDR
Figure 5–70: VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS
5.7INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS ! CONTACT INPUTS
# CONTACT INPUTS
#
# CONTACT INPUT H5a

#
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

MESSAGE
DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
↓
# CONTACT INPUT xxx

#
# CONTACT INPUT
# THRESHOLDS
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
5 THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
↓
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group
of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which
contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The "Contact
Ip X On" (Logic 1) FlexLogic™ operand corresponds to contact input "X" being closed, while "Contact Input X Off" corre-
sponds to contact input "X" being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to over-
come ’contact bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum
contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT INPUT
EVENTS is set to "Enabled", every change in the contact input state will trigger an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below.
The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a user-
settable debounce time in order for the C60 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set
at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no.1 in the diagram). Once validated (de-
bounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic™ operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the con-
tact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic™ equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic™ operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the fig-
ure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well
as FlexLogic™ equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.

5 SETTINGS 5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The FlexLogic™ operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of
the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a
delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1msec.
For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a con-
tact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic™ operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 µs accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce
timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic™ operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
VOLTAGE
INPUT
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
6
2 1 3 5
Time stamp of the first
TM
Time stamp of the first At this time, the The FlexLogic scan corresponding to the
scan corresponding to
the new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
new (HIGH)
contact state is
validated
operand is going to
be asserted at this
protection pass
new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
At this time, the new
(LOW) contact state is
validated
5
7
RAW CONTACT
The FlexLogicTM
operand is going to be
STATE
de-asserted at this
protection pass
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
4
The FlexLogicTM operand
DEBOUNCE TIME
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the
SCAN TIME (user setting)
changes reflecting the validated contact state
FLEXLOGICTM
(0.5 msec) validated contact state

OPERAND
PROTECTION PASS
(8 times a cycle controlled by the
frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 5–71: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value should be selected according to the following criteria: 16 for 24 V sources, 30 for 48 V sources, 80 for 110 to 125 V
sources and 140 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in
the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed (52b)"
CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.

5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" VIRTUAL INPUTS !
# VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID: Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
TYPE: Latched
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
# VIRTUAL INPUT 2
As above for Virtual Input 1
#
↓ ↓
# VIRTUAL INPUT 32
As above for Virtual Input 1
#
# UCA SBO TIMER UCA SBO TIMEOUT: Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1

# 30 s
5 There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (COMMANDS
menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to OFF = 0 unless the appropriate input sig-
nal is received. Virtual input states are preserved through a control power loss.
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to "Disabled", the input will be forced to 'OFF' (Logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter
the input. If set to "Enabled", the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic™ operands
in response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: Self-Reset and Latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is "Self-Reset", when the input signal
transits from OFF = 0 to ON = 1, the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic™ equa-
tions and then return to OFF = 0. If set to "Latched", the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state
as the most recent received input, ON =1 or OFF = 0.
The "Self-Reset" operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic™
equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic™ equation, it will
NOTE
likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic™ timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
The Select-Before-Operate timer sets the interval from the receipt of an Operate signal to the automatic de-selection of the
virtual input, so that an input does not remain selected indefinitely (used only with the UCA Select-Before-Operate feature).
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1 S
AND
Latch
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”
SETTING
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0” R VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
AND
SETTING (Flexlogic Operand)
OR
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched AND
Self - Reset 827080A2.CDR
Figure 5–72: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC

5.7.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS ! CONTACT OUTPUT H1
# CONTACT OUTPUT H1 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

# Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Enabled
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs.
An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic™
operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic™ operand may be used to
SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
EXAMPLE:
The trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A contacts (see the
Trip Circuit Example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor will set a flag (see the Specifications for Form-A). The
name of the FlexLogic™ operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the name of the
flag; e.g. ‘Cont Op 1 IOn’ or ‘Cont Op 1 IOff’.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
5
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper-
ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the
trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping
circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called "trip seal-in".
This can be realized in the UR using the ‘Cont Op 1 IOn’ FlexLogic™ operand to seal-in the Contact Output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: “Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic™ operand
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: “Cont Op 1 IOn”
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: “Enabled”
5.7.4 LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" LATCHING OUTPUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a
# LATCHING OUTPUT H1a ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

# OUTPUT H1a L-Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1a RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1a TYPE: Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
MESSAGE
Operate-dominant
OUTPUT H1a EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled

The C60 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such
they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and pop-
ulates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware
before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic™).
The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching con-
tacts when replacing a module.
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabili-
ties for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is
declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic™ operand, event, and target message.
• OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to operate the ‘close coil’ of the contact. The
relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed, any activity exhibited by this input,
such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect.
• OUTPUT H1 RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to operate the ‘trip coil’ of the contact. The relay will
seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened, any activity exhibited by this input, such as
subsequent chattering, will not have any effect.
• OUTPUT H1 TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
operate and reset signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to
“Operate-dominant” and will open if set to “Reset-dominant”.
Application Example 1:
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The
following settings should be applied.
5 Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUT !" LATCHING OUT-
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “PUSHBUTTON 2 ON”
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUT-
TONS !" USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset” PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s” PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s”
A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUT !" LATCHING OUT-
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a and LATCHING OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1” OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2” OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO1”
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not
operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. There-
fore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such
as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the con-
trol inputs as shown in the next application example.
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality as described below:

Write the following FlexLogic™ equation (URPC example shown):
Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a and LATCHING OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1” OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO4” OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO3”
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1
is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
5.7.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ! VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
# VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

# Virt Op 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 64 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic™. If not assigned, the output will be forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic
0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the
FlexLogic™ equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic™ and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings
would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"

5.7.6 REMOTE DEVICES
a) REMOTE I/O OVERVIEW

Remote inputs and outputs, which are a means of exchanging information regarding the state of digital points between
remote devices, are provided in accordance with the Electric Power Research Institute’s (EPRI) UCA2 “Generic Object Ori-
ented Substation Event (GOOSE)” specifications.
The UCA2 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet com-
munications facilities. For UR relays, Ethernet communications is provided only on the type 9C and 9D ver-
NOTE
sions of the CPU module.
The sharing of digital point state information between GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic™ to
allow distributed FlexLogic™ by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In
addition to digital point states, GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other information
required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data from only those mes-
sages that have originated in selected devices.
GOOSE messages are designed to be short, high priority and with a high level of reliability. The GOOSE message structure
contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The UCA specification provides 32 “DNA” bit
pairs, which are status bits representing pre-defined events. All remaining bit pairs are “UserSt” bit pairs, which are status
bits representing user-definable events. The UR implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.
The UCA2 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and
receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when the state of
any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the “default update” time) if a change-of-state has not occurred.
The transmitting device also sends a “hold time” which is set to three times the programmed default time, which is required
by the receiving device.
5 Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the
identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the mes-
sage “hold” time for the device. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to the “hold” time interval,
and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communi-
cating, so it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. This mechanism allows a
receiving device to fail to detect a single transmission from a remote device which is sending messages at the slowest pos-
sible rate, as set by its “default update” timer, without reverting to use of the programmed default states. If a message is
received from a remote device before the “hold” time expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained
in the message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where ‘Offline’ indicates ‘non-communicat-
ing’, can be displayed.
The GOOSE facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs.
b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GOOSE MESSAGES

In a UR relay, the device ID that identifies the originator of the message is programmed in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP
!" INSTALLATION !" RELAY NAME setting.
c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GOOSE MESSAGES

PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE DEVICES ! REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
# REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

# Remote Device 1
Sixteen Remote Devices, numbered from 1 to 16, can be selected for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be pro-
grammed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific
remote devices by entering (bottom row) the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.

5.7.7 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE INPUTS ! REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
# REMOTE INPUT 1 REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE: Range: 1 to 16 inclusive

# Remote Device 1
REMOTE IN 1 BIT Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32
MESSAGE
PAIR: None
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
STATE: Off
REMOTE IN 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Remote Inputs which create FlexLogic™ operands at the receiving relay, are extracted from GOOSE messages originating
in remote devices. The relay provides 32 Remote Inputs, each of which can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selec-
tions: DNA-1 through DNA-32 and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the UCA2 specifi-
cations and is presented in the UCA2 DNA Assignments table in the Remote Outputs section. The function of UserSt inputs
is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic™ operand whose state is represented in the GOOSE message. A user
must program a DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic™ operand.
Remote Input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local
use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE selects the number (1 to 16) of the Remote Device which originates the required signal, as previously
assigned to the remote device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE NN ID (see the Remote Devices section). REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR
selects the specific bits of the GOOSE message required. 5
The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or
the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” value defaults the input to Logic 1.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to Logic 0.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 1.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 0.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
For additional information on the GOOSE specification, refer to the Remote Devices section in this chapter
and to Appendix C: UCA/MMS Communications.
NOTE

5.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS
a) DNA BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS ! REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1 BIT PAIR
# REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA- 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand

# DNA- 1 BIT PAIR Off
DNA- 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
Remote Outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic™ operands inserted into GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote
devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ oper-
and. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted.
Table 5–20: UCA DNA2 ASSIGNMENTS

DNA DEFINITION INTENDED FUNCTION LOGIC 0 LOGIC 1
1 OperDev Trip Close
2 Lock Out LockoutOff LockoutOn
3 Initiate Reclosing Initiate remote reclose sequence InitRecloseOff InitRecloseOn
4 Block Reclosing Prevent/cancel remote reclose sequence BlockOff BlockOn
5 Breaker Failure Initiate Initiate remote breaker failure scheme BFIOff BFIOn
6 Send Transfer Trip Initiate remote trip operation TxXfrTripOff TxXfrTripOn
7 Receive Transfer Trip Report receipt of remote transfer trip command RxXfrTripOff RxXfrTripOn
5 8
9
Send Perm
Receive Perm
Report permissive affirmative
Report receipt of permissive affirmative
TxPermOff
RxPermOff
TxPermOn
RxPermOn
10 Stop Perm Override permissive affirmative StopPermOff StopPermOn
11 Send Block Report block affirmative TxBlockOff TxBlockOn
12 Receive Block Report receipt of block affirmative RxBlockOff RxBlockOn
13 Stop Block Override block affirmative StopBlockOff StopBlockOn
14 BkrDS Report breaker disconnect 3-phase state Open Closed
15 BkrPhsADS Report breaker disconnect phase A state Open Closed
16 BkrPhsBDS Report breaker disconnect phase B state Open Closed
17 BkrPhsCDS Report breaker disconnect phase C state Open Closed
18 DiscSwDS Open Closed
19 Interlock DS DSLockOff DSLockOn
20 LineEndOpen Report line open at local end Open Closed
21 Status Report operating status of local GOOSE device Offline Available
22 Event EventOff EventOn
23 Fault Present FaultOff FaultOn
24 Sustained Arc Report sustained arc SustArcOff SustArcOn
25 Downed Conductor Report downed conductor DownedOff DownedOn
26 Sync Closing SyncClsOff SyncClsOn
27 Mode Report mode status of local GOOSE device Normal Test
28→32 Reserved
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see the Remote I/O Overview in the Remote Devices sec-
tion.
NOTE

b) USERST BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS ! REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR
# REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR Off
UserSt- 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
Remote Outputs 1 to 32 originate as GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the mes-
sage must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ operand. The setting above is used to select the
operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.
The following setting represents the time between sending GOOSE messages when there has been no change of state of
any selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" UCA/MMS PROTOCOL set-
tings menu.
DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
TIME: 60 s
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see the Remote I/O Overview in the Remote Devices sec-
tion.
NOTE
5.7.9 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING
# RESETTING RESET OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# Off 5
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once
set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition
has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic™ latches) to the reset
state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate RESET button, a remote device via a communications chan-
nel, or any programmed operand.
When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic™ operands are created. These operands, which are
stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each cre-
ate the FlexLogic™ operand "RESET OP". Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual oper-
and RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the
command. The setting shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.
5.7.10 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" DIRECT INPUTS ! DIRECT INPUT 1(32)
# DIRECT INPUT 1 DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: 1 to 8

# DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: 1 to 32
MESSAGE
BIT NUMBER: 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
DEFAULT STATE: Off
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
These settings specify how the Direct Input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT DEVICE ID represents the source of
this Direct Input. The specified Direct Input is driven by the device identified here.

The DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER is the bit number to extract the state for this Direct Input. Direct Input x is driven by the bit
identified here as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the Direct Output Number of the sending device.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the Direct Input when the associated Direct Device is offline. The
following choices are available:
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” value defaults the input to Logic 1.
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to Logic 0.
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
b) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" DIRECT OUTPUTS ! DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32)
# DIRECT OUTPUT 1 DIRECT OUT 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# Off
DIRECT OUTPUT 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is the FlexLogic™ operand that determines the state of this Direct Output.
5 c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES
The example introduced in the Product Setup section for Direct I/Os is continued below to illustrate usage of the Direct
Inputs and Outputs.
Example 1: Extending I/O Capabilities of a C60 relay
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of program-
mable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR IED, such as
the C30, to satisfy the additional I/Os and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-chan-
nel digital communication cards as shown below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
Figure 5–73: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS

Assume Contact Input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5
and bit number 12 are used, as an example):
UR IED 1: DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = “2” UR IED 2: DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND = “Cont Ip 1 On”
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = “12”
The “Cont Ip 1 On” operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as “DIRECT INPUT 5 ON”.
Example 2: Interlocking Busbar Protection
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.

UR IED 1 BLOCK
UR IED 2 UR IED 3 UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5–74: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

Assume that Phase IOC1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1 would trip the bus upon
detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to sent the blocking signal and Direct Inputs
7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals):
UR IED 2: DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 1: DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
5
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3"

Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as "DIRECT INPUT 7 ON", "DIRECT INPUT 8 ON", and "DIRECT
INPUT 9 ON". Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to "ON"),
or to trip the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to "OFF").
Example 2: Pilot-aided schemes
Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5–75: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION

Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown
below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.

TX1 RX1 RX2

UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 TX1 TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5–76: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION

In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a "bridge". The
following settings should be applied:
UR IED 1: DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from IED 3)
UR IED 3: DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
5 DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from IED 1)
UR IED 2: DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1"
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" (forward a message from 1 to 3)
DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6" (forward a message from 3 to 1)
Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
DIRECT INPUT 6 DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 3 DIRECT INPUT 5

DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
842717A1.CDR
Figure 5–77: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT I/O EXAMPLE 3

In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, Direct
Inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic™ and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT
RX1 setting).

5 SETTINGS 5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5.8TRANSDUCER I/O 5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TRANSDUCER I/O !" DCMA INPUTS
# DCMA INPUTS # DCMA INPUT H1

# #
↓
↓
# DCMA INPUT U8
MESSAGE
#
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital for-
mat for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common
transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are con-
tained in Chapter 3.
Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels
with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown below for the first channel of
5
a type 5F transducer module installed in slot M.
# DCMA INPUT M1 DCMA INPUT M1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

DCMA INPUT M1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DCMA Ip 1
DCMA INPUT M1 Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
UNITS: µA
DCMA INPUT M1 Range: 0 to –1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, –1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA,
MESSAGE 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
DCMA INPUT M1 MIN Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0.000
DCMA INPUT M1 MAX Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0.000
The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled.” If “Disabled”, no actual values are created for the chan-
nel. An alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the
programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as Volt, °C, MegaWatts, etc. This ID is
also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The
DCMA INPUT XX RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT XX MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT XX MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in
primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250°C; in this case the DCMA INPUT XX
MIN VALUE value is “0” and the DCMA INPUT XX MAX VALUE value is “250”. Another example would be a Watt transducer with
a span from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT XX MIN VALUE value would be “–20” and the DCMA INPUT XX MAX
VALUE value “180”. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.

5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O 5 SETTINGS
5.8.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TRANSDUCER I/O !" RTD INPUTS
# RTD INPUTS # RTD INPUT H1

# #
↓
↓
# RTD INPUT U8
MESSAGE
#
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external Resistance Temperature Detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in Chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown below for the first channel of
a type 5C transducer module installed in slot M.
5 # RTD INPUT M5
#
RTD INPUT M5
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
RTD INPUT M5 ID: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
RTD Ip 1
RTD INPUT M5 TYPE: Range: 100Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,
MESSAGE
100Ω Nickel 120Ω Nickel
The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled.” If Disabled, there will not be an actual value created for
the channel. An alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to the channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the
type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements™ feature.
In FlexElements™, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100°C. For example, a trip level of 150°C is achieved by setting
the operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement™ operands are available to FlexLogic™ for further interlocking or to operate an
output contact directly.

5 SETTINGS 5.9 TESTING
5.9TESTING 5.9.1 TEST MODE
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING ! TEST MODE
## SETTINGS TEST MODE Range: Disabled, Enabled

## TESTING FUNCTION: Disabled
TEST MODE INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
On
The relay provides test settings to verify that functionality using simulated conditions for contact inputs and outputs. The
Test Mode is indicated on the relay faceplate by a flashing Test Mode LED indicator.
To initiate the Test mode, the TEST MODE FUNCTION setting must be “Enabled” and the TEST MODE INITIATE setting must be
set to Logic 1. In particular:
• To initiate Test Mode through relay settings, set TEST MODE INITIATE to “On”. The Test Mode starts when the TEST MODE
FUNCTION setting is changed from “Disabled” to “Enabled”.
• To initiate Test Mode through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic™ operand (pushbutton, digital input,
communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FUNCTION to “Enabled” and set TEST MODE INI-
TIATE to the desired operand. The Test Mode starts when the selected operand assumes a Logic 1 state.
When in Test Mode, the C60 remains fully operational, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection
and control elements, FlexLogic™, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally.
The only difference between the normal operation and the Test Mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The
former can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational; the latter can be forced to open, close, freeze,
or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the Test Mode is programmed individu-
ally for each input and output using the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs test functions described in the fol- 5
lowing sections.
5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
# FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Ip 1: Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

# INPUTS Disabled
FORCE Cont Ip 2: Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
MESSAGE
Disabled
↓
FORCE Cont Ip xx: Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

MESSAGE
Disabled
The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode in the following ways:
• If set to “Disabled”, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can
be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the
test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.
• If set to “Open”, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
• If set to “Closed”, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
The Force Contact Inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once
enabled, the relay is placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test
Mode LED will be On, indicating that the relay is in Test Mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as “Dis-
abled”, “Open”, or “Closed”. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.

5.9 TESTING 5 SETTINGS
5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
# FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Op 1: Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

# OUTPUTS Disabled
FORCE Cont Op 2: Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
MESSAGE
Disabled
↓
FORCE Cont Op xx: Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

MESSAGE
Disabled
The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode.
If set to “Disabled”, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is Logic 1 and will
resets when its control operand is Logic 0. If set to “Energize”, the output will close and remain closed for the entire duration
of the Test Mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to “De-energize”,
the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of the status of the operand con-
figured to control the output contact. If set to “Freeze”, the output retains its position from before entering the Test Mode,
regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact.
These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Sec-
ond, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided.
Example 1: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
5 The Test Mode should be initiated from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as
“Latched” (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, Digital Input 1
should remain operational, Digital Inputs 2 and 3 should open, and Digital Input 4 should close. Also, Contact Output 1
should freeze, Contact Output 2 should open, Contact Output 3 should close, and Contact Output 4 should remain fully
operational. The required settings are shown below.
To enable User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS !"
TESTING ! TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION: “Enabled” and TEST MODE INITIATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
Make the following changes to configure the Contact I/Os. In the SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT INPUTS and
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS menus, set:
FORCE Cont Ip 1: “Disabled”, FORCE Cont Ip 2: “Open”, FORCE Cont Ip 3: “Open”, and FORCE Cont Ip 4: “Closed”
FORCE Cont Op 1: “Freeze”, FORCE Cont Op 2: “De-energized”, FORCE Cont Op 3: “Open”, and FORCE Cont Op 4: “Disabled”
Example 2: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or through Remote Input 1

The Test should be initiated locally from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or remotely through Remote Input 1. Both the
pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as “Latched”. The required settings are shown below.
Set the User Programmable Pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 ! PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to “Latched”. To enable either Pushbutton 1 or Remote
Input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS !" TESTING ! TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION: “Enabled” and TEST MODE INITIATE: “VO1”

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
## ACTUAL VALUES # CONTACT INPUTS

See page 6-3.
## STATUS #
# VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 6-3.
#
# REMOTE INPUTS
See page 6-3.
#
# CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 6-4.
#
# VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 6-4.
#
# AUTORECLOSE
See page 6-4.
#
# REMOTE DEVICES
See page 6-4.
# STATUS
# REMOTE DEVICES
See page 6-5.
# STATISTICS
# DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 6-5.
#
# SELECTOR SWITCHES
See page 6-5.
#
# FLEX STATES
See page 6-5.
#
# ETHERNET
See page 6-6.
6
#
# DIRECT INPUTS
See page 6-6.
#
# DIRECT DEVICES
See page 6-7.
# STATUS
## ACTUAL VALUES # SOURCE SRC 1

See page 6-11.
## METERING #
# SOURCE SRC 2
#
# SOURCE SRC 3
#
# SOURCE SRC 4
#
# SYNCHROCHECK
See page 6-14.
#
# TRACKING FREQUENCY
See page 6-15.
#
# FLEXELEMENTS
See page 6-15.
#

6.1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES
# SENSITIVE
See page 6-15.
# DIRECTIONAL POWER
# TRANSDUCER I/O
See page 6-16.
# DCMA INPUTS
# TRANSDUCER I/O
See page 6-16.
# RTD INPUTS
## ACTUAL VALUES # FAULT REPORTS

See page 6-17.
## RECORDS #
# EVENT RECORDS
See page 6-19.
#
# OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 6-19.
#
# DATA LOGGER
See page 6-19.
#
# MAINTENANCE
See page 6-20.
#
## ACTUAL VALUES # MODEL INFORMATION

See page 6-21.
## PRODUCT INFO #
# FIRMWARE REVISIONS
See page 6-21.
#

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS
6.2STATUS
For status reporting, ‘On’ represents Logic 1 and ‘Off’ represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS ! CONTACT INPUTS
# CONTACT INPUTS Cont Ip 1

# Off
↓
↓
Cont Ip xx
MESSAGE
Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, ‘Cont Ip 1’ refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" VIRTUAL INPUTS
# VIRTUAL INPUTS Virt Ip 1

# Off
↓
↓
Virt Ip 32
MESSAGE
Off
The present status of the 32 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual 6
input. For example, ‘Virt Ip 1’ refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the dis-
play indicates the logic state of the virtual input.
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE INPUTS
# REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 Range: On, Off

# STATUS: Off
↓
↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 Range: On, Off

MESSAGE
STATUS: Off
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.

The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be "Offline" in which
case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.

6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS
# CONTACT OUTPUTS Cont Op 1

# Off
↓
Cont Op xx
MESSAGE
Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
output. For example, ‘Cont Op 1’ refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of
the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
For Form-A outputs, the state of the voltage(V) and/or current(I) detectors will show as: Off, VOff, IOff, On,
VOn, and/or IOn. For Form-C outputs, the state will show as Off or On.
NOTE
6.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
# VIRTUAL OUTPUTS Virt Op 1

# Off
↓
Virt Op 64
MESSAGE
Off
The present state of up to 64 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, ‘Virt Op 1’ refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic™ equation for that output.
6 6.2.6 AUTORECLOSE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" AUTORECLOSE ! AUTORECLOSE 1
# AUTORECLOSE 1 AUTORECLOSE 1 Range: 0, 1, 2

# SHOT COUNT: 0
The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here.
6.2.7 REMOTE DEVICES
a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
# REMOTE DEVICES All REMOTE DEVICES Range: Yes, No

# STATUS ONLINE: No
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Range: Online, Offline
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Range: Online, Offline

MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
The present state of up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indi-
cates whether or not all programmed Remote Devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one
required Remote Device is not online.

b) STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS ! REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
# REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1

# StNum: 0
REMOTE DEVICE 1
MESSAGE
SqNum: 0
Statistical data (2 types) for up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here.

The StNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at
least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented
whenever a GOOSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4,294,967,295 is incremented.
6.2.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! DIGITAL COUNTERS !" DIGITAL COUNTERS ! DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
# DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 ACCUM:

# Counter 1 0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
MESSAGE
0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
MESSAGE
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Counter 1 MICROS:
MESSAGE
0
The present status of the 8 digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter name,
includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date/time stamp
for the frozen count. The Counter n MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6.2.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES

6
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" SELECTOR SWITCHES
# SELECTOR SWITCHES SELECTOR SWITCH 1 Range: Current Position / 7

# POSITION: 1/7
SELECTOR SWITCH 2 Range: Current Position / 7
MESSAGE
POSITION: 1/7
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the
actual value.
6.2.10 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" FLEX STATES
# FLEX STATES PARAM 1: Off Range: Off, On

# Off
↓
PARAM 256: Off Range: Off, On

MESSAGE
Off
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.

6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.11 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" ETHERNET
# ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK Range: Fail, OK

# STATUS: OK
ETHERNET SEC LINK Range: Fail, OK
MESSAGE
STATUS: OK
6.2.12 DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT INPUTS
# DIRECT INPUTS AVG MSG RETURN

# TIME CH1: 0 ms
UNRETURNED MSG
MESSAGE
COUNT CH1: 0
CRC FAIL COUNT
MESSAGE
CH1: 0
AVG MSG RETURN
MESSAGE
TIME CH2: 0 ms
UNRETURNED MSG
MESSAGE
COUNT CH2: 0
CRC FAIL COUNT
MESSAGE
CH2: 0
DIRECT INPUT 1:
MESSAGE
On
6 ↓
DIRECT INPUT 32:

MESSAGE
On
The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for Direct Output messages to return to the sender in a Direct I/O ring
configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last 10
messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules.
The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the Direct Output messages that do not
make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the
Direct Output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts may indi-
cate on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or the relay(s). The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL
COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command.
The DIRECT INPUT x values represent the state of the x-th Direct Input.

6.2.13 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
# DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1

# STATUS STATUS: Offline
DIRECT DEVICE 2
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
↓
DIRECT DEVICE 8
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
These actual values represent the state of Direct Devices 1 through 8.

6.3 METERING 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3METERING 6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING POWER AND ENERGY

The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR relays.
PER IEEE CONVENTIONS

Generator
PARAMETERS AS SEEN
G BY THE UR RELAY
Voltage +Q
VCG
WATTS = Positive IC
PF = Lead PF = Lag
VARS = Positive
PF = Lag IA
VAG -P +P
Current
IB IA
PF = Lag PF = Lead
UR RELAY
VBG -Q
M LOAD
- 1
Inductive Resistive S=VI
Generator
VCG
+Q
Voltage
PF = Lead PF = Lag
WATTS = Positive
IA
VARS = Negative IC
PF = Lead VAG -P +P
IA
Current
PF = Lag PF = Lead
IB
UR RELAY
VBG -Q
LOAD S=VI
6 Inductive
Resistive
Resistive
- 2
M LOAD
VCG +Q
Voltage
PF = Lead PF = Lag
IB
IA
WATTS = Negative
VAG
VARS = Negative -P +P
PF = Lag
IA
IC PF = Lag PF = Lead
Current
VBG
-Q
UR RELAY
G S=VI
- 3
Generator
Resistive
LOAD
VCG
+Q
Voltage IB
PF = Lead PF = Lag
WATTS = Negative IA
VARS = Positive VAG -P +P
PF = Lead
IC
IA
Current
PF = Lag PF = Lead
VBG -Q
UR RELAY
G 827239AC.CDR
S=VI
- 4
Generator
Figure 6–1: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING
b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES

All phasors calculated by UR relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that main-
tain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected
by the SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM !" FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting
defines a particular Source to be used as the reference.
The relay will first determine if any “Phase VT” bank is indicated in the Source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is
used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any “Aux VT” bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage
channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this
hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include “Phase CT” bank and “Ground CT” bank.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The
phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to
more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o
-225o -315o
positive
angle
direction
-180o 0o
UR phase angle
reference
-135o -45o
-90o 827845A1.CDR
6
Figure 6–2: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION
c) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

UR relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage, and symmetri-
cal components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase angle relations
between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument transformers.
This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common refer-
ence as described in the previous sub-section.
WYE-Connected Instrument Transformers:
• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
1 1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG ) V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3 3
1 1 2
2
V_1 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG ) V_1 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3 3
1 1 2
2
V_2 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG ) V_2 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG )
3 3
The above equations apply to currents as well.

DELTA-Connected Instrument Transformers:

• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
V_0 = N/A V_0 = N/A

1 ∠– 30 ° 1 ∠30° 2
2
V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) V_1 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3 3 3
∠ 1 ∠– 30 ° 2
1 30° 2
V_2 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA ) V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3 3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to
zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.
Table 6–1: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V * VT UR INPUTS, SEC. V SYMM. COMP, SEC. V
CONN.
VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2
13.9 76.2 79.7 84.9 138.3 85.4 WYE 13.9 76.2 79.7 19.5 56.5 23.3
∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–313° ∠–97° ∠–241° ∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–192° ∠–7° ∠–187°
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2 84.9 138.3 85.4 DELTA 84.9 138.3 85.4 N/A 56.5 23.3
can be determined) ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠–54° ∠–234°
* The power system voltages are phase-referenced – for simplicity – to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the UR displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS
!" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM !" FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
SYSTEM VOLTAGES SYMMETRICAL

COMPONENTS
UR phase angle
6
reference
1
UR phase angle
A
reference
WYE VTs
C
B
0
2
U
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
le
A U
1
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
DELTA VTs le
C
B
2
827844A1.CDR
Figure 6–3: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

6.3.2 SOURCES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING ! SOURCE SRC 1 !
Because energy values are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing CT or VT characteristics.
NOTE
# PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000

# SRC 1 b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ia:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ib:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ic:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS In:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR In:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0° 6
SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
# GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ig:

# SRC 1 0.000 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
# PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vag:

# SRC 1 0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vcg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:

MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 RMS Vab:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbc:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vca:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
# AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vx:

# SRC 1 0.000 V
6 SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
# POWER SRC 1 REAL POWER

# SRC 1 3φ: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
3φ: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 var

SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

MESSAGE
3φ: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
3φ: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φa: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φb: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φc: 1.000
# ENERGY SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR:

# SRC 1 0.000 Wh
SRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 Wh
SRC 1 POS VARHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 varh
SRC 1 NEG VARHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 varh
6
# DEMAND SRC 1 DMD IA:
# SRC 1 0.000 A
SRC 1 DMD IA MAX:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 DMD IA DATE:
MESSAGE
2001/07/31 16:30:07
SRC 1 DMD IB:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 DMD IB MAX:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 DMD IB DATE:
MESSAGE
2001/07/31 16:30:07
SRC 1 DMD IC:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 DMD IC MAX:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 DMD IC DATE:
MESSAGE
2001/07/31 16:30:07

SRC 1 DMD W:
MESSAGE
0.000 W
SRC 1 DMD W MAX:
MESSAGE
0.000 W
SRC 1 DMD W DATE:
MESSAGE
2001/07/31 16:30:07
SRC 1 DMD VAR:
MESSAGE
0.000 var
SRC 1 DMD VAR MAX:
MESSAGE
0.000 var
SRC 1 DMD VAR DATE:
MESSAGE
2001/07/31 16:30:07
SRC 1 DMD VA:
MESSAGE
0.000 VA
SRC 1 DMD VA MAX:
MESSAGE
0.000 VA
SRC 1 DMD VA DATE:
MESSAGE
2001/07/31 16:30:07
# FREQUENCY SRC 1 FREQUENCY:

# SRC 1 0.00 Hz
Four identical Source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the
user for the associated source (see SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" SIGNAL SOURCES).
The relay measures (absolute values only) SOURCE DEMAND on each phase and average three phase demand for real,
6 reactive, and apparent power. These parameters can be monitored to reduce supplier demand penalties or for statistical
metering purposes. Demand calculations are based on the measurement type selected in the SETTINGS " PRODUCT SETUP
!" DEMAND menu. For each quantity, the relay displays the demand over the most recent demand time interval, the maxi-
mum demand since the last maximum demand reset, and the time and date stamp of this maximum demand value. Maxi-
mum demand quantities can be reset to zero with the CLEAR RECORDS !" CLEAR DEMAND RECORDS command.
SOURCE FREQUENCY is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a
Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration
(see the SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The
final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and
transients.
6.3.3 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" SYNCHROCHECK ! SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
# SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA

# VOLT: 0.000 V
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA
MESSAGE
PHASE: 0.0°
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA
MESSAGE
FREQ: 0.00 Hz
The Actual Values menu for Synchrocheck 2 is identical to that of Synchrocheck 1. If a Synchrocheck function setting is set
to "Disabled", the corresponding actual values menu item will not be displayed.

6.3.4 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" TRACKING FREQUENCY
# TRACKING FREQUENCY TRACKING FREQUENCY:

# 60.00 Hz
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on configuration of the reference source. The
TRACKING FREQUENCY is based upon positive sequence current phasors from all line terminals and is synchronously
adjusted at all terminals. If currents are below 0.125 pu, then the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is used.
6.3.5 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" FLEXELEMENTS ! FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
# FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1 OpSig:

# 0.000 pu
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 6–2: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS

BREAKER ARCING AMPS BASE = 2000 kA2 × cycle
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
dcmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY
(SRC X Positive and Negative
EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
6
Watthours); (SRC X Positive and
Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SYNCHROCHECK VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and –IN inputs
(Max Delta Volts)
6.3.6 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
# SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 1

# DIRECTIONAL POWER 3Φ: 0.000 W
DIRECTIONAL POWER 2
MESSAGE
3Φ: 0.000 W
The effective operating quantities of the Sensitive Directional Power elements are displayed here. The display may be use-
ful to calibrate the feature by compensating the angular errors of the CTs and VTs with the use of the RCA and CALIBRA-
TION settings.

6.3.7 TRANSDUCER I/O
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS ! DCMA INPUT xx
# DCMA INPUT xx DCMA INPUT xx

# 0.000 mA
Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is Enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel “ID”
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS ! RTD INPUT xx
# RTD INPUT xx RTD INPUT xx

# -50 °C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is Enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel “ID”
and the bottom line as the value.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS
6.4RECORDS 6.4.1 FAULT REPORTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS ! FAULT REPORTS
NO FAULTS TO REPORT
or
# FAULT REPORT # FAULT # DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD
# 2000/08/11
FAULT # TIME: Range: HH:MM:SS.ssssss
MESSAGE
00:00:00.000000
FAULT # TYPE: where applicable
MESSAGE
ABG
FAULT # LOCATION where applicable
MESSAGE
00.0 km
FAULT # RECLOSE where applicable
MESSAGE
SHOT: 0
The latest 10 fault reports can be stored. The most recent fault location calculation (when applicable) is displayed in this
menu, along with the date and time stamp of the event which triggered the calculation. See the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT
SETUP !" FAULT REPORT menu for assigning the Source and Trigger for fault calculations. Refer to the COMMANDS !"
CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing fault reports.
Fault Type determination is required for calculation of Fault Location – the algorithm uses the angle between the negative
and positive sequence components of the relay currents. To improve accuracy and speed of operation, the fault compo-
nents of the currents are used, i.e., the pre-fault phasors are subtracted from the measured current phasors. In addition to
the angle relationships, certain extra checks are performed on magnitudes of the negative and zero sequence currents.
The single-ended fault location method assumes that the fault components of the currents supplied from the local (A) and
remote (B) systems are in phase. The figure below shows an equivalent system for fault location.
6
Local distance to fault Remote
Bus Bus
ZA IA mZ (1 – m)Z IB ZB
EA VF RF EB
VA VB
Figure 6–4: EQUIVALENT SYSTEM FOR FAULT LOCATION

The following equations hold true for this equivalent system.
VA = m ⋅ Z ⋅ IA + RF ⋅ ( IA + IB ) (EQ 6.1)
where: m = sought pu distance to fault, Z = positive sequence impedance of the line.

The currents from the local and remote systems can be parted between their fault (F) and pre-fault load (pre) components:
I A = I AF + I Apre (EQ 6.2)
and neglecting shunt parameters of the line:

I B = I BF – I Apre (EQ 6.3)

6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
Inserting Equations 6.2 and 6.3 into Equation 6.1 and solving for the fault resistance yields:
VA – m ⋅ Z ⋅ IA
R F = ----------------------------------- (EQ 6.4)
I BF
I AF ⋅  1 + ------- -
 I AF
Assuming the fault components of the currents, IAF and IBF are in phase, and observing that the fault resistance, as imped-
ance, does not have any imaginary part gives:
VA – m ⋅ Z ⋅ IA
Im  ----------------------------------- = 0 (EQ 6.5)
I AF
where: Im() represents the imaginary part of a complex number. Equation 6.5 solved for the unknown m creates the follow-
ing fault location algorithm:
Im ( V A ⋅ I AF∗ )
m = ---------------------------------------
- (EQ 6.6)
Im ( Z ⋅ I A ⋅ I AF∗ )
where: * denotes the complex conjugate and

I AF = I A – I Apre (EQ 6.7)
Depending on the fault type, appropriate voltage and current signals are selected from the phase quantities before applying
Equations 6.6 and 6.7 (the superscripts denote phases, the subscripts denote stations):
A A
• For AG faults: V A = V A , I A = I A + K 0 ⋅ I 0A
B B
• For BG faults: V A = V A , I A = I A + K 0 ⋅ I 0A
C BC
• For CG faults: V A = V A , I A = I A + K 0 ⋅ I 0A
A B A B
• For AB and ABG faults: V A = V A – V A , IA = IA – IA
B C B C
• For BC and BCG faults: V A = V A – V A , IA = IA – IA
C A C A
• For CA and CAG faults: V A = V A – V A , I A = I A – I A
where K0 is the zero sequence compensation factor (for the first six equations above)
6 • For ABC faults, all three AB, BC, and CA loops are analyzed and the final result is selected based upon consistency of
the results
The element calculates the distance to the fault (with m in miles or kilometers) and the phases involved in the fault.
SETTING
FAULT REPORT
TRIG:
Off=0
SETTING
AND RUN
FAULT REPORT
SOURCE: ACTUAL VALUES
0 FAULT REPORT #
SRC X 50DD OP
1 SEC
IA DATE
IB TIME
FAULT FAULT TYPE
IC LOCATOR
3I_0 FAULT LOCATION
VA FAULT# RECLOSE SHOT
VB
VC
SHOT # FROM
AUTO RECLOSURE
827094A1.CDR
Figure 6–5: FAULT LOCATOR SCHEME

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" EVENT RECORDS
# EVENT RECORDS EVENT: XXXX

# RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
↓
EVENT: 3 EVENT 3
MESSAGE
POWER ON DATE: 2000/07/14
EVENT: 2 EVENT 3
MESSAGE
POWER OFF TIME: 14:53:00.03405
EVENT: 1
MESSAGE Date and Time Stamps
EVENTS CLEARED
The Event Records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological
order from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new
record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated
with the event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS " CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" OSCILLOGRAPHY
# OSCILLOGRAPHY FORCE TRIGGER? Range: No, Yes

# No
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
MESSAGE
0
AVAILABLE RECORDS:
MESSAGE
0
6
CYCLES PER RECORD:
MESSAGE
0.0
LAST CLEARED DATE:
MESSAGE
2000/07/14 015:40:16
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The
‘cycles per record’ value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillogra-
phy section of Chapter 5 for further details.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting "Yes" to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS !"
CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing the oscillography records.
6.4.4 DATA LOGGER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" DATA LOGGER
# DATA LOGGER OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:

# 2000/01/14 13:45:51
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME:
MESSAGE
2000/01/14 15:21:19
The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME is the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It will be static until the log gets full,
at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate. The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME is the time the most recent sam-
ples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling rate. If Data Logger channels are defined, then both values are static.
Refer to the COMMANDS !" CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records.

6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4.5 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" MAINTENANCE ! BREAKER 1(2)
# BREAKER 1 BKR 1 ARCING AMP φA:

# 0.00 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 ARCING AMP φB:
MESSAGE
0.00 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 ARCING AMP φC:
MESSAGE
0.00 kA2-cyc
There is an identical Actual Value menu for each of the 2 Breakers. The BKR 1 ARCING AMP values are in units of kA2-
cycles. Refer to the COMMANDS !" CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" PRODUCT INFO ! MODEL INFORMATION
# MODEL INFORMATION ORDER CODE LINE 1: Example code shown

# C60-A00-HCH-F8A-H6A
ORDER CODE LINE 2:
MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 3:

MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 4:

MESSAGE
SERIAL NUMBER:
MESSAGE
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS

MESSAGE
000000000000
MANUFACTURING DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
0
OPERATING TIME:
MESSAGE
0:00:00
The product order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date/time of manufacture, and operating time are shown
here.
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" PRODUCT INFO !" FIRMWARE REVISIONS
# FIRMWARE REVISIONS C60 Breaker Relay Range: 0.00 to 655.35 6

# REVISION: 3.30 Revision number of the application firmware.
MODIFICATION FILE Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0 Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.
BOOT PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35

MESSAGE
REVISION: 1.12 Revision number of the boot program firmware.
FRONT PANEL PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35

MESSAGE
REVISION: 0.08 Revision number of faceplate program firmware.
COMPILE DATE: Range: Any valid date and time.

MESSAGE
2000/09/08 04:55:16 Date and time when product firmware was built.
BOOT DATE: Range: Any valid date and time.

MESSAGE
2000/05/11 16:41:32 Date and time when the boot program was built.
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed.

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS
"
## COMMANDS
MESSAGE
## VIRTUAL INPUTS
## COMMANDS
MESSAGE
## CLEAR RECORDS
## COMMANDS
MESSAGE
## SET DATE AND TIME
## COMMANDS
MESSAGE
## RELAY MAINTENANCE
The Commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the Command Password; see the Password Security section of Chapter 5. The following flash
message appears after successfully command entry:
COMMAND
EXECUTED
PATH: COMMANDS " COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
## COMMANDS Virt Ip 1 Range: Off, On

## VIRTUAL INPUTS Off
↓
↓
Virt Ip 32 Range: Off, On

MESSAGE
Off 7
The states of up to 32 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a logical state ‘Off’ (0) or ‘On’ (1).
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
PATH: COMMANDS " COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
## COMMANDS CLEAR FAULT REPORTS? Range: No, Yes

## CLEAR RECORDS No
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR DATA LOGGER? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR BREAKER 1 Range: No, Yes
ARCING AMPS? No

7.1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
CLEAR BREAKER 2 Range: No, Yes

ARCING AMPS? No
CLEAR DEMAND Range: No, Yes
RECORDS?: No
CLEAR ENERGY? Range: No, Yes
No
RESET UNAUTHORIZED Range: No, Yes
ACCESS: No
CLEAR DIRECT I/O Range: No, Yes
COUNTERS: No Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
CLEAR ALL RELAY Range: No, Yes

RECORDS: No
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the Event Records. Data is cleard by changing a com-
mand setting to "Yes" and pressing the key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to "No".
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS " SET DATE AND TIME
## COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME: (YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)

## SET DATE AND TIME 2000/01/14 13:47:03
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B signal is not in use. The time setting is
based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The
new time will take effect at the moment the key is clicked.
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS " RELAY MAINTENANCE
## COMMANDS PERFORM LAMPTEST? Range: No, Yes

## RELAY MAINTENANCE No
UPDATE ORDER CODE? Range: No, Yes
7 No
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands are activated by changing a command setting
to “Yes” and pressing the key. The command setting will then automatically revert to “No”.
The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE
ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to
match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown.
UPDATING...
PLEASE WAIT
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER
CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown.

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2 TARGETS
7.2TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS
"
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
MESSAGE Example shown.
LATCHED
DIGITAL ELEMENT 16: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
MESSAGE Example shown.
LATCHED
MESSAGE
↓
↓
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the Targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read No
Active Targets:
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES
When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that mes-
sage. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer
times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the tar-
get message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a tar-
get message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.
Table 7–1: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS

PRIORITY ACTIVE STATUS DESCRIPTION
1 OP element operated and still picked up
2 PKP element picked up and timed out
3 LATCHED element had operated but has dropped out
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed. 7
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS
The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and
minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a
target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the
RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.
Major self-test errors also result in the following:
• the critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized
• all other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation
• the faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off
• a RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded
Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-Programmable Self-Tests section in
Chapter 5 for additional details.

7.2 TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
Table 7–2: MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

SELF-TEST ERROR LATCHED DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE WHAT TO DO
MESSAGE TARGET TEST IS PERFORMED
MESSAGE?
DSP ERRORS: Yes CT/VT module with digital signal Every 1/8th of a cycle. Cycle the control power (if the problem
A/D Calibration, A/D processor may have a problem. recurs, contact the factory).
Interrupt, A/D Reset, Inter
DSP Rx, Sample Int, Rx
Interrupt, Tx Interrupt, Rx
Sample Index, Invalid
Settings, Rx Checksum
DSP ERROR: Yes One or more DSP modules in a Rev. C DSP needs to be replaced Contact the factory
INVALID REVISION multiple DSP unit has Rev. C with a Rev. D DSP.
hardware
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH No Configuration of modules does not On power up; thereafter, the Check all modules against the order
with 2nd-line detail match the order code stored in the backplane is checked for missing code, ensure they are inserted
message CPU. cards every 5 seconds. properly, and cycle control power (if
problem persists, contact factory).
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN No FlexLogic™ equations do not Event driven; whenever Flex- Finish all equation editing and use self
with 2nd-line detail compile properly. Logic™ equations are modified. test to debug any errors.
message
LATCHING OUTPUT No Discrepancy in the position of a Every 1/8th of a cycle. Latching output module failed. Replace
ERROR latching contact between relay the Module.
firmware and hardware has been
detected.
PROGRAM MEMORY Yes Error was found while checking Once flash is uploaded with new Contact the factory.
Test Failed Flash memory. firmware.
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED No Settings indicate the unit is not On power up. Contact the factory.
calibrated.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED No PRODUCT SETUP !" On power up and whenever the Program all settings (especially those
INSTALLATION setting indicates RELAY PROGRAMMED setting is under PRODUCT SETUP !"
relay is not in a programmed state. altered. INSTALLATION).
Table 7–3: MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

SELF-TEST ERROR LATCHED DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE WHAT TO DO
MESSAGE TARGET TEST IS PERFORMED
MESSAGE
BATTERY FAIL Yes Battery is not functioning. Monitored every 5 seconds. Reported Replace the battery.
after 1 minute if problem persists.
DIRECT RING BREAK No Direct I/O settings configured for Every second. Check Direct I/O configuration and/or
a ring, but the connection is not in wiring.
a ring.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF No Direct Device is configured but not Every second. Check Direct I/O configuration and/or
connected wiring.
EEPROM DATA Yes The non-volatile memory has On power up only. Contact the factory.
ERROR been corrupted.
IRIG-B FAILURE No Bad IRIG-B input signal. Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal Ensure IRIG-B cable is connected,
7 is received. check cable functionality (i.e. look for

physical damage or perform continuity
test), ensure IRIG-B receiver is
functioning, and check input signal level
(it may be less than specification). If
none of these apply, contact the factory.
LATCHING OUT Yes Latching output failure. Event driven. Contact the factory.
ERROR
LOW ON MEMORY Yes Memory is close to 100% capacity Monitored every 5 seconds. Contact the factory.
PRI ETHERNET FAIL Yes Primary Ethernet connection Monitored every 2 seconds Check connections.
failed
PROTOTYPE Yes A prototype version of the On power up only. Contact the factory.
FIRMWARE firmware is loaded.
REMOTE DEVICE OFF No One or more GOOSE devices are Event driven. Occurs when a device Check GOOSE setup
not responding programmed to receive GOOSE
messages stops receiving. Every 1 to
60 s., depending on GOOSE packets.
SEC ETHERNET FAIL Yes Sec. Ethernet connection failed Monitored every 2 seconds Check connections.
SNTP FAILURE No SNTP server not responding. 10 to 60 seconds. Check SNTP configuration and/or
network connections.
SYSTEM EXCEPTION Yes Abnormal restart from modules Event driven. Contact the factory.
being removed/inserted when
powered-up, abnormal DC supply,
or internal relay failure.
WATCHDOG ERROR No Some tasks are behind schedule Event driven. Contact the factory.

Appendices
APPENDIX A A.1 PARAMETER LIST
APPENDIX A FlexAnalog ParametersA.1PARAMETER LIST

Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 1 of 7) Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 2 of 7) A
SETTING DISPLAY TEXT DESCRIPTION SETTING DISPLAY TEXT DESCRIPTION
0 Off Placeholder for unused settings 6274 SRC 3 Ib RMS SRC 3 Phase B Current RMS (A)
5760 Sns Dir Power 1 Sens Dir Power 1 Actual (W) 6276 SRC 3 Ic RMS SRC 3 Phase C Current RMS (A)
5762 Sns Dir Power 2 Sens Dir Power 2 Actual (W) 6278 SRC 3 In RMS SRC 3 Neutral Current RMS (A)
6144 SRC 1 Ia RMS SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS (A) 6280 SRC 3 Ia Mag SRC 3 Phase A Current Magnitude (A)
6146 SRC 1 Ib RMS SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS (A) 6282 SRC 3 Ia Angle SRC 3 Phase A Current Angle (°)
6148 SRC 1 Ic RMS SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS (A) 6283 SRC 3 Ib Mag SRC 3 Phase B Current Magnitude (A)
6150 SRC 1 In RMS SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS (A) 6285 SRC 3 Ib Angle SRC 3 Phase B Current Angle (°)
6152 SRC 1 Ia Mag SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude (A) 6286 SRC 3 Ic Mag SRC 3 Phase C Current Magnitude (A)
6154 SRC 1 Ia Angle SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle (°) 6288 SRC 3 Ic Angle SRC 3 Phase C Current Angle (°)
6155 SRC 1 Ib Mag SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude (A) 6289 SRC 3 In Mag SRC 3 Neutral Current Magnitude (A)
6157 SRC 1 Ib Angle SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle (°) 6291 SRC 3 In Angle SRC 3 Neutral Current Angle (°)
6158 SRC 1 Ic Mag SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude (A) 6292 SRC 3 Ig RMS SRC 3 Ground Current RMS (A)
6160 SRC 1 Ic Angle SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle (°) 6294 SRC 3 Ig Mag SRC 3 Ground Current Magnitude (A)
6161 SRC 1 In Mag SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude (A) 6296 SRC 3 Ig Angle SRC 3 Ground Current Angle (°)
6163 SRC 1 In Angle SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle (°) 6297 SRC 3 I_0 Mag SRC 3 Zero Seq Current Magnitude (A)
6164 SRC 1 Ig RMS SRC 1 Ground Current RMS (A) 6299 SRC 3 I_0 Angle SRC 3 Zero Sequence Current Angle (°)
6166 SRC 1 Ig Mag SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude (A) 6300 SRC 3 I_1 Mag SRC 3 Pos Seq Current Magnitude (A)
6168 SRC 1 Ig Angle SRC 1 Ground Current Angle (°) 6302 SRC 3 I_1 Angle SRC 3 Positive Seq Current Angle (°)
6169 SRC 1 I_0 Mag SRC 1 Zero Seq Current Magnitude (A) 6303 SRC 3 I_2 Mag SRC 3 Neg Seq Current Magnitude (A)
6171 SRC 1 I_0 Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle (°) 6305 SRC 3 I_2 Angle SRC 3 Negative Seq Current Angle (°)
6172 SRC 1 I_1 Mag SRC 1 Pos Seq Current Magnitude (A) 6306 SRC 3 Igd Mag SRC 3 Diff Gnd Current Magnitude (A)
6174 SRC 1 I_1 Angle SRC 1 Positive Seq Current Angle (°) 6308 SRC 3 Igd Angle SRC 3 Differential Gnd Current Angle (°)
6175 SRC 1 I_2 Mag SRC 1 Neg Seq Current Magnitude (A) 6336 SRC 4 Ia RMS SRC 4 Phase A Current RMS (A)
6177 SRC 1 I_2 Angle SRC 1 Negative Seq Current Angle (°) 6338 SRC 4 Ib RMS SRC 4 Phase B Current RMS (A)
6178 SRC 1 Igd Mag SRC 1 Diff Gnd Current Magnitude (A) 6340 SRC 4 Ic RMS SRC 4 Phase C Current RMS (A)
6180 SRC 1 Igd Angle SRC 1 Differential Gnd Current Angle (°) 6342 SRC 4 In RMS SRC 4 Neutral Current RMS (A)
6208 SRC 2 Ia RMS SRC 2 Phase A Current RMS (A) 6344 SRC 4 Ia Mag SRC 4 Phase A Current Magnitude (A)
6210 SRC 2 Ib RMS SRC 2 Phase B Current RMS (A) 6346 SRC 4 Ia Angle SRC 4 Phase A Current Angle (°)
6212 SRC 2 Ic RMS SRC 2 Phase C Current RMS (A) 6347 SRC 4 Ib Mag SRC 4 Phase B Current Magnitude (A)
6214 SRC 2 In RMS SRC 2 Neutral Current RMS (A) 6349 SRC 4 Ib Angle SRC 4 Phase B Current Angle (°)
6216 SRC 2 Ia Mag SRC 2 Phase A Current Magnitude (A) 6350 SRC 4 Ic Mag SRC 4 Phase C Current Magnitude (A)
6218 SRC 2 Ia Angle SRC 2 Phase A Current Angle (°) 6352 SRC 4 Ic Angle SRC 4 Phase C Current Angle (°)
6219 SRC 2 Ib Mag SRC 2 Phase B Current Magnitude (A) 6353 SRC 4 In Mag SRC 4 Neutral Current Magnitude (A)
6221 SRC 2 Ib Angle SRC 2 Phase B Current Angle (°) 6355 SRC 4 In Angle SRC 4 Neutral Current Angle (°)
6222 SRC 2 Ic Mag SRC 2 Phase C Current Magnitude (A) 6356 SRC 4 Ig RMS SRC 4 Ground Current RMS (A)
6224 SRC 2 Ic Angle SRC 2 Phase C Current Angle (°) 6358 SRC 4 Ig Mag SRC 4 Ground Current Magnitude (A)
6225 SRC 2 In Mag SRC 2 Neutral Current Magnitude (A) 6360 SRC 4 Ig Angle SRC 4 Ground Current Angle (°)
6227 SRC 2 In Angle SRC 2 Neutral Current Angle (°) 6361 SRC 4 I_0 Mag SRC 4 Zero Seq Current Magnitude (A)
6228 SRC 2 Ig RMS SRC 2 Ground Current RMS (A) 6363 SRC 4 I_0 Angle SRC 4 Zero Sequence Current Angle (°)
6230 SRC 2 Ig Mag SRC 2 Ground Current Magnitude (A) 6364 SRC 4 I_1 Mag SRC 4 Pos Seq Current Magnitude (A)
6232 SRC 2 Ig Angle SRC 2 Ground Current Angle (°) 6366 SRC 4 I_1 Angle SRC 4 Positive Seq Current Angle (°)
6233 SRC 2 I_0 Mag SRC 2 Zero Seq Current Magnitude (A) 6367 SRC 4 I_2 Mag SRC 4 Neg Seq Current Magnitude (A)
6235 SRC 2 I_0 Angle SRC 2 Zero Sequence Current Angle (°) 6369 SRC 4 I_2 Angle SRC 4 Negative Seq Current Angle (°)
6236 SRC 2 I_1 Mag SRC 2 Pos Seq Current Magnitude (A) 6370 SRC 4 Igd Mag SRC 4 Diff Gnd Current Magnitude (A)
6238 SRC 2 I_1 Angle SRC 2 Positive Seq Current Angle (°) 6372 SRC 4 Igd Angle SRC 4 Differential Gnd Current Angle (°)
6239 SRC 2 I_2 Mag SRC 2 Neg Seq Current Magnitude (A) 6656 SRC 1 Vag RMS SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS (V)
6241 SRC 2 I_2 Angle SRC 2 Negative Seq Current Angle (°) 6658 SRC 1 Vbg RMS SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS (V)
6242 SRC 2 Igd Mag SRC 2 Diff Gnd Current Magnitude (A) 6660 SRC 1 Vcg RMS SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS (V)
6244 SRC 2 Igd Angle SRC 2 Diff Gnd Current Angle (°) 6662 SRC 1 Vag Mag SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6272 SRC 3 Ia RMS SRC 3 Phase A Current RMS (A) 6664 SRC 1 Vag Angle SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle (°)
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay A-1

A.1 PARAMETER LIST APPENDIX A
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 3 of 7) Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 4 of 7)
A SETTING DISPLAY TEXT

6665 SRC 1 Vbg Mag
DESCRIPTION
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude (V)
SETTING DISPLAY TEXT
6790 SRC 3 Vag Mag
DESCRIPTION
SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6667 SRC 1 Vbg Angle SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle (°) 6792 SRC 3 Vag Angle SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage Angle (°)
6668 SRC 1 Vcg Mag SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude (V) 6793 SRC 3 Vbg Mag SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6670 SRC 1 Vcg Angle SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle (°) 6795 SRC 3 Vbg Angle SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage Angle (°)
6671 SRC 1 Vab RMS SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS (V) 6796 SRC 3 Vcg Mag SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6673 SRC 1 Vbc RMS SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS (V) 6798 SRC 3 Vcg Angle SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage Angle (°)
6675 SRC 1 Vca RMS SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS (V) 6799 SRC 3 Vab RMS SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage RMS (V)
6677 SRC 1 Vab Mag SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude (V) 6801 SRC 3 Vbc RMS SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage RMS (V)
6679 SRC 1 Vab Angle SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle (°) 6803 SRC 3 Vca RMS SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage RMS (V)
6680 SRC 1 Vbc Mag SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude (V) 6805 SRC 3 Vab Mag SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude (V)
6682 SRC 1 Vbc Angle SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle (°) 6807 SRC 3 Vab Angle SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage Angle (°)
6683 SRC 1 Vca Mag SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude (V) 6808 SRC 3 Vbc Mag SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude (V)
6685 SRC 1 Vca Angle SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle (°) 6810 SRC 3 Vbc Angle SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage Angle (°)
6686 SRC 1 Vx RMS SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS (V) 6811 SRC 3 Vca Mag SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude (V)
6688 SRC 1 Vx Mag SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude (V) 6813 SRC 3 Vca Angle SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage Angle (°)
6690 SRC 1 Vx Angle SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle (°) 6814 SRC 3 Vx RMS SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage RMS (V)
6691 SRC 1 V_0 Mag SRC 1 Zero Seq Voltage Magnitude (V) 6816 SRC 3 Vx Mag SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude (V)
6693 SRC 1 V_0 Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle (°) 6818 SRC 3 Vx Angle SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage Angle (°)
6694 SRC 1 V_1 Mag SRC 1 Pos Seq Voltage Magnitude (V) 6819 SRC 3 V_0 Mag SRC 3 Zero Seq Voltage Magnitude (V)
6696 SRC 1 V_1 Angle SRC 1 Positive Seq Voltage Angle (°) 6821 SRC 3 V_0 Angle SRC 3 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle (°)
6697 SRC 1 V_2 Mag SRC 1 Neg Seq Voltage Magnitude (V) 6822 SRC 3 V_1 Mag SRC 3 Pos Seq Voltage Magnitude (V)
6699 SRC 1 V_2 Angle SRC 1 Negative Seq Voltage Angle (°) 6824 SRC 3 V_1 Angle SRC 3 Positive Seq Voltage Angle (°)
6720 SRC 2 Vag RMS SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage RMS (V) 6825 SRC 3 V_2 Mag SRC 3 Neg Seq Voltage Magnitude (V)
6722 SRC 2 Vbg RMS SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage RMS (V) 6827 SRC 3 V_2 Angle SRC 3 Negative Seq Voltage Angle (°)
6724 SRC 2 Vcg RMS SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage RMS (V) 6848 SRC 4 Vag RMS SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage RMS (V)
6726 SRC 2 Vag Mag SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude (V) 6850 SRC 4 Vbg RMS SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage RMS (V)
6728 SRC 2 Vag Angle SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Angle (°) 6852 SRC 4 Vcg RMS SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage RMS (V)
6729 SRC 2 Vbg Mag SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude (V) 6854 SRC 4 Vag Mag SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6731 SRC 2 Vbg Angle SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Angle (°) 6856 SRC 4 Vag Angle SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage Angle (°)
6732 SRC 2 Vcg Mag SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude (V) 6857 SRC 4 Vbg Mag SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6734 SRC 2 Vcg Angle SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Angle (°) 6859 SRC 4 Vbg Angle SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage Angle (°)
6735 SRC 2 Vab RMS SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage RMS (V) 6860 SRC 4 Vcg Mag SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6737 SRC 2 Vbc RMS SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage RMS (V) 6862 SRC 4 Vcg Angle SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage Angle (°)
6739 SRC 2 Vca RMS SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage RMS (V) 6863 SRC 4 Vab RMS SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage RMS (V)
6741 SRC 2 Vab Mag SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude (V) 6865 SRC 4 Vbc RMS SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage RMS (V)
6743 SRC 2 Vab Angle SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Angle (°) 6867 SRC 4 Vca RMS SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage RMS (V)
6744 SRC 2 Vbc Mag SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude (V) 6869 SRC 4 Vab Mag SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude (V)
6746 SRC 2 Vbc Angle SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Angle (°) 6871 SRC 4 Vab Angle SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage Angle (°)
6747 SRC 2 Vca Mag SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude (V) 6872 SRC 4 Vbc Mag SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude (V)
6749 SRC 2 Vca Angle SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Angle (°) 6874 SRC 4 Vbc Angle SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage Angle (°)
6750 SRC 2 Vx RMS SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage RMS (V) 6875 SRC 4 Vca Mag SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude (V)
6752 SRC 2 Vx Mag SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude (V) 6877 SRC 4 Vca Angle SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage Angle (°)
6754 SRC 2 Vx Angle SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Angle (°) 6878 SRC 4 Vx RMS SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage RMS (V)
6755 SRC 2 V_0 Mag SRC 2 Zero Seq Voltage Magnitude (V) 6880 SRC 4 Vx Mag SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude (V)
6757 SRC 2 V_0 Angle SRC 2 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle (°) 6882 SRC 4 Vx Angle SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage Angle (°)
6758 SRC 2 V_1 Mag SRC 2 Pos Seq Voltage Magnitude (V) 6883 SRC 4 V_0 Mag SRC 4 Zero Seq Voltage Magnitude (V)
6760 SRC 2 V_1 Angle SRC 2 Positive Seq Voltage Angle (°) 6885 SRC 4 V_0 Angle SRC 4 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle (°)
6761 SRC 2 V_2 Mag SRC 2 Neg Seq Voltage Magnitude (V) 6886 SRC 4 V_1 Mag SRC 4 Pos Seq Voltage Magnitude (V)
6763 SRC 2 V_2 Angle SRC 2 Negative Seq Voltage Angle (°) 6888 SRC 4 V_1 Angle SRC 4 Positive Seq Voltage Angle (°)
6784 SRC 3 Vag RMS SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage RMS (V) 6889 SRC 4 V_2 Mag SRC 4 Neg Seq Voltage Magnitude (V)
6786 SRC 3 Vbg RMS SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage RMS (V) 6891 SRC 4 V_2 Angle SRC 4 Negative Seq Voltage Angle (°)
6788 SRC 3 Vcg RMS SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage RMS (V) 7168 SRC 1 P SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power (W)
A-2 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

APPENDIX A A.1 PARAMETER LIST
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 5 of 7) Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 6 of 7)
7170 SRC 1 Pa
DESCRIPTION
SRC 1 Phase A Real Power (W)
7274 SRC 4 Qa
DESCRIPTION
SRC 4 Phase A Reactive Power (var)
A
7172 SRC 1 Pb SRC 1 Phase B Real Power (W) 7276 SRC 4 Qb SRC 4 Phase B Reactive Power (var)
7174 SRC 1 Pc SRC 1 Phase C Real Power (W) 7278 SRC 4 Qc SRC 4 Phase C Reactive Power (var)
7176 SRC 1 Q SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power (var) 7280 SRC 4 S SRC 4 Three Phase Apparent Power (VA)
7178 SRC 1 Qa SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power (var) 7282 SRC 4 Sa SRC 4 Phase A Apparent Power (VA)
7180 SRC 1 Qb SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power (var) 7284 SRC 4 Sb SRC 4 Phase B Apparent Power (VA)
7182 SRC 1 Qc SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power (var) 7286 SRC 4 Sc SRC 4 Phase C Apparent Power (VA)
7184 SRC 1 S SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power (VA) 7288 SRC 4 PF SRC 4 Three Phase Power Factor
7186 SRC 1 Sa SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power (VA) 7289 SRC 4 Phase A PF SRC 4 Phase A Power Factor
7188 SRC 1 Sb SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power (VA) 7290 SRC 4 Phase B PF SRC 4 Phase B Power Factor
7190 SRC 1 Sc SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power (VA) 7291 SRC 4 Phase C PF SRC 4 Phase C Power Factor
7192 SRC 1 PF SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor 7424 SRC 1 Pos SRC 1 Positive Watthour (Wh)
Watthour
7193 SRC 1 Phase A PF SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor
7426 SRC 1 Neg SRC 1 Negative Watthour (Wh)
7194 SRC 1 Phase B PF SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor Watthour
7195 SRC 1 Phase C PF SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor 7428 SRC 1 Pos varh SRC 1 Positive Varhour (varh)
7200 SRC 2 P SRC 2 Three Phase Real Power (W) 7430 SRC 1 Neg varh SRC 1 Negative Varhour (varh)
7202 SRC 2 Pa SRC 2 Phase A Real Power (W) 7440 SRC 2 Pos SRC 2 Positive Watthour (Wh)
7204 SRC 2 Pb SRC 2 Phase B Real Power (W) Watthour
7206 SRC 2 Pc SRC 2 Phase C Real Power (W) 7442 SRC 2 Neg SRC 2 Negative Watthour (Wh)
Watthour
7208 SRC 2 Q SRC 2 Three Phase Reactive Power (var)
7444 SRC 2 Pos varh SRC 2 Positive Varhour (varh)
7210 SRC 2 Qa SRC 2 Phase A Reactive Power (var)
7446 SRC 2 Neg varh SRC 2 Negative Varhour (varh)
7212 SRC 2 Qb SRC 2 Phase B Reactive Power (var)
7456 SRC 3 Pos SRC 3 Positive Watthour (Wh)
7214 SRC 2 Qc SRC 2 Phase C Reactive Power (var) Watthour
7216 SRC 2 S SRC 2 Three Phase Apparent Power (VA) 7458 SRC 3 Neg SRC 3 Negative Watthour (Wh)
Watthour
7218 SRC 2 Sa SRC 2 Phase A Apparent Power (VA)
7220 SRC 2 Sb SRC 2 Phase B Apparent Power (VA)
7222 SRC 2 Sc SRC 2 Phase C Apparent Power (VA)
7472 SRC 4 Pos SRC 4 Positive Watthour (Wh)
7224 SRC 2 PF SRC 2 Three Phase Power Factor Watthour
7225 SRC 2 Phase A PF SRC 2 Phase A Power Factor 7474 SRC 4 Neg SRC 4 Negative Watthour (Wh)
Watthour
7226 SRC 2 Phase B PF SRC 2 Phase B Power Factor
7227 SRC 2 Phase C PF SRC 2 Phase C Power Factor
7232 SRC 3 P SRC 3 Three Phase Real Power (W)
7552 SRC 1 Frequency SRC 1 Frequency (Hz)
7234 SRC 3 Pa SRC 3 Phase A Real Power (W)
7236 SRC 3 Pb SRC 3 Phase B Real Power (W)
7238 SRC 3 Pc SRC 3 Phase C Real Power (W)
7240 SRC 3 Q SRC 3 Three Phase Reactive Power (var)
7680 SRC 1 Demand Ia SRC 1 Demand Ia (A)
7242 SRC 3 Qa SRC 3 Phase A Reactive Power (var)
7682 SRC 1 Demand Ib SRC 1 Demand Ib (A)
7244 SRC 3 Qb SRC 3 Phase B Reactive Power (var)
7684 SRC 1 Demand Ic SRC 1 Demand Ic (A)
7246 SRC 3 Qc SRC 3 Phase C Reactive Power (var)
7686 SRC 1 Demand SRC 1 Demand Watt (W)
7248 SRC 3 S SRC 3 Three Phase Apparent Power (VA) Watt
7250 SRC 3 Sa SRC 3 Phase A Apparent Power (VA) 7688 SRC 1 Demand var SRC 1 Demand Var (var)
7252 SRC 3 Sb SRC 3 Phase B Apparent Power (VA) 7690 SRC 1 Demand Va SRC 1 Demand Va (VA)
7254 SRC 3 Sc SRC 3 Phase C Apparent Power (VA) 7696 SRC 2 Demand Ia SRC 2 Demand Ia (A)
7256 SRC 3 PF SRC 3 Three Phase Power Factor 7698 SRC 2 Demand Ib SRC 2 Demand Ib (A)
7257 SRC 3 Phase A PF SRC 3 Phase A Power Factor 7700 SRC 2 Demand Ic SRC 2 Demand Ic (A)
7258 SRC 3 Phase B PF SRC 3 Phase B Power Factor 7702 SRC 2 Demand SRC 2 Demand Watt (W)
7259 SRC 3 Phase C PF SRC 3 Phase C Power Factor Watt
7264 SRC 4 P SRC 4 Three Phase Real Power (W) 7704 SRC 2 Demand var SRC 2 Demand Var (var)
7266 SRC 4 Pa SRC 4 Phase A Real Power (W) 7706 SRC 2 Demand Va SRC 2 Demand Va (VA)
7268 SRC 4 Pb SRC 4 Phase B Real Power (W) 7712 SRC 3 Demand Ia SRC 3 Demand Ia (A)
7270 SRC 4 Pc SRC 4 Phase C Real Power (W) 7714 SRC 3 Demand Ib SRC 3 Demand Ib (A)
7272 SRC 4 Q SRC 4 Three Phase Reactive Power (var) 7716 SRC 3 Demand Ic SRC 3 Demand Ic (A)
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay A-3

A.1 PARAMETER LIST APPENDIX A
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 7 of 7)
A SETTING DISPLAY TEXT

7718 SRC 3 Demand
DESCRIPTION
SRC 3 Demand Watt (W)
Watt
7720 SRC 3 Demand var SRC 3 Demand Var (var)
7722 SRC 3 Demand Va SRC 3 Demand Va (VA)
7728 SRC 4 Demand Ia SRC 4 Demand Ia (A)
7730 SRC 4 Demand Ib SRC 4 Demand Ib (A)
7732 SRC 4 Demand Ic SRC 4 Demand Ic (A)
7734 SRC 4 Demand SRC 4 Demand Watt (W)
Watt
7736 SRC 4 Demand var SRC 4 Demand Var (var)
7738 SRC 4 Demand Va SRC 4 Demand Va (VA)
8704 Brk 1 Arc Amp A Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase A (kA2-cyc)
8706 Brk 1 Arc Amp B Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase B (kA2-cyc)
8708 Brk 1 Arc Amp C Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase C (kA2-cyc)
8710 Brk 2 Arc Amp A Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase A (kA2-cyc)
8712 Brk 2 Arc Amp B Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase B (kA2-cyc)
8714 Brk 2 Arc Amp C Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase C (kA2-cyc)
9216 Synchchk 1 Delta V Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage (V)
9218 Synchchk 1 Delta F Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency (Hz)
9219 Synchchk 1 Delta Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase (°)
Phs
9220 Synchchk 2 Delta V Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage (V)
9222 Synchchk 2 Delta F Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency (Hz)
9223 Synchchk 2 Delta Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase (°)
Phs
32768 Tracking Frequency Tracking Frequency (Hz)
39425 FlexElement 1 FlexElement 1 Actual
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
40960 Communications Communications Group
Group
40971 Active Setting Current Setting Group
Group
A-4 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal
computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most
basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Mod-
bus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master com-
munication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that:
• The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to B
requests issued by a master computer.
• For Modbus®, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitor-
ing, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands.
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER
The Modbus® RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hard-
ware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear ter-
minal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10BaseT, or 10BaseF. Data flow is half-duplex in
all configurations. See Chapter 3 for details on wiring.
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity
bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit
data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300).
The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are avail-
able. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for further details.
The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will
not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relay’s slave address (unless the
address is the broadcast address – see below).
A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will
accept any address when the Modbus® RTU protocol is used.
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER
Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a
packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by ‘dead-time’ on the communica-
tions line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet format-
ting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code.
Table B–1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT

DESCRIPTION SIZE
SLAVE ADDRESS 1 byte
FUNCTION CODE 1 byte
DATA N bytes
CRC 2 bytes
DEAD TIME 3.5 bytes transmission time
• SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master
and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent
bus contention. All of the relay’s ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see Chapter 5 for
details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an
exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.
A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link
take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated
with Function Code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay B-1

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL APPENDIX B
• FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to per-
form. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indi-
cated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section
for further details.
• DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, set-
tings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.
• CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus® includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check
B (CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device
receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet
thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the CRC.
• DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms
at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 µs at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps
between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves
start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one contin-
uous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The
resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no trans-
mission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most sig-
nificant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder.
A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.
Table B–2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM

SYMBOLS: --> data transfer
A 16 bit working register
Alow low order byte of A
Ahigh high order byte of A
CRC 16 bit CRC-16 result
i,j loop counters
(+) logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator
N total number of data bytes
Di i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed
shr (x) right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits
are shifted right one location)
ALGORITHM: 1. FFFF (hex) --> A

2. 0 --> i
3. 0 --> j
4. Di (+) Alow --> Alow
5. j + 1 --> j
6. shr (A)
7. Is there a carry? No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.
8. Is j = 8? No: go to 5; Yes: continue
9. i + 1 --> i
10. Is i = N? No: go to 3; Yes: continue
11. A --> CRC
B-2 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2FUNCTION CODES B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus® officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports
some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE MODBUS DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION

HEX DEC
03 3 Read Holding Registers Read Actual Values or Settings
B
04 4 Read Holding Registers Read Actual Values or Settings
05 5 Force Single Coil Execute Operation
06 6 Preset Single Register Store Single Setting
10 16 Preset Multiple Registers Store Multiple Settings
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H)
This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay.
Data registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers
that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus Memory Map table for exact details on the data registers.
Since some PLC implementations of Modbus® only support one of function codes 03h and 04h, the relay interpretation
allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will
determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting 3
register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40,
300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively.
Table B–3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE

MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11
FUNCTION CODE 04 FUNCTION CODE 04
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40 BYTE COUNT 06
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 50 DATA #1 - high 00
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high 00 DATA #1 - low 28
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low 03 DATA #2 - high 01
CRC - low A7 DATA #2 - low 2C
CRC - high 4A DATA #3 - high 00
DATA #3 - low 00
CRC - low 0D
CRC - high 60

B.2 FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX B
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Sum-
mary of Operation Codes table below.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the
slave device 11H (17 dec) to perform a reset. The high and low Code Value bytes always have the values “FF” and “00”
respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus® definition of this function code.
B
OPERATION CODE - high 00 OPERATION CODE - high 00
OPERATION CODE - low 01 OPERATION CODE - low 01
CODE VALUE - high FF CODE VALUE - high FF
CODE VALUE - low 00 CODE VALUE - low 00
CRC - low DF CRC - low DF
CRC - high 6A CRC - high 6A
Table B–5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H

OPERATION DEFINITION DESCRIPTION
CODE (HEX)
0000 NO OPERATION Does not do anything.
0001 RESET Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key.
0005 CLEAR EVENT RECORDS Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
command.
0006 CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY Clears all oscillography records.
1000 to 101F VIRTUAL IN 1-32 ON/OFF Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 32 either “ON” or “OFF”.
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are
always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and
slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device
11h (17 dec).

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 51
DATA - high 00 DATA - high 00
DATA - low C8 DATA - low C8
CRC - low CE CRC - low CE
CRC - high DD CRC - high DD

APPENDIX B B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting
registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be
stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows
a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to
slave device 11h (17 decimal).
B
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXMAPLE (HEX)
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02
BYTE COUNT 04 CRC - lo 07
DATA #1 - high order byte 00 CRC - hi 64
DATA #1 - low order byte C8
DATA #2 - high order byte 00
DATA #2 - low order byte 01
CRC - low order byte 12
CRC - high order byte 62
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception
response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order
bit of the function code set to 1.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the
unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11.

FUNCTION CODE 39 FUNCTION CODE B9
CRC - low order byte CD ERROR CODE 01
CRC - high order byte F2 CRC - low order byte 93
CRC - high order byte 95

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS APPENDIX B
B.3FILE TRANSFERS B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS
a) DESCRIPTION
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of
files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)"
and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from
the UR relay, use the following steps:
B 1. Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter
than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case
sensitive.
2. Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is
not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The
"position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have
read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244.
3. Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indi-
cates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size.
4. If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is
only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the pre-
vious operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous
block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus
connections.
b) OTHER PROTOCOLS
All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for
example, TFTP or MMS).
c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES

Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 Sep-
tember 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format.
d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES

Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography sec-
tion in Chapter 5 for additional details.
The Oscillography Number of Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (cap-
tured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file
is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the
Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by
periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available.
The Oscillography Number of Records register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data
per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography Available Records register specifies the actual num-
ber of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.
Writing “Yes” (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography Clear Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscil-
lography Number of Triggers and Oscillography Available Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography Last
Cleared Date to the present date and time.
To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames:
OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT
Replace “nnn” with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names
OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT

APPENDIX B B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
e) READING DATA LOGGER FILES

Familiarity with the data logger feature is required to understand this description. Refer to the Data Logger section of Chap-
ter 5 for details. To read the entire data logger in binary COMTRADE format, read the following files.
datalog.cfg and datalog.dat
To read the entire data logger in ASCII COMTRADE format, read the following files.
dataloga.cfg and dataloga.dat
To limit the range of records to be returned in the COMTRADE files, append the following to the filename before writing it:
B
• To read from a specific time to the end of the log: <space> startTime
• To read a specific range of records: <space> startTime <space> endTime
• Replace <startTime> and <endTime> with Julian dates (seconds since Jan. 1 1970) as numeric text.
f) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES

To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename:
EVT.TXT
To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename:
EVTnnn.TXT (replace “nnn” with the desired starting record number)
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION
The COMMAND password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of “0” removes COMMAND password protec-
tion. When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. COMMAND security
is required to change the COMMAND password. Similarly, the SETTING password is set up at memory location 4002.
These are the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" PASSWORD SECURITY
menu via the keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa.
To gain COMMAND level security access, the COMMAND password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain
SETTING level security access, the SETTING password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered SETTING
password must match the current SETTING password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware.
COMMAND and SETTING passwords each have a 30-minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular pass-
word, and is re-started whenever you “use” it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the SETTING password timer and
writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the COMMAND password timer. The value read at memory location
4010 can be used to confirm whether a COMMAND password is enabled or disabled (0 for Disabled). The value read at
memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a SETTING password is enabled or disabled.
COMMAND or SETTING password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on
which the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and
the passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B
B.4MEMORY MAPPING B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 36)

ADDR REGISTER NAME RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT DEFAULT
Product Information (Read Only)
0000 UR Product Type 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B 0002 Product Version
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
0 to 655.35 --- 0.01 F001 1
0010 Serial Number --- --- --- F203 “0”

0020 Manufacturing Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0022 Modification Number 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
0040 Order Code --- --- --- F204 “Order Code x “
0090 Ethernet MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
0093 Reserved (13 items) --- --- --- F001 0
00A0 CPU Module Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00B0 CPU Supplier Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00C0 Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) --- --- --- F203 (none)
Self Test Targets (Read Only)
0200 Self Test States (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0
Front Panel (Read Only)
0204 LED Column x State (10 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F501 0
0220 Display Message --- --- --- F204 (none)
0248 Last Key Pressed 0 to 42 --- 1 F530 0 (None)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)
0280 Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke 0 to 38 --- 1 F190 0 (No key -- use
between real keys)
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (32 modules)
0400 Virtual Input x State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
0401 ...Repeated for module number 2
040A ...Repeated for module number 11
040B ...Repeated for module number 12
040C ...Repeated for module number 13
040D ...Repeated for module number 14
040E ...Repeated for module number 15
040F ...Repeated for module number 16

APPENDIX B B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)
0800 Digital Counter x Value -2147483647 to
2147483647
--- 1 F004 0 B
0802 Digital Counter x Frozen -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
0804 Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0806 Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp us 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
FlexStates (Read Only)
0900 FlexState Bits (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element States (Read Only)
1000 Element Operate States (64 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F502 0
User Displays Actuals (Read Only)
1080 Formatted user-definable displays (8 items) --- --- --- F200 (none)
Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only
1200 User Map Values (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C0 Target Sequence 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
14C1 Number of Targets 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read/Write)
14C2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C3 Target Message --- --- --- F200 “.”
Digital I/O States (Read Only)
1500 Contact Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1508 Virtual Input States (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1510 Contact Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1518 Contact Output Current States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1520 Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1528 Virtual Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1530 Contact Output Detectors (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
Remote I/O States (Read Only)
1540 Remote Device x States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1542 Remote Input States (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1550 Remote Devices Online 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)
1551 Remote Device x StNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
1553 Remote Device x SqNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0


B 1585
1589
...Repeated for module number 14
Platform Direct I/O States (Read Only)
15C0 Direct Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15C8 Platform Direct Outputs Average Msg Return Time 1 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
15C9 Platform Direct Outputs Average Msg Return Time 2 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
15D0 Direct Device States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15D1 Reserved
15D2 Platform Direct I/O CRC Fail Count 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D3 Platform Direct I/O CRC Fail Count 2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)
1610 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
1611 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
Data Logger Actuals (Read Only)
1618 Data Logger Channel Count 0 to 16 CHNL 1 F001 0
1619 Time of oldest available samples 0 to 4294967295 seconds 1 F050 0
161B Time of newest available samples 0 to 4294967295 seconds 1 F050 0
161D Data Logger Duration 0 to 999.9 DAYS 0.1 F001 0
Sensitive Directional Power Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
1680 Sensitive Directional Power X Power -2147483647 to W 1 F060 0
2147483647
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)
1800 Phase A Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1802 Phase B Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1804 Phase C Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1806 Neutral Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1808 Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180A Phase A Current Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
180B Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180D Phase B Current Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
180E Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1810 Phase C Current Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1811 Neutral Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1813 Neutral Current Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1814 Ground Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1816 Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1818 Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1819 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181B Zero Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
181C Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181E Positive Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
181F Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1821 Negative Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1822 Differential Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1824 Differential Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1825 Reserved (27 items) --- --- --- F001 0


18C0 ...Repeated for module number 4
Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)
1A00 Phase AG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0 B
1A02 Phase BG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A04 Phase CG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A06 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A08 Phase AG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1A09 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0B Phase BG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1A0C Phase CG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0E Phase CG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1A0F Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A11 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A13 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A15 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A17 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1A18 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1A Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1A1B Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1D Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1A1E Auxiliary Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A20 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A22 Auxiliary Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1A23 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A25 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1A26 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A28 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1A29 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A2B Negative Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 × 0.1 F002 0
1A2C Reserved (20 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1A40 ...Repeated for module number 2
1AC0 ...Repeated for module number 4
1B00 ...Repeated for module number 5
Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules)
1C00 Three Phase Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C02 Phase A Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C04 Phase B Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C06 Phase C Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C08 Three Phase Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0A Phase A Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0C Phase B Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0E Phase C Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C10 Three Phase Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000


1C12 Phase A Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C14 Phase B Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C16 Phase C Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
B 1C18
1C19
Three Phase Power Factor
Phase A Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
-0.999 to 1
---
---
0.001
0.001
F013
F013
0
0
1C1A Phase B Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C1B Phase C Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C1C Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1CA0 ...Repeated for module number 6
Source Energy (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules)
1D00 Positive Watthour 0 to 1000000000000 Wh 0.001 F060 0
1D02 Negative Watthour 0 to 1000000000000 Wh 0.001 F060 0
1D04 Positive Varhour 0 to 1000000000000 varh 0.001 F060 0
1D06 Negative Varhour 0 to 1000000000000 varh 0.001 F060 0
1D08 Reserved (8 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1D10 ...Repeated for module number 2
Energy Commands (Read/Write Command)
1D60 Energy Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)
1D80 Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0
Source Demand (Read Only) (6 modules)
1E00 Demand Ia 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1E02 Demand Ib 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1E04 Demand Ic 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1E06 Demand Watt 0 to 999999.999 W 0.001 F060 0
1E08 Demand Var 0 to 999999.999 var 0.001 F060 0
1E0A Demand Va 0 to 999999.999 VA 0.001 F060 0
1E0C Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1E10 ...Repeated for module number 2
Source Demand Peaks (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules)
1E80 SRC X Demand Ia Max 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1E82 SRC X Demand Ia Max Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
1E84 SRC X Demand Ib Max 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1E86 SRC X Demand Ib Max Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
1E88 SRC X Demand Ic Max 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0


1E8A SRC X Demand Ic Max Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
1E8C SRC X Demand Watt Max 0 to 999999.999 W 0.001 F060 0
1E8E SRC X Demand Watt Max Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
1E90 SRC X Demand Var 0 to 999999.999 var 0.001 F060 0
1E92 SRC X Demand Var Max Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
1E94 SRC X Demand Va Max 0 to 999999.999 VA 0.001 F060 0 B
1E96 SRC X Demand Va Max Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
1E98 Reserved (8 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1EA0 ...Repeated for module number 2
1EC0 ...Repeated for module number 3
1EE0 ...Repeated for module number 4
1F00 ...Repeated for module number 5
Breaker Arcing Current Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (2 modules)
2200 Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase A 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc 1 F060 0
2202 Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase B 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc 1 F060 0
2204 Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase C 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc 1 F060 0
Breaker Arcing Current Commands (Read/Write Command) (2 modules)
220C Breaker x Arcing Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command)
2230 Reset Unauthorized Access 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Synchrocheck Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
2400 Synchrocheck X Delta Voltage -1000000000000 to V 1 F060 0
1000000000000
2402 Synchrocheck X Delta Frequency 0 to 655.35 Hz 0.01 F001 0
2403 Synchrocheck X Delta Phase 0 to 359.9 × 0.1 F001 0
Autoreclose Status (Read Only) (6 modules)
2410 Autoreclose Count 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only)
2B00 FlexStates, one per register (256 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Digital I/O states (Read Only)
2D00 Contact Input States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
2D80 Contact Output States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
2E00 Virtual Output States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Remote I/O Status (Read Only)
2F00 Remote Device States, one per register (16 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)
2F80 Remote Input States, one per register (32 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)
3000 Oscillography Number of Triggers 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3001 Oscillography Available Records 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3002 Oscillography Last Cleared Date 0 to 400000000 --- 1 F050 0
3004 Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)
3005 Oscillography Force Trigger 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
3011 Oscillography Clear Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)


Fault Report Indexing (Read Only Non-Volatile)
3020 Number Of Fault Reports 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Fault Reports (Read Only Non-Volatile) (10 modules)
3030 Fault Time 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
B 3034
3036
Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)
3100 Name of file to read --- --- --- F204 (none)
Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)
3200 Character position of current block within file 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3202 Size of currently-available data block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3203 Block of data from requested file (122 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Event Recorder (Read Only)
3400 Events Since Last Clear 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3402 Number of Available Events 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3404 Event Recorder Last Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Event Recorder (Read/Write Command)
3406 Event Recorder Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)
34C0 DCMA Inputs x Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34CA ...Repeated for module number 6
34CC ...Repeated for module number 7
34CE ...Repeated for module number 8
34DA ...Repeated for module number 14
34DC ...Repeated for module number 15
34DE ...Repeated for module number 16
34EA ...Repeated for module number 22
34EC ...Repeated for module number 23
34EE ...Repeated for module number 24
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)
34F0 RTD Inputs x Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0


34F8 ...Repeated for module number 9 B
34FA ...Repeated for module number 11
34FB ...Repeated for module number 12
34FC ...Repeated for module number 13
34FD ...Repeated for module number 14
34FE ...Repeated for module number 15
34FF ...Repeated for module number 16
Ohm Input Values (Read Only) (2 modules)
3520 Ohm Inputs x Value 0 to 65535 1 F001 0
Expanded Platform Direct I/O Status (Read Only)
3560 Direct Device States, one per register (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)
3570 Direct Input States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Passwords (Read/Write Command)
4000 Command Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0


Passwords (Read/Write Setting)
4002 Setting Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read/Write)
4008 Command Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
400A Setting Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
B Passwords (Read Only)

4010 Command Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4011 Setting Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)
4050 Flash Message Time 0.5 to 10 s 0.1 F001 10
4051 Default Message Timeout 10 to 900 s 1 F001 300
4052 Default Message Intensity 0 to 3 --- 1 F101 0 (25%)
4053 Screen Saver Feature 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4054 Screen Saver Wait Time 1 to 65535 min 1 F001 30
4055 Current Cutoff Level 0.002 to 0.02 pu 0.001 F001 20
4056 Voltage Cutoff Level 0.1 to 1 V 0.1 F001 10
Communications (Read/Write Setting)
407E COM1 minimum response time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
407F COM2 minimum response time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
4080 Modbus Slave Address 1 to 254 --- 1 F001 254
4083 RS485 Com1 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 8 (115200)
4084 RS485 Com1 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4085 RS485 Com2 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 8 (115200)
4086 RS485 Com2 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4087 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554706
4089 IP Subnet Mask 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 4294966272
408B Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554497
408D Network Address NSAP --- --- --- F074 0
4097 Default GOOSE Update Time 1 to 60 s 1 F001 60
409A DNP Port 0 to 4 --- 1 F177 0 (NONE)
409B DNP Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 1
409C DNP Client Addresses (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40A0 TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 502
40A1 TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 20000
40A2 TCP Port Number for the UCA/MMS Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 102
40A3 TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 80
40A4 Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 69
40A5 Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
(zero means “automatic”) (2 items)
40A7 DNP Unsolicited Responses Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40A8 DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout 0 to 60 s 1 F001 5
40A9 DNP Unsolicited Responses Max Retries 1 to 255 --- 1 F001 10
40AA DNP Unsolicited Responses Destination Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 1
40AB Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F192 0 (Half-Duplex)
40AC DNP User Map Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40AD DNP Number of Sources used in Analog points list 1 to 6 --- 1 F001 1
40AE DNP Current Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40AF DNP Voltage Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B0 DNP Power Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B1 DNP Energy Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B2 DNP Other Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B3 DNP Current Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B4 DNP Voltage Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B5 DNP Power Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000


40B6 DNP Energy Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B7 DNP Other Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B8 DNP IIN Time Sync Bit Period 1 to 10080 min 1 F001 1440
40B9 DNP Message Fragment Size 30 to 2048 --- 1 F001 240
40BA DNP Client Address 3 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40BC DNP Client Address 4 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0 B
40BE DNP Client Address 5 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40C0 DNP Communications Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
40C8 UCA Logical Device Name --- --- --- F203 “UCADevice”
40D0 GOOSE Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
40D1 UCA GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS Flexlogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
40D2 UCA Communications Reserved (14 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
40E0 TCP Port Number for the IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 2404
40E1 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40E2 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Common Address of ASDU 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
40E3 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Cyclic Data Tx Period 1 to 65535 s 1 F001 60
40E4 IEC Number of Sources used in M_ME_NC_1 point list 1 to 6 --- 1 F001 1
40E5 IEC Current Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E6 IEC Voltage Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E7 IEC Power Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E8 IEC Energy Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E9 IEC Other Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40EA IEC Communications Reserved (22 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
4100 DNP Binary Input Block of 16 Points (58 items) 0 to 58 --- 1 F197 0 (Not Used)
Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)
4168 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4169 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Server IP Addr 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
416B Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP Port No. 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 123
Data Logger Commands (Read/Write Command)
4170 Clear Data Logger 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Data Logger (Read/Write Setting)
4180 Data Logger Rate 0 to 7 --- 1 F178 1 (1 min)
4181 Data Logger Channel Settings (16 items) --- --- --- F600 0
Clock (Read/Write Command)
41A0 RTC Set Time 0 to 235959 --- 1 F050 0
Clock (Read/Write Setting)
41A2 SR Date Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F051 0
41A4 SR Time Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F052 0
41A6 IRIG-B Signal Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F114 0 (None)
Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)
41C0 Oscillography Number of Records 1 to 64 --- 1 F001 15
41C1 Oscillography Trigger Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F118 0 (Auto Overwrite)
41C2 Oscillography Trigger Position 0 to 100 % 1 F001 50
41C3 Oscillography Trigger Source 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
41C4 Oscillography AC Input Waveforms 0 to 4 --- 1 F183 2 (16 samples/cycle)
41D0 Oscillography Analog Channel X (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
4200 Oscillography Digital Channel X (63 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)
4260 Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4261 Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
4280 FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4281 User LED type (latched or self-resetting) 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 1 (Self-Reset)


B 428E
4290
42AA ...Repeated for module number 22
42AC ...Repeated for module number 23
42AE ...Repeated for module number 24
42BA ...Repeated for module number 30
42BC ...Repeated for module number 31
42BE ...Repeated for module number 32
42CA ...Repeated for module number 38
42CC ...Repeated for module number 39
42CE ...Repeated for module number 40
42DA ...Repeated for module number 46
42DE ...Repeated for module number 48
Installation (Read/Write Setting)
43E0 Relay Programmed State 0 to 1 --- 1 F133 0 (Not Programmed)
43E1 Relay Name --- --- --- F202 “Relay-1”
User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)
4441 User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4442 User Programmable Direct Device Off Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4443 User Programmable Remote Device Off Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4444 User Programmable Primary Ethernet Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


4445 User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4446 User Programmable Battery Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4447 User Programmable SNTP Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4448 User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4480 Phase CT Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1 B
4481 Phase CT Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
4482 Ground CT Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4483 Ground CT Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)
4500 Phase VT Connection 0 to 1 --- 1 F100 0 (Wye)
4501 Phase VT Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4502 Phase VT Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
4504 Auxiliary VT Connection 0 to 6 --- 1 F166 1 (Vag)
4505 Auxiliary VT Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4506 Auxiliary VT Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4580 Source Name --- --- --- F206 “SRC 1 “
4583 Source Phase CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4584 Source Ground CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4585 Source Phase VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4586 Source Auxiliary VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
Power System (Read/Write Setting)
4600 Nominal Frequency 25 to 60 Hz 1 F001 60
4601 Phase Rotation 0 to 1 --- 1 F106 0 (ABC)
4602 Frequency And Phase Reference 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
4603 Frequency Tracking Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
Line (Read/Write Setting)
46D0 Line Pos Seq Impedance 0.01 to 250 ? 0.01 F001 300
46D1 Line Pos Seq Impedance Angle 25 to 90 × 1 F001 75
46D2 Line Zero Seq Impedance 0.01 to 650 ? 0.01 F001 900
46D3 Line Zero Seq Impedance Angle 25 to 90 × 1 F001 75
46D4 Line Length Units 0 to 1 --- 1 F147 0 (km)
46D5 Line Length 0 to 2000 --- 0.1 F001 1000
Breaker Control Global Settings (Read/Write Setting)
46F0 UCA XCBR x SelTimOut 1 to 60 s 1 F001 30
Breaker Control (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
4700 Breaker x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4701 Breaker x Name --- --- --- F206 “Bkr 1 “
4704 Breaker x Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)
4705 Breaker x Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4706 Breaker x Close 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


4707 Breaker x Phase A 3 Pole 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4708 Breaker x Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4709 Breaker x Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
470A Breaker x External Alarm 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
470B Breaker x Alarm Delay 0 to 1000000 s 0.001 F003 0
B 470D
470E
Breaker x Push Button Control
Breaker x Manual Close Recal Time
0 to 1
0 to 1000000
---
s
1
0.001
F102
F003
0 (Disabled)
0
4710 Breaker x UCA XCBR x SBOClass 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
4711 Breaker x UCA XCBR x SBOEna 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4712 Breaker x Out Of Service 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4713 UCA XCBR PwrSupSt Bit 0 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4714 UCA XCBR x PresSt Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4715 UCA XCBR x TrpCoil Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4716 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 65535 1 F001 0
Synchrocheck (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
4780 Synchrocheck Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4781 Synchrocheck V1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
4782 Synchrocheck V2 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 1 (SRC 2)
4783 Synchrocheck Max Volt Diff 0 to 100000 V 1 F060 10000
4785 Synchrocheck Max Angle Diff 0 to 100 × 1 F001 30
4786 Synchrocheck Max Freq Diff 0 to 2 Hz 0.01 F001 100
4787 Synchrocheck Dead Source Select 0 to 5 --- 1 F176 1 (LV1 and DV2)
4788 Synchrocheck Dead V1 Max Volt 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 30
4789 Synchrocheck Dead V2 Max Volt 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 30
478A Synchrocheck Live V1 Min Volt 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 70
478B Synchrocheck Live V2 Min Volt 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 70
478C Synchrocheck Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
478D Synchrocheck Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
478E Synchrocheck Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
478F Synchrocheck Frequency Hysteresis 0 to 0.1 Hz 0.01 F001 6
Demand (Read/Write Setting)
47D0 Demand Current Method 0 to 2 --- 1 F139 0 (Therm Exponential)
47D1 Demand Power Method 0 to 2 --- 1 F139 0 (Therm Exponential)
47D2 Demand Interval 0 to 5 --- 1 F132 2 (15 MIN)
47D3 Demand Input 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Demand (Read/Write Command)
47D4 Demand Clear Record 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Flexcurve A (Read/Write Setting)
4800 FlexCurve A (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Flexcurve B (Read/Write Setting)
48F0 FlexCurve B (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting)
4A00 Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
4C00 User display top line text --- --- --- F202 ““
4C0A User display bottom line text --- --- --- F202 ““
4C14 Modbus addresses of displayed items (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
4C19 Reserved (7 items) --- --- --- F001 0


4CC0 ...Repeated for module number 7
4CE0 ...Repeated for module number 8
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules)
4E00 User Programmable Pushbutton Function 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 2 (Disabled)
4E01 Programmable Pushbutton Top Line --- --- --- F202 (none) B
4E0B Prog Pushbutton On Text --- --- --- F202 (none)
4E15 Prog Pushbutton Off Text --- --- --- F202 (none)
4E1F Programmable Pushbutton Drop-Out Time 0 to 60 s 0.05 F001 0
4E20 Programmable Pushbutton Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
4E21 User Programmable Pushbutton Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4E22 Programmable Pushbutton Reserved (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
4E6C ...Repeated for module number 4
4EB4 ...Repeated for module number 6
4ED8 ...Repeated for module number 7
4EFC ...Repeated for module number 8
4F8C ...Repeated for module number 12
Flexlogic (Read/Write Setting)
5000 FlexLogic Entry (512 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 16384
Flexlogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
5800 Timer x Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F129 0 (millisecond)
5801 Timer x Pickup Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
5802 Timer x Dropout Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
5803 Timer x Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0


B 58F0
58F8
Phase TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5900 Phase TOC Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5901 Phase TOC Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5902 Phase TOC Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5903 Phase TOC Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5904 Phase TOC Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5905 Phase TOC Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5906 Phase TOC Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
5907 Phase TOC Voltage Restraint 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5908 Phase TOC Block For Each Phase (3 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
590B Phase TOC Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
590C Phase TOC Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
590D Reserved (3 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Phase IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5A00 Phase IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A01 Phase IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5A02 Phase IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5A03 Phase IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A04 Phase IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A05 Phase IOC1 Block For Each Phase (3 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5A08 Phase IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5A09 Phase IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5AA0 ...Repeated for module number 11
5AB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Neutral TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5B00 Neutral TOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5B01 Neutral TOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5B02 Neutral TOC1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5B03 Neutral TOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5B04 Neutral TOC1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5B05 Neutral TOC1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5B06 Neutral TOC1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)


5B07 Neutral TOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5B08 Neutral TOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5B09 Neutral TOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5B0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5B20 ...Repeated for module number 3 B
Neutral IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5C00 Neutral IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C01 Neutral IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5C02 Neutral IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5C03 Neutral IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C04 Neutral IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C05 Neutral IOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5C06 Neutral IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5C07 Neutral IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C08 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5CB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Ground TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5D00 Ground TOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D01 Ground TOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5D02 Ground TOC1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5D03 Ground TOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5D04 Ground TOC1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5D05 Ground TOC1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5D06 Ground TOC1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
5D07 Ground TOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5D08 Ground TOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5D09 Ground TOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Ground IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5E00 Ground IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5E01 Ground IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5E02 Ground IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5E03 Ground IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5E04 Ground IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5E05 Ground IOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


5E06 Ground IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5E07 Ground IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5E08 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
B 5E30
5E40
5EA0 ...Repeated for module number 11
5EB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Sensitive Directional Power (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
66A0 Sensitive Directional Power Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
66A1 Sensitive Directional Power Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
66A2 Sensitive Directional Power RCA 0 to 359 × 1 F001 0
66A3 Sensitive Directional Power Calibration 0 to 0.95 × 0.05 F001 0
66A4 Sensitive Directional Power STG1 SMIN -1.2 to 1.2 pu 0.001 F002 100
66A5 Sensitive Directional Power STG1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
66A6 Sensitive Directional Power STG2 SMIN -1.2 to 1.2 pu 0.001 F002 100
66A7 Sensitive Directional Power STG2 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 2000
66A8 Sensitive Directional Power Block --- --- --- F001 0
66A9 Sensitive Directional Power Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
66AA Sensitive Directional Power Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
66AB Sensitive Directional Power X Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Autoreclose 1P 3P (Read/Write Setting)
6890 AR Mode 0 to 3 --- 1 F080 0 (1 & 3 Pole)
6891 AR Max Num Shots 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
6892 AR Block BKR1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6893 AR Close Time BKR1 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 10
6894 AR BKR Man Close 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6895 AR Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6896 AR Blk Time Mnl Cls 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 1000
6897 AR 1P Init 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6898 AR 3P Init 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6899 AR 3P TD Init 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
689A AR Multi P Fault 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
689B AR BKR 1 Pole Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
689C AR BKR 3 Pole Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
689D AR 3P Dead Time 1 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 50
689E AR 3P Dead Time 2 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 120
689F AR Extend Dead T1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A0 AR Dead T1 Extension 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 50
68A1 AR Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A2 AR Reset Time 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 6000
68A3 AR BKR Closed 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A4 AR Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A5 AR Pause 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A6 AR Inc Seq Time 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 500
68A7 AR Block BKR2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A8 AR Close Time BKR2 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 10


68A9 AR Transfer 1 to 2 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
68AA AR Transfer 2 to 1 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
68AB AR BKR1 Fail Option 0 to 1 --- 1 F081 0 (Continue)
68AC AR BKR2 Fail Option 0 to 1 --- 1 F081 0 (Continue)
68AD AR 1P Dead Time 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 100
68AE AR BKR Sequence 0 to 4 --- 1 F082 3 (1 - 2) B
68AF AR Transfer Time 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 400
68B0 AR Event 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
68B1 Reserved (16 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7000 Phase UV1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7001 Phase UV1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7002 Phase UV1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 1000
7003 Phase UV1 Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite Time)
7004 Phase UV1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7005 Phase UV1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 100
7006 Phase UV1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7007 Phase UV1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7008 Phase UV1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7009 Phase UV Measurement Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F186 0 (Phase to Ground)
700A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7200 Breaker Failure x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7201 Breaker Failure x Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)
7208 Breaker Failure x Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7209 Breaker Failure x Amp Supervision 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
720A Breaker Failure x Use Seal-In 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
720B Breaker Failure x Three Pole Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
720C Breaker Failure x Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
720D Breaker Failure x Phase Amp Supv Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
720E Breaker Failure x Neutral Amp Supv Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
720F Breaker Failure x Use Timer 1 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
7210 Breaker Failure x Timer 1 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
7211 Breaker Failure x Use Timer 2 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
7213 Breaker Failure x Use Timer 3 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
7215 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 1 Phase A/3P 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7216 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 2 Phase A/3P 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7217 Breaker Failure x Breaker Test On 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7218 Breaker Failure x Phase Amp Hiset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
7219 Breaker Failure x Neutral Amp Hiset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
721A Breaker Failure x Phase Amp Loset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
721B Breaker Failure x Neutral Amp Loset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
721C Breaker Failure x Loset Time 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
721D Breaker Failure x Trip Dropout Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
721E Breaker Failure x Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
721F Breaker Failure x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7220 Breaker Failure x Phase A Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7221 Breaker Failure x Phase B Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7222 Breaker Failure x Phase C Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7223 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 1 Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7224 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 1 Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


7225 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 2 Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7226 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 2 Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Breaker Arcing Current Settings (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
72C0 Breaker x Arcing Amp Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B 72C1
72C2
Breaker x Arcing Amp Source
Breaker x Arcing Amp Init
0 to 5
0 to 65535
---
---
1
1
F167
F300
0 (SRC 1)
0
72C3 Breaker x Arcing Amp Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
72C4 Breaker x Arcing Amp Limit 0 to 50000 kA2-cyc 1 F001 1000
72C5 Breaker x Arcing Amp Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
72C6 Breaker x Arcing Amp Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
72C7 Breaker x Arcing Amp Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DCMA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
7300 DCMA Inputs x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7301 DCMA Inputs x ID --- --- --- F205 “DCMA Ip 1 “
7307 DCMA Inputs x Reserved 1 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
730B DCMA Inputs x Units --- --- --- F206 “mA”
730E DCMA Inputs x Range 0 to 6 --- 1 F173 6 (4 to 20 mA)
730F DCMA Inputs x Minimum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 4000
7311 DCMA Inputs x Maximum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 20000
7313 DCMA Inputs x Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
7540 RTD Inputs x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7541 RTD Inputs x ID --- --- --- F205 “RTD Ip 1 “
7547 RTD Inputs x Reserved 1 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
754B RTD Inputs x Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F174 0 (100 Ω Platinum)
754C RTD Inputs x Reserved 2 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0


75D0 ...Repeated for module number 10 B
Ohm Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
7840 Ohm Inputs x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7841 Ohm Inputs x ID --- --- --- F205 “Ohm Ip 1 “
7847 Ohm Inputs x Reserved (9 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Neutral Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F00 Neutral OV X Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F01 Neutral OV X Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F02 Neutral OV X Pickup 0 to 1.25 pu 0.001 F001 300
7F03 Neutral OV X Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100


7F04 Neutral OV X Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F05 Neutral OV X Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7F06 Neutral OV X Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F07 Neutral OV X Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F08 Neutral OV Reserved (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B 7F10
7F20
Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F30 Auxiliary OV X Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F31 Auxiliary OV X Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F32 Auxiliary OV X Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 300
7F33 Auxiliary OV X Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F34 Auxiliary OV X Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F35 Auxiliary OV X Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7F36 Auxiliary OV X Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F37 Auxiliary OV X Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F38 Auxiliary OV X Reserved (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Auxiliary Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F60 Auxiliary UV X Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F61 Auxiliary UV X Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F62 Auxiliary UV X Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 700
7F63 Auxiliary UV X Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F64 Auxiliary UV X Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite Time)
7F65 Auxiliary UV X Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 100
7F66 Auxiliary UV X Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7F67 Auxiliary UV X Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F68 Auxiliary UV X Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F69 Auxiliary UV X Reserved (7 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Frequency (Read Only)
8000 Tracking Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)
8800 FlexState Parameters (256 items) --- --- --- F300 0
FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
9000 FlexElement Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9001 FlexElement Name --- --- --- F206 “FxE 1 “
9004 FlexElement InputP 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9005 FlexElement InputM 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9006 FlexElement Compare 0 to 1 --- 1 F516 0 (LEVEL)
9007 FlexElement Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F515 0 (SIGNED)
9008 FlexElement Direction 0 to 1 --- 1 F517 0 (OVER)
9009 FlexElement Hysteresis 0.1 to 50 % 0.1 F001 30
900A FlexElement Pickup -90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 1000
900C FlexElement DeltaT Units 0 to 2 --- 1 F518 0 (Milliseconds)
900D FlexElement DeltaT 20 to 86400 --- 1 F003 20
900F FlexElement Pkp Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9010 FlexElement Rst Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9011 FlexElement Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
9012 FlexElement Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
9013 FlexElement Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


908C ...Repeated for module number 8 B
FlexElement Actuals (Read Only) (16 modules)
9A01 FlexElement Actual -2147483.647 to --- 0.001 F004 0
2147483.647
9A0B ...Repeated for module number 6
9A0D ...Repeated for module number 7
9A0F ...Repeated for module number 8
9A1B ...Repeated for module number 14
9A1D ...Repeated for module number 15
9A1F ...Repeated for module number 16
Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)
A000 Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1) 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 0
A001 Setting Groups Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A002 FlexLogic Operands to Activate Groups 2 to 8 (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A009 Setting Group Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A00A Setting Group Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Setting Groups (Read Only)
A00B Current Setting Group 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 0
VT Fuse Failure (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
A040 VT Fuse Failure Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A041 ...Repeated for module number 2
Selector Switch Actuals (Read Only)
A400 Selector 1 Position 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 0
A401 Selector 2 Position 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 1
Selector Switch (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
A410 Selector x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A411 Selector x Range 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 7
A412 Selector x Timeout 3 to 60 s 0.1 F001 50


A413 Selector x Step Up 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A414 Selector x Step Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F083 0 (Time-out)
A415 Selector x Ack 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A416 Selector x Bit0 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A417 Selector x Bit1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B A418
A419
Selector x Bit2
Selector x Bit Mode
0 to 65535
0 to 1
---
---
1
1
F300
F083
0
0 (Time-out)
A41A Selector x Bit Ack 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A41B Power Up Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F084 0 (Restore)
A41C Selector x Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
A41D Selector x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A41E Selector x Reserved (10 items) --- --- --- --- ---
Flexcurve C (Read/Write Setting)
AC00 FlexCurve C (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Flexcurve D (Read/Write Setting)
AC78 FlexCurve D (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
AD00 Latch x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
AD01 Latch x Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F519 0 (Reset Dominant)
AD02 Latch x Set 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AD03 Latch x Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AD04 Latch x Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
AD05 Latch x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
AD06 Latch x Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
AD0A ...Repeated for module number 2
AD14 ...Repeated for module number 3
AD1E ...Repeated for module number 4
AD3C ...Repeated for module number 7
AD5A ...Repeated for module number 10
AD6E ...Repeated for module number 12
AD8C ...Repeated for module number 15
Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
B000 Digital Element x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B001 Digital Element x Name --- --- --- F203 “Dig Element 1 “
B015 Digital Element x Input 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B016 Digital Element x Pickup Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
B018 Digital Element x Reset Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
B01A Digital Element x Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B01B Digital Element x Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
B01C Digital Element x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B01D Digital Element x Reserved (3 items) --- --- --- F001 0
B020 ...Repeated for module number 2


B0A0 ...Repeated for module number 6
B0C0 ...Repeated for module number 7
B0E0 ...Repeated for module number 8
B140 ...Repeated for module number 11 B
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
B300 Digital Counter x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B301 Digital Counter x Name --- --- --- F205 “Counter 1 “
B307 Digital Counter x Units --- --- --- F206 (none)
B30A Digital Counter x Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30B Digital Counter x Up 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30C Digital Counter x Down 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30D Digital Counter x Preset -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
B30F Digital Counter x Compare -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
B311 Digital Counter x Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B312 Digital Counter x Freeze/Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B313 Digital Counter x Freeze/Count 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B314 Digital Counter Set To Preset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B315 Digital Counter x Reserved (11 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
C000 Contact Input x Name --- --- --- F205 “Cont Ip 1 “
C006 Contact Input x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C007 Contact Input x Debounce Time 0 to 16 ms 0.5 F001 20
C008 ...Repeated for module number 2


C0A0 ...Repeated for module number 21
C0B0 ...Repeated for module number 23
B C0B8
C0C0
C0C8 ...Repeated for module number 26
C0D0 ...Repeated for module number 27
C0E0 ...Repeated for module number 29
C0F0 ...Repeated for module number 31


C268 ...Repeated for module number 78 B
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)
C600 Contact Input x Threshold (24 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F128 1 (33 Vdc)
Virtual Inputs Global Settings (Read/Write Setting)
C680 Virtual Inputs SBO Timeout 1 to 60 s 1 F001 30
Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
C690 Virtual Input x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C691 Virtual Input x Name --- --- --- F205 “Virt Ip 1 “
C69B Virtual Input x Programmed Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 0 (Latched)
C69C Virtual Input x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C69D Virtual Input x UCA SBOClass 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
C69E Virtual Input x UCA SBOEna 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C69F Virtual Input x Reserved --- --- --- F001 0


B C810
C820
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
CC90 Virtual Output x Name --- --- --- F205 “Virt Op 1 “
CC9A Virtual Output x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CC9B Virtual Output x Reserved (5 items) --- --- --- F001 0
CCA0 ...Repeated for module number 2
CCB0 ...Repeated for module number 3
CCC0 ...Repeated for module number 4
CCD0 ...Repeated for module number 5
CCE0 ...Repeated for module number 6
CCF0 ...Repeated for module number 7
CD00 ...Repeated for module number 8
CDA0 ...Repeated for module number 18
CDB0 ...Repeated for module number 19
CDC0 ...Repeated for module number 20
CDD0 ...Repeated for module number 21
CDE0 ...Repeated for module number 22
CDF0 ...Repeated for module number 23
CE00 ...Repeated for module number 24
CEA0 ...Repeated for module number 34
CEB0 ...Repeated for module number 35
CEC0 ...Repeated for module number 36
CED0 ...Repeated for module number 37
CEE0 ...Repeated for module number 38


CEF0 ...Repeated for module number 39
CF00 ...Repeated for module number 40
CF40 ...Repeated for module number 44 B
CFA0 ...Repeated for module number 50
CFB0 ...Repeated for module number 51
CFC0 ...Repeated for module number 52
CFD0 ...Repeated for module number 53
CFE0 ...Repeated for module number 54
CFF0 ...Repeated for module number 55
D000 ...Repeated for module number 56
Mandatory (Read/Write)
D280 Test Mode Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D281 Force VFD and LED 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
D290 Contact Output x Name --- --- --- F205 “Cont Op 1 “
D29A Contact Output x Operation 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D29B Contact Output x Seal In 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D29C Reserved --- --- 1 F001 0
D29D Contact Output x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
D29E Reserved (2 items) --- --- --- F001 0
D2A0 ...Repeated for module number 2
D2B0 ...Repeated for module number 3
D2C0 ...Repeated for module number 4
D2D0 ...Repeated for module number 5
D2E0 ...Repeated for module number 6
D2F0 ...Repeated for module number 7


B D410
D420
Reset (Read/Write Setting)
D800 FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)
D810 Control Pushbutton x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D811 Control Pushbutton x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D812 Control Pushbutton x Reserved 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0


Clear Relay Records (Read/Write Setting)
D820 Clear Fault Reports Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D822 Clear Event Records Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D823 Clear Oscillography Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D824 Clear Data Logger Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D825 Clear Breaker Arcing Amps 1 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0 B
D826 Clear Breaker Arcing Amps 2 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D827 Clear Demand Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D829 Clear Energy Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D82B Clear Unauthorized Access Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D82D Clear Platform Direct I/O Stats Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D82E Clear Relay Records Reserved
Force Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting)
D8B0 Force Contact Input x State (96 items) 0 to 2 --- 1 F144 0 (Disabled)
Force Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
D910 Force Contact Output x State (64 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F131 0 (Disabled)
Platform Direct I/O (Read/Write Setting)
DB40 Direct Device ID 1 to 8 --- 1 F001 1
DB41 Platform Direct I/O Ring Ch 1 Configuration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DB42 Platform Direct I/O Data Rate 64 to 128 kbps 64 F001 64
DB41 Platform Direct I/O Ring Ch 2Configuration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DB42 Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Platform Direct Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
DB50 Direct Input x Device Number 0 to 8 --- 1 F001 0
DB51 Direct Input x Number 0 to 96 --- 1 F001 0
DB52 Direct Input x Default State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
DB53 Direct Input x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DB54 ...Repeated for module number 2
DB5C ...Repeated for module number 4
DBA0 ...Repeated for module number 21
DBAC ...Repeated for module number 24
DBB0 ...Repeated for module number 25
DBBC ...Repeated for module number 28


DBC0 ...Repeated for module number 29
DBCC ...Repeated for module number 32
DBD0 ...Repeated for module number 33
B DBD4
DBD8
DBDC ...Repeated for module number 36
DBE0 ...Repeated for module number 37
DBEC ...Repeated for module number 40
DBF0 ...Repeated for module number 41
DBFC ...Repeated for module number 44
DC00 ...Repeated for module number 45
DC0C ...Repeated for module number 48


DCA0 ...Repeated for module number 85
DCAC ...Repeated for module number 88 B
DCB0 ...Repeated for module number 89
DCBC ...Repeated for module number 92
DCC0 ...Repeated for module number 93
DCCC ...Repeated for module number 96
Platform Direct Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
DD00 Direct Output x Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
DD01 Direct Output x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DD02 ...Repeated for module number 2
DD0A ...Repeated for module number 6
DD0C ...Repeated for module number 7
DD0E ...Repeated for module number 8


B DD56
DD58
DDA0 ...Repeated for module number 81
DDAA ...Repeated for module number 86
DDAC ...Repeated for module number 87
DDAE ...Repeated for module number 88
DDB0 ...Repeated for module number 89


DDBA ...Repeated for module number 94
DDBC ...Repeated for module number 95
DDBE ...Repeated for module number 96
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
E000 Remote Device x ID --- --- --- F202 “Remote Device 1 “ B
E00A ...Repeated for module number 2
E014 ...Repeated for module number 3
E01E ...Repeated for module number 4
E03C ...Repeated for module number 7
E05A ...Repeated for module number 10
E06E ...Repeated for module number 12
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E100 Remote Input x Device 1 to 16 --- 1 F001 1
E101 Remote Input x Bit Pair 0 to 64 --- 1 F156 0 (None)
E102 Remote Input x Default State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
E103 Remote Input x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E600 Remote Output DNA x Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B E601
E602
Remote Output DNA x Events
Remote Output DNA x Reserved (2 items)
0 to 1
0 to 1
---
---
1
1
F102
F001
0 (Disabled)
0
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E680 Remote Output UserSt x Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
E681 Remote Output UserSt x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
E682 Remote Output UserSt x Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
E6A0 ...Repeated for module number 9
E6AC ...Repeated for module number 12
E6B0 ...Repeated for module number 13


E6BC ...Repeated for module number 16
E6C0 ...Repeated for module number 17
E6C4 ...Repeated for module number 18
E6C8 ...Repeated for module number 19 B
E6CC ...Repeated for module number 20
E6D0 ...Repeated for module number 21
E6DC ...Repeated for module number 24
E6E0 ...Repeated for module number 25
E6EC ...Repeated for module number 28
E6F0 ...Repeated for module number 29
E6FC ...Repeated for module number 32

B.4.2 DATA FORMATS
F001 F040
UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
B F002
UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F050
UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER)
Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January
1, 1970.
F003
UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register. F051
Low order word is stored in the second register. UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January,
2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1
F004
Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register/
Low order word is stored in the second register. F052
UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx).
F005
Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm;
UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Seconds (xx:xx:.SS.SSS): 0=00.000s,
F006 1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s)
UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F060
F011 FLOATING_POINT IEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points)
A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which
F070
are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user
HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS
defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio
and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup
ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the off-
F071
set into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time HEX4 4 BYTES - 8 ASCII DIGITS
value is stored.
F072
F012
DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING
(unsigned 16-bit integer)
MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the F073
number of decimal points to display. HEX8 8 BYTES - 16 ASCII DIGITS
Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three
decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is
F074
12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the dis-
played value on the unit is 12.35 kA.
F080
F013
ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE MODE
POWER_FACTOR PWR FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER)
0 = 1 & 3 Pole, 1 = 1 Pole, 2 = 3 Pole-A, 3 = 3 Pole-B
Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values indi-
cate leading.
F100
ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE
0 = Wye; 1 = Delta

F101 F109
ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION
0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100% 0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
F102 F110
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL
0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled 0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None B
F103 F111
ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES
0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time
bitmask curve shape bitmask curve shape
0 IEEE Mod Inv 9 IAC Inverse
1 IEEE Very Inv 10 IAC Short Inv F112
2 IEEE Ext Inv 11 I2t ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES
3 IEC Curve A 12 Definite Time
bitmask value bitmask value bitmask value
4 IEC Curve B 13 FlexCurve™ A
0 300 4 9600 8 115200
5 IEC Curve C 14 FlexCurve™ B
1 1200 5 19200 9 14400
6 IEC Short Inv 15 FlexCurve™ C
2 2400 6 38400 10 28800
7 IAC Ext Inv 16 FlexCurve™ D
3 4800 7 57600 11 33600
8 IAC Very Inv
F113
F104
ENUMERATION: PARITY
ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear
F114
F105
ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE
ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT
0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated
0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2
F115
F106
ENUMERATION: BREAKER STATUS
ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION
0 = Auxiliary A, 1 = Auxiliary B
0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
F117
F108
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
ENUMERATION: OFF/ON
0 = 1×72 cycles, 1 = 3×36 cycles, 2 = 7×18 cycles, 3 = 15×9 cycles
0 = Off, 1 = On
F118
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE
0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected

bitmask element
F119
144 PHASE UV1
ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE™ PICKUP RATIOS
145 PHASE UV2
mask value mask value mask value mask value 156 NEUTRAL OV1
0 0.00 30 0.88 60 2.90 90 5.90 224 SRC1 VT FF
1 0.05 31 0.90 61 3.00 91 6.00 225 SRC2 VT FF
2 0.10 32 0.91 62 3.10 92 6.50 226 SRC3 VT FF
B 3 0.15 33 0.92 63 3.20 93 7.00 227 SRC4 VT FF
4 0.20 34 0.93 64 3.30 94 7.50 228 SRC5 VT FF
5 0.25 35 0.94 65 3.40 95 8.00 229 SRC6 VT FF
6 0.30 36 0.95 66 3.50 96 8.50 244 50DD
7 0.35 37 0.96 67 3.60 97 9.00 245 CONT MONITOR
8 0.40 38 0.97 68 3.70 98 9.50 246 CT FAIL
9 0.45 39 0.98 69 3.80 99 10.00 265 STATOR DIFF
10 0.48 40 1.03 70 3.90 100 10.50 272 BREAKER 1
11 0.50 41 1.05 71 4.00 101 11.00 273 BREAKER 2
12 0.52 42 1.10 72 4.10 102 11.50 280 BKR FAIL
13 0.54 43 1.20 73 4.20 103 12.00 281 BKR FAIL
14 0.56 44 1.30 74 4.30 104 12.50 288 BKR ARC
15 0.58 45 1.40 75 4.40 105 13.00 289 BKR ARC
16 0.60 46 1.50 76 4.50 106 13.50 296 ACCDNT ENRG
17 0.62 47 1.60 77 4.60 107 14.00 300 LOSS EXCIT
18 0.64 48 1.70 78 4.70 108 14.50 304 AR 1
19 0.66 49 1.80 79 4.80 109 15.00 305 AR 2
20 0.68 50 1.90 80 4.90 110 15.50 306 AR 3
21 0.70 51 2.00 81 5.00 111 16.00 307 AR 4
22 0.72 52 2.10 82 5.10 112 16.50 308 AR 5
23 0.74 53 2.20 83 5.20 113 17.00 309 AR 6
24 0.76 54 2.30 84 5.30 114 17.50 312 SYNC 1
25 0.78 55 2.40 85 5.40 115 18.00 313 SYNC 2
26 0.80 56 2.50 86 5.50 116 18.50 320 COLD LOAD 1
27 0.82 57 2.60 87 5.60 117 19.00 321 COLD LOAD 2
28 0.84 58 2.70 88 5.70 118 19.50 324 AMP UNBALANCE 1
29 0.86 59 2.80 89 5.80 119 20.00 325 AMP UNBALANCE 2
330 3RD HARM
336 SETTING GROUP
F122
337 RESET
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE
344 OVERFREQ 1
0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS 345 OVERFREQ 2
346 OVERFREQ 3
F123 347 OVERFREQ 4

ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY 352 UNDERFREQ 1
353 UNDERFREQ 2
0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A
354 UNDERFREQ 3
355 UNDERFREQ 4
F124 356 UNDERFREQ 5
ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS
357 UNDERFREQ 6
376 AR
bitmask element
377 STARTS-PER-HOUR
0 PHASE IOC1
378 TIME-BTWN-STARTS
1 PHASE IOC2
379 RESTART DELAY
16 PHASE TOC1
380 MECHANICAL JAM
17 PHASE TOC2
400 FLEX ELEMENT 1
140 AUX UV1
401 FLEX ELEMENT 2

bitmask element bitmask element

402 FLEX ELEMENT 3 550 COUNTER 7
403 FLEX ELEMENT 4 551 COUNTER 8
404 FLEX ELEMENT 5 680 PUSHBUTTON 1
408 FLEX ELEMENT 9 684 PUSHBUTTON 5 B
420 LATCH 1
421 LATCH 2
F125
422 LATCH 3
ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL
423 LATCH 4
0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service
424 LATCH 5
425 LATCH 6
426 LATCH 7 F126
427 LATCH 8 ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE
428 LATCH 9 0 = No, 1 = Yes
429 LATCH 10
430 LATCH 11
F127
431 LATCH 12
ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING
432 LATCH 13
433 LATCH 14 0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset
434 LATCH 15
435 LATCH 16 F128
512 DIG ELEM 1 ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD
513 DIG ELEM 2
0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC
514 DIG ELEM 3
515 DIG ELEM 4
516 DIG ELEM 5 F129
ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE
517 DIG ELEM 6
518 DIG ELEM 7 0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute
519 DIG ELEM 8
520 DIG ELEM 9
F130
521 DIG ELEM 10 ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE
522 DIG ELEM 11
0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault
523 DIG ELEM 12
524 DIG ELEM 13
525 DIG ELEM 14 F131
526 DIG ELEM 15 ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
527 DIG ELEM 16 0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze
544 COUNTER 1
545 COUNTER 2
F132
546 COUNTER 3
ENUMERATION: DEMAND INTERVAL
547 COUNTER 4
0 = 5 min, 1 = 10 min, 2 = 15 min, 3 = 20 min, 4 = 30 min,
548 COUNTER 5
5 = 60 min
549 COUNTER 6

bitmask error
F133
23 SRAM DATA ERROR
ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE
24 PROGRAM MEMORY
0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed 25 WATCHDOG ERROR
26 LOW ON MEMORY
F134 27 REMOTE DEVICE OFF

ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL 30 ANY MINOR ERROR
B 0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a 31 ANY MAJOR ERROR
F142
F135
ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE
0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16 0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause
F136 F143
UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number)
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles
3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles
F144
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE
F138
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE 0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed
0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
F145
ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER
F139
ENUMERATION: DEMAND CALCULATIONS
bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type
0 = Thermal Exponential, 1 = Block Interval, 2 = Rolling Demand 0 null 7 G 14 N 21 U
1 A 8 H 15 O 22 V
2 B 9 I 16 P 23 W
F140
ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE, 3 C 10 J 17 Q 24 X
DISABLED 4 D 11 K 18 R 25 Y
0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46 A, 2 = Voltage 280 V, 3 = Current 5 E 12 L 19 S 26 Z

4.6 A, 4 = Current 2 A, 5 = Notched 4.6 A, 6 = Notched 2 A 6 F 13 M 20 T
F141 F146
ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERROR ENUMERATION: MISC. EVENT CAUSES
bitmask error bitmask definition

0 ANY SELF TESTS 0 EVENTS CLEARED
1 IRIG-B FAILURE 1 OSCILLOGRAPHY TRIGGERED
2 DSP ERROR 2 DATE/TIME CHANGED
4 NO DSP INTERRUPTS 3 DEF SETTINGS LOADED
5 UNIT NOT CALIBRATED 4 TEST MODE ON
9 PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE 5 TEST MODE OFF
10 FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN 6 POWER ON
11 EQUIPMENT MISMATCH 7 POWER OFF
13 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED 8 RELAY IN SERVICE
14 SYSTEM EXCEPTION 9 RELAY OUT OF SERVICE
19 BATTERY FAIL 10 WATCHDOG RESET
20 PRI ETHERNET FAIL 11 OSCILLOGRAPHY CLEAR
21 SEC ETHERNET FAIL 12 REBOOT COMMAND
22 EEPROM DATA ERROR

F151 F156
ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS
bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
0 NONE 17 RTD 17 33 RTD 33
0 NONE 22 DNA-22 44 UserSt-12
1 RTD 1 18 RTD 18 34 RTD 34
1 DNA-1 23 DNA-23 45 UserSt-13
2 RTD 2 19 RTD 19 35 RTD 35
3
4
RTD 3
RTD 4
20
21
RTD 20
RTD 21
36
37
RTD 36
RTD 37
3 DNA-3 25 DNA-25 47 UserSt-15 B
5 RTD 5 22 RTD 22 38 RTD 38
6 RTD 6 23 RTD 23 39 RTD 39
7 RTD 7 24 RTD 24 40 RTD 40
8 RTD 8 25 RTD 25 41 RTD 41
9 RTD 9 26 RTD 26 42 RTD 42
10 RTD 10 27 RTD 27 43 RTD 43
10 DNA-10 32 DNA-32 54 UserSt-22
11 RTD 11 28 RTD 28 44 RTD 44
11 DNA-11 33 UserSt-1 55 UserSt-23
12 RTD 12 29 RTD 29 45 RTD 45
13 RTD 13 30 RTD 30 46 RTD 46
14 RTD 14 31 RTD 31 47 RTD 47
15 RTD 15 32 RTD 32 48 RTD 48
16 RTD 16
F152
ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP 19 DNA-19 41 UserSt-9 63 UserSt-31
0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3
4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6 21 DNA-21 43 UserSt-11
F155 F157
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE ENUMERATION: BREAKER MODE
0 = Offline, 1 = Online 0 = 3-Pole, 1 = 1-Pole
F159
ENUMERATION: BREAKER AUX CONTACT KEYING
0 = 52a, 1 = 52b, 2 = None
F166
ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE
0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca
F167
ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE
0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4,
4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6
F168
ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION
0 = Disabled, 1 = 2nd

F169 F176
ENUMERATION: OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT FUNCTION ENUMERATION: SYNCHROCHECK DEAD SOURCE SELECT
0 = Disabled, 1 = 5th
bitmask synchrocheck dead source
0 None
F170 1 LV1 and DV2
ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET & GAIN 2 DV1 and LV2
B TRANSDUCER I/O SELECTION 3 DV1 or DV2
0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH 4 DV1 Xor DV2
5 DV1 and DV2
F171
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE F177
0 = dcmA IN, 1 = OHMS IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT
0 = NONE, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485,
3 = FRONT PANEL-RS232, 4 = NETWORK
F172
ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS
F178
bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot
ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER RATES
0 F 4 K 8 P 12 U
0 = 1 sec, 1 = 1 min, 2 = 5 min, 3 = 10 min, 4 = 15 min,
1 G 5 L 9 R 13 V
5 = 20 min, 6 = 30 min, 7 = 60 min
2 H 6 M 10 S 14 W
3 J 7 N 11 T 15 X
F180
ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND
F173
0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA I/O RANGE
bitmask dcmA I/O range

F181
0 0 to –1 mA
ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE
1 0 to 1 mA
0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE
2 –1 to 1 mA
3 0 to 5 mA
4 0 to 10 mA F183
5 0 to 20 mA ENUMERATION AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
6 4 to 20 mA bitmask definition
0 Off
1 8 samples/cycle
F174
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE 2 16 samples/cycle
3 32 samples/cycle
0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel,
4 64 samples/cycle
2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper
F175 F185
ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS ENUMERATION PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C 0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G
F186
ENUMERATION MEASUREMENT MODE
0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase

bitmask Input Point Block

F190
21 Elements 17 to 32
ENUMERATION Simulated Keypress
bitmask keypress bitmask keypress 23 Elements 49 to 64
0 --- 13 Value Up 24 Elements 65 to 80
use between real keys
14 Value Down 25 Elements 81 to 96
1 1 15 Message Up 26 Elements 97 to 112
2 2 16 Message Down 27 Elements 113 to 128 B
3 3 17 Message Left 28 Elements 129 to 144
4 4 18 Message Right 29 Elements 145 to 160
5 5 19 Menu 30 Elements 161 to 176
6 6 20 Help 31 Elements 177 to 192
7 7 21 Escape 32 Elements 193 to 208
8 8 22 Enter 33 Elements 209 to 224
9 9 23 Reset 34 Elements 225 to 240
10 0 24 User 1 35 Elements 241 to 256
11 Decimal Pt 25 User 2 36 Elements 257 to 272
12 Plus/Minus 26 User 3 37 Elements 273 to 288
F192
ENUMERATION ETHERNET OPERATION MODE
0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex 42 Elements 353 to 368
F194 44 Elements 385 to 400

ENUMERATION DNP SCALE 45 Elements 401 to 406
A bitmask of 0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000
F197 49 Elements 465 to 480
ENUMERATION DNP BINARY INPUT POINT BLOCK
bitmask Input Point Block 51 Elements 497 to 512
0 Not Used 52 Elements 513 to 528
1 Virtual Inputs 1 to 16 53 Elements 529 to 544
2 Virtual Inputs 17 to 32 54 Elements 545 to 560
3 Virtual Outputs 1 to 16 55 LED States 1 to 16
4 Virtual Outputs 17 to 32 56 LED States 17 to 32
5 Virtual Outputs 33 to 48 57 Self Tests 1 to 16
6 Virtual Outputs 49 to 64 58 Self Tests 17 to 32
7 Contact Inputs 1 to 16
8 Contact Inputs 17 to 32 F200
9 Contact Inputs 33 to 48 TEXT40 40 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
13 Contact Outputs 1 to 16 F201
TEXT8 8 CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE
14 Contact Outputs 17 to 32
15 Contact Outputs 33 to 48 4 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
16 Contact Outputs 49 to 64
17 Remote Inputs 1 to 16
F202
18 Remote Inputs 17 to 32 TEXT20 20 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
19 Remote Devs 1 to 16
10 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
20 Elements 1 to 16

[32] END
F203 [34] NOT (1 INPUT)
TEXT16 16 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT [36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)
[38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs)
[40] OR (2 to 16 inputs)
F204 [42] AND (2 to 16 inputs)
TEXT80 80 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT [44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs)
[46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs)
B F205
[48] TIMER (1 to 32)
[50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 64)
TEXT12 12 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT [52] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range)
[56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1 to 6)
[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range)
F206 [64 to 127] ELEMENT STATES
TEXT6 6 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F400
F207 UR_UINT16 CT/VT BANK SELECTION
TEXT4 4 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
bitmask bank selection
0 Card 1 Contact 1 to 4
F208 1 Card 1 Contact 5 to 8
TEXT2 2 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT 2 Card 2 Contact 1 to 4
F222
ENUMERATION TEST ENUMERATION
0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
F500
UR_UINT16 PACKED BITFIELD
F300
UR_UINT16 FLEXLOGIC™ BASE TYPE (6 bit type) First register indicates I/O state with bits 0(MSB)-15(LSB) corre-
sponding to I/0 state 1-16. The second register indicates I/O state
The FlexLogic™ BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 17-32 (if required) The
descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value. third register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0
The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD, state 33-48 (if required). The fourth register indicates I/O state with
where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic™ type is associated bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 49-64 (if required).
with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE
type, and D represents bits for the descriptor. The number of registers required is determined by the specific
data item. A bit value of 0 = Off, 1 = On
The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix
[PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descrip-
tor range. F501
[0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value UR_UINT16 LED STATUS
[0] On (1)This is boolean TRUE value
Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing
[2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 - 96) the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates
[3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1-96)
the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
[4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1-64)
[6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1-64)
[10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1-64)
F502
[11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1-64)
BITFIELD ELEMENT OPERATE STATES
[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1-64)
[13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1-64) Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124
[14] REMOTE INPUTS (1-32) format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID
[28] INSERT (Via Keypad only) X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].

F504 F600
BITFIELD 3 PHASE ELEMENT STATE UR_UINT16 FlexAnalog Parameter
bitmask element state The 16-bit value corresponds to the modbus address of the value
0 Pickup to be used when this parameter is selected. Only certain values
1 Operate may be used as FlexAnalogs (basically all the metering quantities
used in protection)
2 Pickup Phase A
3
4
Pickup Phase B
Pickup Phase C MMI_FLASH ENUMERATION
B
5 Operate Phase A Flash message definitions for Front-panel MMI
6 Operate Phase B
bitmask Flash Message
7 Operate Phase C
1 ADJUSTED VALUE HAS BEEN STORED
2 ENTERED PASSCODE IS INVALID
F505 3 COMMAND EXECUTED
BITFIELD CONTACT OUTPUT STATE 4 DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN ADDED
0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected 5 DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN REMOVED
6 INPUT FUNCTION IS ALREADY ASSIGNED
7 PRESS [ENTER] TO ADD AS DEFAULT
F506| 8 PRESS [ENTER] TO REMOVE MESSAGE
BITFIELD 1 PHASE ELEMENT STATE
9 PRESS [ENTER] TO BEGIN TEXT EDIT
0 = Pickup, 1 = Operate 10 ENTRY MISMATCH - CODE NOT STORED
11 PRESSED KEY IS INVALID HERE
12 INVALID KEY: MUST BE IN LOCAL MODE
F507
BITFIELD COUNTER ELEMENT STATE 13 NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
14 PLEASE ENTER A NON-ZERO PASSCODE
0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than
15 NO ACTIVE TARGETS (TESTING LEDS)
16 OUT OF RANGE - VALUE NOT STORED
F509 17 RESETTING LATCHED CONDITIONS
BITFIELD SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE 18 SETPOINT ACCESS IS NOW ALLOWED
0 = Operate 19 SETPOINT ACCESS DENIED (PASSCODE)
20 SETPOINT ACCESS IS NOW RESTRICTED
21 NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED
F511
22 SETPOINT ACCESS DENIED (SWITCH)
BITFIELD 3 PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
23 DATA NOT ACCEPTED
0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C
24 NOT ALL CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN RESET
25 DATE NOT ACCEPTED IRIGB IS ENABLED
F515 26 NOT EXECUTED
ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE 27 DISPLAY ADDED TO USER DISPLAY LIST
0 = SIGNED, 1 = ABSOLUTE 28 DISPLAY NOT ADDED TO USER DISPLAY LIST
29 DISPLAY REMOVED FROM USER DISPLAY LIST
F516
ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE MMI_PASSWORD_TYPE ENUMERATION
Password types for display in password prompts
0 = LEVEL, 1 = DELTA
bitmask password type
F518 0 No
ENUMERATION FlexElement Units 1 MASTER
2 SETTING
0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes
3 COMMAND
4 FACTORY

bitmask Setting Type

MMI_SETTING_TYPE ENUMERATION
2 Setting
Setting types for display in web pages
3 Command
bitmask Setting Type 4 Factory Setting
0 Unrestricted Setting
1 Master-accessed Setting

APPENDIX C C.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C UCA/MMS COMMUNICATIONSC.1OVERVIEW C.1.1 UCA
The Utility Communications Architecture (UCA) Version 2 represents an attempt by utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. There is a set of reference documents available from the
Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and vendors of UCA/MMS software libraries that describe the complete capabili-
ties of the UCA. Following, is a description of the subset of UCA/MMS features that are supported by the UR relay. The ref-
erence document set includes:
• Introduction to UCA version 2
• Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder Equipment (GOMSFE)
• Common Application Service Models (CASM) and Mapping to MMS
• UCA Version 2 Profiles
These documents can be obtained from the UCA User’s Group at http://www.ucausersgroup.org. It is strongly recom-
mended that all those involved with any UCA implementation obtain this document set.
C
COMMUNICATION PROFILES:
The UCA specifies a number of possibilities for communicating with electronic devices based on the OSI Reference Model.
The UR relay uses the seven layer OSI stack (TP4/CLNP and TCP/IP profiles). Refer to the "UCA Version 2 Profiles" refer-
ence document for details.
The TP4/CLNP profile requires the UR relay to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) in order
to establish a communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the UR relay to have an IP address in order to establish a
communication link. These addresses are set in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK
menu. Note that the UR relay supports UCA operation over the TP4/CLNP or the TCP/IP stacks and also supports opera-
tion over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to two simultaneous connections. This is in addition to DNP
and Modbus/TCP (non-UCA) connections.
C.1.2 MMS
a) DESCRIPTION
The UCA specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (Application) layer for trans-
fer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number of years and provides a set of services suitable for
the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Data can be grouped to form objects and be mapped to MMS ser-
vices. Refer to the “GOMSFE” and “CASM” reference documents for details.
SUPPORTED OBJECTS:
The "GOMSFE" document describes a number of communication objects. Within these objects are items, some of which
are mandatory and some of which are optional, depending on the implementation. The UR relay supports the following
GOMSFE objects:
• DI (device identity) • PHIZ (high impedance ground detector)
• GCTL (generic control) • PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay)
• GIND (generic indicator) • POVR (overvoltage relay)
• GLOBE (global data) • PTOC (time overcurrent relay)
• MMXU (polyphase measurement unit) • PUVR (under voltage relay)
• PBRL (phase balance current relay) • PVPH (volts per hertz relay)
• PBRO (basic relay object) • ctRATO (CT ratio information)
• PDIF (differential relay) • vtRATO (VT ratio information)
• PDIS (distance) • RREC (reclosing relay)
• PDOC (directional overcurrent) • RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay)
• PDPR (directional power relay) • XCBR (circuit breaker)
• PFRQ (frequency relay)
UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain.
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay C-1

C.1 OVERVIEW APPENDIX C
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION:
Peer-to-peer communication of digital state information, using the UCA GOOSE data object, is supported via the use of the
UR Remote Inputs/Outputs feature. This feature allows digital points to be transferred between any UCA conforming
devices.
FILE SERVICES:
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of Oscillography, Event Record, or other files from a UR relay.
COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES:
The exact structure and values of the implemented objects can be seen by connecting to a UR relay with an MMS browser,
such as the “MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS DDE/OPC” server from Sisco Inc.
NON-UCA DATA:
C The UR relay makes available a number of non-UCA data items. These data items can be accessed through the "UR" MMS
domain. UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain.
b) PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION AND CONFORMANCE STATEMENT (PICS)

The UR relay functions as a server only; a UR relay cannot be configured as a client. Thus, the following list of sup-
ported services is for server operation only:
NOTE
The MMS supported services are as follows:

CONNECTION MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
• Initiate
• Conclude
• Cancel
• Abort
• Reject
VMD SUPPORT SERVICES:
• Status
• GetNameList
• Identify
VARIABLE ACCESS SERVICES:
• Read
• Write
• InformationReport
• GetVariableAccessAttributes
• GetNamedVariableListAttributes
OPERATOR COMMUNICATION SERVICES:
(none)
SEMAPHORE MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
DOMAIN MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
• GetDomainAttributes
PROGRAM INVOCATION MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
EVENT MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
C-2 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

JOURNAL MANAGEMENT SERVICES:

(none)
FILE MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
• ObtainFile
• FileOpen
• FileRead
• FileClose
• FileDirectory
The following MMS parameters are supported:
• STR1 (Arrays)
• STR2 (Structures) C
• NEST (Nesting Levels of STR1 and STR2) - 1
• VNAM (Named Variables)
• VADR (Unnamed Variables)
• VALT (Alternate Access Variables)
• VLIS (Named Variable Lists)
• REAL (ASN.1 REAL Type)
c) MODEL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE (MIC)

This section provides details of the UCA object models supported by the UR series relays. Note that not all of the protective
device functions are applicable to all the UR series relays.
Table C–1: DEVICE IDENTITY – DI
NAME M/O RWEC
Name m rw
Class o rw
d o rw
Own o rw
Loc o rw
VndID m r
Table C–2: GENERIC CONTROL – GCTL

FC NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
ST BO<n> SI rw Generic Single Point Indication
CO BO<n> SI rw Generic Binary Output
CF BO<n> SBOCF rw SBO Configuration
DC LN d rw Description for brick
BO<n> d rw Description for each point
Actual instantiation of GCTL objects is as follows:
NOTE GCTL1 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points – SI1 to SI32); includes SBO functionality.
Table C–3: GENERIC INDICATORS – GIND 1 TO 6

FC NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
ST SIG<n> SIG r Generic Indication (block of 16)
RP BrcbST BasRCB rw Controls reporting of STATUS

Table C–4: GENERIC INDICATOR – GIND7

FC OBJECT CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
NAME
ST SI<n> SI r Generic single point indication
SI<n> d rw Description for all included SI
RP BrcbST BasRCB rw Controls reporting of STATUS
Actual instantiation of GIND objects is as follows:
NOTE GIND1 = Contact Inputs (96 total points – SIG1 to SIG6)

GIND2 = Contact Outputs (64 total points – SIG1 to SIG4)
GIND3 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points – SIG1 to SIG2)
C GIND4 = Virtual Outputs (64 total points – SIG1 to SIG4)
GIND5 = Remote Inputs (32 total points – SIG1 to SIG2)
GIND6 = Flex States (16 total points – SIG1 representing Flex States 1 to 16)
GIND7 = Flex States (16 total points – SI1 to SI16 representing Flex States 1 to 16)
Table C–5: GLOBAL DATA – GLOBE

FC OBJECT NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
ST ModeDS SIT r Device is: in test, off-line, available, or unhealthy
LocRemDS SIT r The mode of control, local or remote (DevST)
ActSG INT8U r Active Settings Group
EditSG INT8u r Settings Group selected for read/write operation
CO CopySG INT8U w Selects Settings Group for read/write operation
IndRs BOOL w Resets ALL targets
CF ClockTOD BTIME rw Date and time
RP GOOSE PACT rw Reports IED Inputs and Outputs
Table C–6: MEASUREMENT UNIT (POLYPHASE) – MMXU

MX V WYE rw Voltage on phase A, B, C to G
PPV DELTA rw Voltage on AB, BC, CA
A WYE rw Current in phase A, B, C, and N
W WYE rw Watts in phase A, B, C
TotW AI rw Total watts in all three phases
Var WYE rw Vars in phase A, B, C
TotVar AI rw Total vars in all three phases
VA WYE rw VA in phase A, B, C
TotVA AI rw Total VA in all 3 phases
PF WYE rw Power Factor for phase A, B, C
AvgPF AI rw Average Power Factor for all three phases
Hz AI rw Power system frequency
CF All MMXU.MX ACF rw Configuration of ALL included MMXU.MX
All MMXU.MX d rw Description of ALL included MMXU.MX
RP BrcbMX BasRCB rw Controls reporting of measurements
Actual instantiation of MMXU objects is as follows:
NOTE 1 MMXU per Source (as determined from the ‘product order code’)

Table C–7: PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS

ST Out BOOL r 1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operated
Tar PhsTar r Targets since last reset
FctDS SIT r Function is enabled/disabled
PuGrp INT8U r Settings group selected for use
CO EnaDisFct DCO w 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled
RsTar BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
RsLat BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
ElementSt d r Element state string
The following GOMSFE objects are defined by the object model described via the above table:
C
• PBRO (basic relay object)
• PDIF (differential relay)
• PDIS (distance)
• PDOC (directional overcurrent)
• PDPR (directional power relay)
• PFRQ (frequency relay)
• PHIZ (high impedance ground detector)
• PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay)
• POVR (over voltage relay)
• PTOC (time overcurrent relay)
• PUVR (under voltage relay)
• RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay)
• POVR (overvoltage)
• PVPH (volts per hertz relay)
• PBRL (phase balance current relay)
Actual instantiation of these objects is determined by the number of the corresponding elements present in the C60
as per the ‘product order code’.
NOTE
Table C–8: CT RATIO INFORMATION – ctRATO

OBJECT NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
PhsARat RATIO rw Primary/secondary winding ratio
NeutARat RATIO rw Primary/secondary winding ratio
LN d rw Description for brick (current bank ID)
Table C–9: VT RATIO INFORMATION – vtRATO

OBJECT NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
PhsVRat RATIO rw Primary/secondary winding ratio
LN d rw Description for brick (current bank ID)
Actual instantiation of ctRATO and vtRATO objects is as follows:
NOTE 1 ctRATO per Source (as determined from the product order code).
1 vtRATO per Source (as determined from the product order code).

Table C–10: RECLOSING RELAY – RREC

ST Out BOOL r 1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operated
FctDS SIT r Function is enabled/disabled
PuGrp INT8U r Settings group selected for use
SG ReclSeq SHOTS rw Reclosing Sequence
CO EnaDisFct DCO w 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled
RsTar BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
RsLat BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
CF ReclSeq ACF rw Configuration for RREC.SG
C ElementSt d r Element state string
Actual instantiation of RREC objects is determined by the number of autoreclose elements present in the C60 as
per the product order code.
NOTE
Also note that the Shots class data (i.e. Tmr1, Tmr2, Tmr3, Tmr4, RsTmr) is specified to be of type INT16S (16 bit
signed integer); this data type is not large enough to properly display the full range of these settings from the C60.
Numbers larger than 32768 will be displayed incorrectly.
Table C–11: CIRCUIT BREAKER – XCBR

ST SwDS SIT rw Switch Device Status
SwPoleDS BSTR8 rw Switch Pole Device Status
PwrSupSt SIG rw Health of the power supply
PresSt SIT rw The condition of the insulating medium pressure
PoleDiscSt SI rw All CB poles did not operate within time interval
TrpCoil SI rw Trip coil supervision
CO ODSw DCO rw The command to open/close the switch
CF ODSwSBO SBOCF rw Configuration for all included XCBR.CO
RP brcbST BasRCB rw Controls reporting of Status Points
Actual instantiation of XCBR objects is determined by the number of breaker control elements present in the C60 as
per the product order code.
NOTE
C.1.3 UCA REPORTING
A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the UR to detect "dead" connections. If there is no data
traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the UR. This frees up the con-
nection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using UCA reporting, clients should configure BasRCB objects such
that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the UR will not abort the con-
nection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this timeout will not apply.

APPENDIX D D.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONSD.1OVERVIEW D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following: Ë
– used
in standard direction; Ë – not used; – cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
1. SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
Ë System Definition
Ë Controlling Station Definition (Master)
Ë
Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
2. NETWORK CONFIGURATION:
Point-to-Point Multipoint
Multiple Point-to-Point Multipoint Star
3. PHYSICAL LAYER
Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange Unbalanced Interchange Balanced Interchange Circuit
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended X.24/X.27:
if >1200 bits/s: D
100 bits/sec. 2400 bits/sec. 2400 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec. 19200 bits/sec.
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):

Unbalanced Interchange Unbalanced Interchange Balanced Interchange Circuit
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended X.24/X.27:
if >1200 bits/s:
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
4. LINK LAYER
Link Transmission Procedure: Address Field of the Link:
Balanced Transmision Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only)
Unbalanced Transmission One Octet
Two Octets
Structured
Unstructured
Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay D-1

D.1 OVERVIEW APPENDIX D
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the
indicated causes of transmission:
The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
5. APPLICATION LAYER
Transmission Mode for Application Data:
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
stanadard.
Common Address of ADSU:
One Octet
Ë
Two Octets
Information Object Address:
One Octet Ë
Structured
D Two Octets Ë
Unstructured
Ë
Three Octets
Cause of Transmission:
One Octet
Ë
Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system.
Selection of standard ASDUs:
For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following: Ë
– used in standard direction; Ë – not used; – cannot be
selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
Process information in monitor direction
Ë
<1> := Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
<2> := Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
Ë <3> := Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
<4> := Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
Ë <5> := Step position information M_ST_NA_1
<6> := Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
Ë <7> := Bitstring of 32 bits M_BO_NA_1
<8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag M_BO_TA_1
Ë <9> := Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
<10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_NE_TA_1
Ë <11> := Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
<12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_NE_TB_1
Ë
<13> := Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
<14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_NE_TC_1
Ë
<15> := Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
<16> := Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
<17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
<18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
<19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
Ë <20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection M_SP_NA_1
D-2 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

Ë <21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor M_ME_ND_1
Ë
<30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_SP_TB_1
Ë <31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
Ë <32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
Ë <33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
Ë <34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TD_1
Ë <35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1
Ë <36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TF_1
Ë
<37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
Ë <38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
Ë <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1
Ë <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set
<30> to <40> are used.
Process information in control direction
Ë
<45> := Single command C_SC_NA_1
D
Ë <46> := Double command C_DC_NA_1
Ë <47> := Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1
Ë <48> := Set point command, normalized value C_SE_NA_1
Ë <49> := Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
Ë <50> := Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
Ë <51> := Bitstring of 32 bits C_BO_NA_1
Ë
<58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_TA_1
Ë <59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a C_DC_TA_1
Ë <60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a C_RC_TA_1
Ë <61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TA_1
Ë <62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TB_1
Ë <63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TC_1
Ë <64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used.
System information in monitor direction
Ë
<70> := End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction

Ë
<100> := Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
Ë
<101> := Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
Ë
<102> := Read command C_RD_NA_1
Ë
<103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard) C_CS_NA_1
<104> := Test command C_TS_NA_1
Ë
<105> := Reset process command C_RP_NA_1
<106> := Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
Ë
<107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a C_TS_TA_1

Parameter in control direction

Ë <110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value PE_ME_NA_1
Ë <111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value PE_ME_NB_1
Ë
<112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value PE_ME_NC_1
Ë <113> := Parameter activation PE_AC_NA_1
File transfer
Ë <120> := File Ready F_FR_NA_1
Ë <121> := Section Ready F_SR_NA_1
Ë <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
Ë <123> := Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
Ë <124> := Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
Ë <125> := Segment F_SG_NA_1
Ë <126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction) C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments

D (station-specific parameters)
In the following table:
• Shaded boxes are not required.
• Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard.
• Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used.
• ‘X’ if only used in the standard direction
TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR

UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION

UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<1> M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X
<2> M_SP_TA_1
<3> M_DP_NA_1
<4> M_DP_TA_1
<5> M_ST_NA_1
<6> M_ST_TA_1
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<8> M_BO_TA_1



BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<9> M_ME_NA_1 D
<10> M_ME_TA_1
<11> M_ME_NB_1
<12> M_ME_TB_1
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<16> M_IT_TA_1
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X X X
<31> M_DP_TB_1
<32> M_ST_TB_1
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1
<35> M_ME_TE_1
<36> M_ME_TF_1
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X
<46> C_DC_NA_1
<47> C_RC_NA_1
<48> C_SE_NA_1
<49> C_SE_NB_1



BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
D <50> C_SE_NC_1
<51> C_BO_NA_1
<58> C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X
<59> C_DC_TA_1
<60> C_RC_TA_1
<61> C_SE_TA_1
<62> C_SE_TB_1
<63> C_SE_TC_1
<64> C_BO_TA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1*) X
<100> C_IC_NA_1 X X X X X
<101> C_CI_NA_1 X X X
<102> C_RD_NA_1 X
<103> C_CS_NA_1 X X X
<104> C_TS_NA_1
<105> C_RP_NA_1 X X
<106> C_CD_NA_1
<107> C_TS_TA_1
<110> P_ME_NA_1
<111> P_ME_NB_1
<112> P_ME_NC_1 X X X
<113> P_AC_NA_1
<120> F_FR_NA_1
<121> F_SR_NA_1
<122> F_SC_NA_1
<123> F_LS_NA_1
<124> F_AF_NA_1
<125> F_SG_NA_1
<126> F_DR_TA_1*)

6. BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

Station Initialization:
Ë
Remote initialization
Cyclic Data Transmission:
Ë
Cyclic data transmission
Read Procedure:
Ë
Read procedure
Spontaneous Transmission:
Ë
Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information
object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a project-
specific list.
Ë Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1
Ë Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1 D
Ë Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1
Ë Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project)
Ë Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1
Ë Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1
Ë Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
Ë
Global
Ë
Group 1 Ë
Group 5 Ë
Group 9 Ë
Group 13
Ë
Group 2 Ë
Group 6 Ë
Group 10 Ë
Group 14
Ë
Group 3 Ë
Group 7 Ë
Group 11 Ë
Group 15
Ë
Group 4 Ë
Group 8 Ë
Group 12 Ë
Group 16
Clock synchronization:
Ë
Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)
Command transmission:
Ë
Direct command transmission
Ë Direct setpoint command transmission

Ë
Select and execute command
Ë Select and execute setpoint command

Ë
C_SE ACTTERM used
Ë
No additional definition
Ë
Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Ë
Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Ë
Persistent output
Ë
Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands
Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s

Transmission of integrated totals:

Ë
Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
Ë
Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
Ë
Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
Ë
Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously
Ë
Counter read
Ë
Counter freeze without reset
Ë
Counter freeze with reset
Ë
Counter reset
Ë
General request counter
Ë
Request counter group 1
Ë
D Ë
Ë
Parameter loading:
Ë
Threshold value
Ë Smoothing factor
Ë Low limit for transmission of measured values
Ë High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
Ë Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure:
Ë Test procedure
File transfer:
File transfer in monitor direction:
Ë Transparent file
Ë Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
Ë Transmission of sequences of events
Ë Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
Ë Transparent file
Background scan:
Ë Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay:
Acquisition of transmission delay

Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER DEFAULT REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE VALUE
t0 30 s Timeout of connection establishment 120 s
t1 15 s Timeout of send or test APDUs 15 s
t2 10 s Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t2 < t1 10 s
t3 20 s Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state 20 s
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s

Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
PARAMETER DEFAULT REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE VALUE
k 12 APDUs Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable 12 APDUs
w 8 APDUs Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs 8 APDUs
Maximum range of values k: 1 to 32767 (215 – 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Maximum range of values w: 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU D
Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
Portnumber:
PARAMETER VALUE REMARKS
Portnumber 2404 In all cases
RFC 2200 suite:

RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter-
net. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen
by the user of this standard.
Ë
Ethernet 802.3
Ë Serial X.21 interface

Ë Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)

D.1.2 POINT LIST
Only Source 1 data points are shown in the following table. If the NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC1 LIST setting is increased,
data points for subsequent sources will be added to the list immediately following the Source 1 data points.
Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 1 OF 4) Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 2 OF 4)
POINTS DESCRIPTION POINTS DESCRIPTION
M_ME_NC_1 Points 2044 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
Point Description 2045 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
2000 SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS 2046 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
2001 SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS 2047 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
2002 SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS 2048 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
2003 SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS 2049 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
2004 SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude 2050 SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power
2005 SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle 2051 SRC 1 Phase A Real Power
2006 SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 2052 SRC 1 Phase B Real Power
2007 SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle 2053 SRC 1 Phase C Real Power
D 2008
2009
SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude
SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle
2054
2055
SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power
SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power
2010 SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude 2056 SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power
2011 SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle 2057 SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power
2012 SRC 1 Ground Current RMS 2058 SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power
2013 SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude 2059 SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power
2014 SRC 1 Ground Current Angle 2060 SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power
2015 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 2061 SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power
2016 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle 2062 SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor
2017 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 2063 SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor
2018 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle 2064 SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor
2019 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 2065 SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor
2020 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle 2066 SRC 1 Positive Watthour
2021 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude 2067 SRC 1 Negative Watthour
2022 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle 2068 SRC 1 Positive Varhour
2023 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS 2069 SRC 1 Negative Varhour
2024 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS 2070 SRC 1 Frequency
2025 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS 2071 SRC 1 Demand Ia
2026 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude 2072 SRC 1 Demand Ib
2027 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle 2073 SRC 1 Demand Ic
2028 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude 2074 SRC 1 Demand Watt
2029 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle 2075 SRC 1 Demand Var
2030 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude 2076 SRC 1 Demand Va
2031 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle 2077 Sens Dir Power 1 Actual
2032 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS 2078 Sens Dir Power 2 Actual
2033 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS 2079 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase A
2034 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS 2080 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase B
2035 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude 2081 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase C
2036 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle 2082 Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase A
2037 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude 2083 Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase B
2038 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle 2084 Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase C
2039 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude 2085 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage
2040 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle 2086 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency
2041 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS 2087 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase
2042 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 2088 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage
2043 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle 2089 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency

Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 3 OF 4) Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 4 OF 4)
POINTS DESCRIPTION POINTS DESCRIPTION
2090 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase C_SC_NA_1 Points
2091 Tracking Frequency 1100 - 1115 Virtual Input States[0] - No Select Required
2092 FlexElement 1 Actual 1116 - 1131 Virtual Input States[1] - Select Required
2093 FlexElement 2 Actual M_IT_NA_1 Points
2094 FlexElement 3 Actual 4000 Digital Counter 1 Value
2102 FlexElement 11 Actual
2106 FlexElement 15 Actual D
2108 Current Setting Group
P_ME_NC_1 Points
5000 - Threshold values for M_ME_NC_1 points
5108
M_SP_NA_1 POINTS
100 - 115 Virtual Input States[0]
116 - 131 Virtual Input States[1]
132 - 147 Virtual Output States[0]
196 - 211 Contact Input States[0]
292 - 307 Contact Output States[0]
356 - 371 Remote Input x States[0]
372 - 387 Remote Input x States[1]
388 - 403 Remote Device x States
404 - 419 LED Column x State[0]
420 - 435 LED Column x State[1]


APPENDIX E E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
APPENDIX E DNP COMMUNICATIONSE.1DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a ‘Device Profile Document’ in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
Table E–1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: UR Series Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:

For Requests: Level 2 Ë Master
For Responses: Level 2 Ë
Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Input Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Binary Counters (Object 20)
Frozen Counters (Object 21)
E
Counter Change Event (Object 22)
Frozen Counter Event (Object 23)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 240
Received: 292 Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

Ë None Ë
None
Ë
Fixed at 2 Ë Configurable
Ë Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Ë
Never
Ë Always
Ë Sometimes
Ë Configurable
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay E-1

E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT APPENDIX E
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

Ë Never
Ë Always
Ë
When reporting Event Data
Ë
When sending multi-fragment responses
Ë Sometimes
Ë Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm: Ë None Ë
Fixed at 3 s Ë Variable Ë Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment: Ë
None Ë Fixed at ____ Ë Variable Ë Configurable
Application Confirm: Ë None Ë
Fixed at 4 s Ë Variable Ë Configurable
Complete Appl. Response: Ë
None Ë Fixed at ____ Ë Variable Ë Configurable
Others:
Transmission Delay: No intentional delay
Inter-character Timeout: 50 ms
Need Time Delay: Configurable (default = 24 hrs.)
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: 10 s
Binary input change scanning period: 8 times per power system cycle
E Packed binary change process period:

Analog input change scanning period:
1s
500 ms
Counter change scanning period: 500 ms
Frozen counter event scanning period: 500 ms
Unsolicited response notification delay: 500 ms
Unsolicited response retry delay configurable 0 to 60 sec.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs Ë
Never Ë Always Ë Sometimes Ë Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE Ë Never Ë
Always Ë Sometimes Ë Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Ë Never Ë
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK Ë Never Ë
Count > 1 Ë
Pulse On Ë Never Ë Always Ë
Sometimes Ë Configurable
Pulse Off Ë Never Ë Always Ë
Latch On Ë Never Ë Always Ë
Latch Off Ë Never Ë Always Ë
Queue Ë
Clear Queue Ë
Explanation of ‘Sometimes’: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is
determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both “Pulse On” and “Latch On” operations perform the same func-
tion in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the “On” state. If the Virtual Input is set to “Self-Reset”,
it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic™. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. “Pulse Off” and “Latch Off”
operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the “Off” state. “Trip” and “Close” operations both put the appropriate
Virtual Input into the “On” state.
E-2 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested: specific variation requested:
Ë Never Ë Never
Ë
Only time-tagged Ë
Binary Input Change With Time
Ë Only non-time-tagged Ë Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Ë Configurable Ë Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

Ë Never Ë
Never
Ë
Configurable Ë When Device Restarts
Ë Only certain objects Ë When Status Flags Change
Ë Sometimes (attach explanation)
No other options are permitted.
Ë
ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function
codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

Ë No Counters Reported Ë No Counters Reported
Ë Configurable (attach explanation) Ë Configurable (attach explanation)
Ë
Default Object: 20 Ë
16 Bits (Counter 8)
Default Variation: 1 Ë
32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9)
Ë
Point-by-point list attached Ë Other Value: _____
Ë
Point-by-point list attached E
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Ë
Yes
Ë No

E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the UR in both request messages
and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or
28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Table E–2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)
OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION FUNCTION QUALIFIER FUNCTION QUALIFIER
NO. NO. CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX) CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response 17, 28 (index)
E 3
(default – see Note 1)
Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
130 (unsol. resp.)
(parse only) 07, 08 (limited quantity)

10 0 Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)
request default variation) 06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) echo of request
4 (operate) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir. op, noack)
20 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 7 (freeze) 06(no range, or all)
variation) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08(limited quantity)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28(index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
Note 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog
Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal
Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respec-
tively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for change-
event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.


20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
cont’d 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
21 0 Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index) E
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
22 0 Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2 16-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
23 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)


23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
cont’d 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
E 5 short floating point 1 (read)

22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08(limited quantity) (see Note 2)
17, 28(index)
32 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Time (default – see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
5 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
without Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
7 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
with Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
34 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)


34 2 32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
cont’d (default – see Note 1) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Deadband 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07 (limited qty=1) (see Note 2)
08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited quantity)
(quantity = 1)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class) E
1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
20 (enable unsol) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(index must =7)
--- No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart)
see Note 3
--- No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
--- No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)

E.2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX E
E.2DNP POINT LISTS E.2.1 BINARY INPUTS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is per-
formed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
Change Event Buffer Size: 1000
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 1 of 9) Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 2 of 9)
POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION CHANGE EVENT POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION CHANGE EVENT
INDEX CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) INDEX CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
0 Virtual Input 1 2 32 Virtual Output 1 2
E 3 Virtual Input 4 2 35 Virtual Output 4 2

APPENDIX E E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
64 Virtual Output 33 2 113 Contact Input 18 1
84 Virtual Output 53 2 133 Contact Input 38 1 E
96 Contact Input 1 1 145 Contact Input 50 1

162 Contact Input 67 1 211 Contact Output 20 1
E 182 Contact Input 87 1 231 Contact Output 40 1
192 Contact Output 1 1 241 Contact Output 50 1
207 Contact Output 16 1 256 Remote Input 1 1

260 Remote Input 5 1 448 PHASE UV1 Element OP 1
261 Remote Input 6 1 449 PHASE UV2 Element OP 1
262 Remote Input 7 1 460 NEUTRAL OV1 Element OP 1
263 Remote Input 8 1 528 SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP 1
269 Remote Input 14 1 576 BREAKER 1 Element OP 1
270 Remote Input 15 1 577 BREAKER 2 Element OP 1
271 Remote Input 16 1 584 BKR FAIL 1 Element OP 1
272 Remote Input 17 1 585 BKR FAIL 2 Element OP 1
273 Remote Input 18 1 592 BKR ARC 1 Element OP 1
274 Remote Input 19 1 593 BKR ARC 2 Element OP 1
275 Remote Input 20 1 608 AR 1 Element OP 1
280 Remote Input 25 1 613 AR 6 Element OP 1 E
281 Remote Input 26 1 616 SYNC 1 Element OP 1
282 Remote Input 27 1 617 SYNC 2 Element OP 1
283 Remote Input 28 1 640 SETTING GROUP Element OP 1
284 Remote Input 29 1 641 RESET Element OP 1
285 Remote Input 30 1 704 FLEXELEMENT 1 Element OP 1
288 Remote Device 1 1 707 FLEXELEMENT 4 Element OP 1
293 Remote Device 6 1 816 DIG ELEM 1 Element OP 1
304 PHASE IOC1 Element OP 1 827 DIG ELEM 12 Element OP 1
305 PHASE IOC2 Element OP 1 828 DIG ELEM 13 Element OP 1
320 PHASE TOC1 Element OP 1 829 DIG ELEM 14 Element OP 1
321 PHASE TOC2 Element OP 1 830 DIG ELEM 15 Element OP 1
444 AUX UV1 Element OP 1 831 DIG ELEM 16 Element OP 1

Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 9 of 9)

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION CHANGE EVENT
INDEX CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
848 COUNTER 1 Element OP 1
864 LED State 1 (IN SERVICE) 1
865 LED State 2 (TROUBLE) 1
866 LED State 3 (TEST MODE) 1
867 LED State 4 (TRIP) 1
868 LED State 5 (ALARM) 1
869 LED State 6(PICKUP) 1
880 LED State 9 (VOLTAGE) 1
881 LED State 10 (CURRENT) 1
882 LED State 11 (FREQUENCY) 1
883 LED State 12 (OTHER) 1
884 LED State 13 (PHASE A) 1
885 LED State 14 (PHASE B) 1
E 886 LED State 15 (PHASE C) 1
887 LED State 16 (NTL/GROUND) 1
898 SNTP FAILURE 1
899 BATTERY FAIL 1
900 PRI ETHERNET FAIL 1
901 SEC ETHERNET FAIL 1
902 EEPROM DATA ERROR 1
903 SRAM DATA ERROR 1
904 PROGRAM MEMORY 1
905 WATCHDOG ERROR 1
906 LOW ON MEMORY 1
907 REMOTE DEVICE OFF 1
908 DIRECT DEVICE OFF
909 DIRECT RING BREAK
910 ANY MINOR ERROR 1
911 ANY MAJOR ERROR 1
912 ANY SELF-TESTS 1
913 IRIG-B FAILURE 1
914 DSP ERROR 1
916 NO DSP INTERUPTS 1
917 UNIT NOT CALIBRATED 1
921 PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE 1
922 FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN 1
923 EQUIPMENT MISMATCH 1
925 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED 1
926 SYSTEM EXCEPTION 1
927 LATCHING OUT ERROR 1

E.2.2 BINARY/CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS

Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Table E–4: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
0 Virtual Input 1
1 Virtual Input 2
2 Virtual Input 3
3 Virtual Input 4
4 Virtual Input 5
5 Virtual Input 6
6 Virtual Input 7
7 Virtual Input 8 E
8 Virtual Input 9
9 Virtual Input 10
10 Virtual Input 11
11 Virtual Input 12
12 Virtual Input 13
13 Virtual Input 14
14 Virtual Input 15
15 Virtual Input 16
16 Virtual Input 17
17 Virtual Input 18
18 Virtual Input 19
19 Virtual Input 20
20 Virtual Input 21
21 Virtual Input 22
22 Virtual Input 23
23 Virtual Input 24
24 Virtual Input 25
25 Virtual Input 26
26 Virtual Input 27
27 Virtual Input 28
28 Virtual Input 29
29 Virtual Input 30
30 Virtual Input 31
31 Virtual Input 32

E.2.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is per-
formed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear),
10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 2
FROZEN COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
E Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 2
Table E–5: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX
0 Digital Counter 1
1 Digital Counter 2
2 Digital Counter 3
3 Digital Counter 4
4 Digital Counter 5
5 Digital Counter 6
6 Digital Counter 7
7 Digital Counter 8
8 Oscillography Trigger Count
9 Events Since Last Clear
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. C60 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit
integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative
counter values.

E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs
are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the
maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul-
letin 9809-001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to
data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
When using the C60 in DNP systems with limited memory, the Analog Input Points below may be replaced with a user-
definable list. This user-definable list uses the same settings as the Modbus User Map and can be configured with the Mod-
bus User Map settings. When used with DNP, each entry in the Modbus User Map represents the starting Modbus address
of a data item available as a DNP Analog Input point. To enable use of the Modbus User Map for DNP Analog Input points,
set the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting to Enabled (this setting is in the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !"
DNP PROTOCOL menu). The new DNP Analog points list can be checked via the “DNP Analog Input Points List” webpage,
accessible from the “Device Information menu” webpage.
After changing the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting, the relay must be powered off and then back on for the set-
ting to take effect.
NOTE
Only Source 1 data points are shown in the following table. If the NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting is increased,
data points for subsequent sources will be added to the list immediately following the Source 1 data points.
Units for Analog Input points are as follows:
• Current: A (amps) • Frequency: Hz (hertz)
• Voltage: V (volts) • Angle: degrees
E
• Real Power: W (watts) • Ohm Input: ohms
• Reactive Power: var (vars) • RTD Input: °C (degrees Celsius)
• Apparent Power: VA (volt-amps)
• Energy Wh, varh (watt-hours, var-hours)

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms
Default Class for all Points: 1
Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 1 of 4) Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 2 of 4)
POINT DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION
0 SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS 7 SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle
1 SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS 8 SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude
2 SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS 9 SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle
3 SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS 10 SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude
4 SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude 11 SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle
5 SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle 12 SRC 1 Ground Current RMS
6 SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 13 SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude

Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 3 of 4) Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 4 of 4)
POINT DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION
14 SRC 1 Ground Current Angle 63 SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor
15 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 64 SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor
16 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle 65 SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor
17 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 66 SRC 1 Positive Watthour
18 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle 67 SRC 1 Negative Watthour
19 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 68 SRC 1 Positive Varhour
20 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle 69 SRC 1 Negative Varhour
21 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude 70 SRC 1 Frequency
22 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle 71 SRC 1 Demand Ia
23 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS 72 SRC 1 Demand Ib
24 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS 73 SRC 1 Demand Ic
25 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS 74 SRC 1 Demand Watt
26 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude 75 SRC 1 Demand Var
27 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle 76 SRC 1 Demand Va
28 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude 77 Sens Dir Power 1 Actual
29 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle 78 Sens Dir Power 2 Actual
30 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude 79 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase A
31 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle 80 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase B
32 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS 81 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase C
33 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS 82 Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase A
E 34
35
SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS
SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude
83
84
Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase B
Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase C
36 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle 85 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage
37 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude 86 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency
38 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle 87 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase
39 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude 88 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage
40 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle 89 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency
41 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS 90 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase
42 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 91 Tracking Frequency
43 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle 92 FlexElement 1 Actual
44 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 93 FlexElement 2 Actual
45 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle 94 FlexElement 3 Actual
46 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude 95 FlexElement 4 Actual
47 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle 96 FlexElement 5 Actual
48 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 97 FlexElement 6 Actual
49 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle 98 FlexElement 7 Actual
50 SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power 99 FlexElement 8 Actual
51 SRC 1 Phase A Real Power 100 Current Setting Group
52 SRC 1 Phase B Real Power
53 SRC 1 Phase C Real Power
54 SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power
55 SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power
56 SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power
57 SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power
58 SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power
59 SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power
60 SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power
61 SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power
62 SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor

APPENDIX F F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F MISCELLANEOUSF.1CHANGE NOTES F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table F–1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N C60 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO
1601-0100-A1 1.6x 11 August 1999 ---
1601-0100-A2 1.8x 29 October 1999 URC-005
1601-0100-A3 1.8x 15 November 1999 URC-007
1601-0100-A4 2.0x 17 December 1999 URC-010
1601-0100-A5 2.2x 12 May 2000 URC-012
1601-0100-A6 2.2x 14 June 2000 URC-014
1601-0100-A6a 2.2x 28 June 2000 URC-014a
1601-0100-B1 2.4x 08 September 2000 URC-016
1601-0100-B2 2.4x 03 November 2000 URC-018
1601-0100-B3 2.6x 09 March 2001 URC-020
1601-0100-B4 2.8x 11 October 2001 URC-023
1601-0100-B5 2.9x 03 December 2001 URC-025
1601-0100-C1 3.0x 02 July 2002 URC-027
1601-0100-C2 3.1x 30 August 2002 URC-029
1601-0100-C3 3.0x 18 November 2002 URC-032
1601-0100-C4 3.1x 18 November 2002 URC-033
1601-0100-C5 3.0x 11 February 2003 URC-036
1601-0100-C6 3.1x 11 February 2003 URC-037
1601-0100-D1 3.2x 11 February 2003 URC-039
1601-0100-E1 3.3x 01 May 2003 URX-080
1601-0100-E2 3.3x 29 May 2003 URX-083
F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE C60 MANUAL F

Table F–2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION E2
PAGE PAGE CHANGE DESCRIPTION
(E1) (E2)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0100-E2.
4-4 4-4 Update Updated UR VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS figure to remove incorrect reference to User-
Programmable Pushbuttons.
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay F-1

F.1 CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX F
Table F–3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION E1

(D1) (E1)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0100-E1.
2-5 2-5 Update Added specifications for SELECTOR SWITCH, CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS, USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS, DIRECT INPUTS, DIRECT OUTPUTS, LATCHING OUTPUTS, and LED TEST.
3-11 3-11 Update Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to add the 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4L modules.
3-13 3-13 Update Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827719CX.
3-30 3-29 Add Added section for IEEE C37.94 Direct I/O communications.
5-9 5-9 Add Added CLEAR RELAY RECORDS section.

5-21 5-22 Update Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs section to include LED Test feature.
5-22 5-25 Add Added CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS section.
5-24 5-28 Update Updated USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS section.
5-25 5-30 Update Updated DIRECT I/O section to include CRC Alarm and Unreturned Messages Alarm features.
5-88 5-96 Add Added SELECTOR SWITCH section.
5-114 5-127 Add Added LATCHING OUTPUTS section.
5-124 5-139 Update Updated TESTING section.
7-3 7-3 Update Updated RELAY SELF-TESTS section.
B-8 B-8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP to reflect new firmware 3.3x features.
Table F–4: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION D1

(C6) (D1)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0100-D1.
F 1-6 1-6 Update Updated CONNECTING URPC WITH THE B30 section to reflect new URPC software.
2-2 2-2 Update Updated OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS table to include User-Programmable Self Tests.
5-13 5-13 Update Updated UCA/MMS PROTOCOL sub-section to include two new settings.
5-22 5-22 Add Added USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS section.
5-49 5-47 Update Updated FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table to include firmware revision 3.2x features.
5-91 5-91 Update Updated SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC to 827076A9.
5-95 5-92 Update Updated AUTORECLOSE element description and logic and timing diagrams.
5-113 5-110 Update Updated VT FUSE FAILURE SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827093AD.
7-3 7-3 Update Updated RELAY SELF-TESTS section.
B-9 B-8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP to reflect new firmware 3.2x features.
Table F–5: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION C6

(C4) (C6)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0100-C6.
2-3 2-3 Update Updated ORDER CODES table to add the 67 Digital I/O option.
2-4 2-4 Update Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table to add the 67 Module option.
3-11 3-11 Update Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to add the 67 module.
3-13 3-13 Update Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827719CV.
F-2 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

APPENDIX F F.1 CHANGE NOTES

(C3) (C5)
2-3 2-3 Update Updated ORDER CODES table to add the 67 Digital I/O option.
2-4 2-4 Update Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table to add the 67 Module option.
3-11 3-11 Update Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to add the 67 module.
3-13 3-13 Update Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827719CV

(C2) (C4)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0100-C4
2-3 2-3 Update Updated ORDER CODES table to remove the 63 and 64 Digital I/O options
2-4 2-4 Update Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table to remove the 63 and 64
Digital I/O options
3-11 3-11 Update Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to remove the 63 and 64 modules
3-13 3-13 Update Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827719CT
F-2 --- Remove Removed List of Tables and List of Figures sections.

(C1) (C3)
2-3 2-3 Update Updated ORDER CODES table to remove the 63 and 64 Digital I/O options F
2-4 2-4 Update Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table to remove the 63 and 64
Digital I/O options.
3-11 3-11 Update Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to remove the 63 and 64 modules.
3-13 3-13 Update Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827719CT.
8-1 --- Remove Removed COMMISSIONING chapter; setpoints tables are available from URPC or can be
downloaded from the GE Multilin website.
Table F–9: MAJOR CHANGES FOR MANUAL REVISION C2

(C1) (C2)
Title Title Update Manual part number from C1 to C2
5-35 5-35 Update Updated DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC diagram to 827092A3

5-95 5-95 Update Updated AUTORECLOSE section description
8- --- Remove Removed COMMISSIONING setpoints tables; will be available online only
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay F-3

F.2 ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX F
F.2ABBREVIATIONS F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
A..................... Ampere FREQ ............. Frequency

AC .................. Alternating Current FSK................ Frequency-Shift Keying
A/D ................. Analog to Digital FTP ................ File Transfer Protocol
AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity FxE ................ FlexElement™
AMP ............... Ampere FWD............... Forward
ANG ............... Angle
ANSI............... American National Standards Institute G .................... Generator
AR .................. Automatic Reclosure GE.................. General Electric
ASDU ............. Application-layer Service Data Unit GND............... Ground
ASYM ............. Asymmetry GNTR............. Generator
AUTO ............. Automatic GOOSE.......... General Object Oriented Substation Event
AUX................ Auxiliary GPS ............... Global Positioning System
AVG ................ Average
HARM ............ Harmonic / Harmonics
BER................ Bit Error Rate HCT ............... High Current Time
BF................... Breaker Fail HGF ............... High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT)
BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate HIZ ................. High-Impedance and Arcing Ground
BKR................ Breaker HMI ................ Human-Machine Interface
BLK ................ Block HTTP ............. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
BLKG.............. Blocking HYB ............... Hybrid
BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic
BRKR ............. Breaker I...................... Instantaneous
I_0.................. Zero Sequence current
CAP................ Capacitor I_1.................. Positive Sequence current
CC .................. Coupling Capacitor I_2.................. Negative Sequence current
CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer IA ................... Phase A current
CFG................ Configure / Configurable IAB ................. Phase A minus B current
.CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files IB ................... Phase B current
CHK................ Check IBC................. Phase B minus C current
CHNL ............. Channel IC ................... Phase C current
CLS ................ Close ICA................. Phase C minus A current
CLSD.............. Closed ID ................... Identification
CMND ............ Command IED................. Intelligent Electronic Device
CMPRSN........ Comparison IEC................. International Electrotechnical Commission
CO.................. Contact Output IEEE............... Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
COM............... Communication IG ................... Ground (not residual) current
COMM............ Communications Igd.................. Differential Ground current
COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison IN ................... CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input
CONN............. Connection INC SEQ ........ Incomplete Sequence
CONT ............. Continuous, Contact INIT ................ Initiate
CO-ORD......... Coordination INST............... Instantaneous
F CPU................ Central Processing Unit
CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code
INV................. Inverse
I/O .................. Input/Output
CRT, CRNT .... Current IOC ................ Instantaneous Overcurrent
CSA................ Canadian Standards Association IOV................. Instantaneous Overvoltage
CT .................. Current Transformer IRIG ............... Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
CVT ................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer ISO................. International Standards Organization
IUV................. Instantaneous Undervoltage
D/A ................. Digital to Analog
DC (dc)........... Direct Current K0 .................. Zero Sequence Current Compensation
DD .................. Disturbance Detector kA................... kiloAmpere
DFLT .............. Default kV................... kiloVolt
DGNST........... Diagnostics
DI.................... Digital Input LED................ Light Emitting Diode
DIFF ............... Differential LEO................ Line End Open
DIR ................. Directional LFT BLD ........ Left Blinder
DISCREP ....... Discrepancy LOOP............. Loopback
DIST ............... Distance LPU................ Line Pickup
DMD ............... Demand LRA................ Locked-Rotor Current
DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol LTC ................ Load Tap-Changer
DPO ............... Dropout
DSP................ Digital Signal Processor M.................... Machine
dt .................... Rate of Change mA ................. MilliAmpere
DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip MAG............... Magnitude
DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip MAN............... Manual / Manually
MAX ............... Maximum
ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment MIC ................ Model Implementation Conformance
EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute MIN ................ Minimum, Minutes
.EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files MMI................ Man Machine Interface
EXT ................ Extension, External MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification
MRT ............... Minimum Response Time
F ..................... Field MSG............... Message
FAIL................ Failure MTA................ Maximum Torque Angle
FD .................. Fault Detector MTR ............... Motor
FDH................ Fault Detector high-set MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set MVA_A ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)
FLA................. Full Load Current MVA_B ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)
FO .................. Fiber Optic MVA_C........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)

F.2 ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX F
MVAR ............. MegaVar (total 3-phase) SAT ................ CT Saturation

MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A) SBO ............... Select Before Operate
MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B) SCADA .......... Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C) SEC ............... Secondary
MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour SEL ................ Select / Selector / Selection
MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase) SENS ............. Sensitive
MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A) SEQ ............... Sequence
MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B) SIR................. Source Impedance Ratio
MW_C ............ MegaWatt (phase C) SNTP ............. Simple Network Time Protocol
MWH .............. MegaWatt-Hour SRC ............... Source
SSB................ Single Side Band
N..................... Neutral SSEL.............. Session Selector
N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable STATS............ Statistics
NEG ............... Negative SUPN............. Supervision
NMPLT ........... Nameplate SUPV ............. Supervise / Supervision
NOM............... Nominal SV .................. Supervision, Service
NSAP ............. Network Service Access Protocol SYNC............. Synchrocheck
NTR................ Neutral SYNCHCHK... Synchrocheck
O .................... Over T..................... Time, transformer

OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent TC .................. Thermal Capacity
O/P, Op........... Output TCP................ Transmission Control Protocol
OP .................. Operate TCU ............... Thermal Capacity Used
OPER ............. Operate TD MULT........ Time Dial Multiplier
OPERATG ...... Operating TEMP............. Temperature
O/S ................. Operating System TFTP.............. Trivial File Transfer Protocol
OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect THD ............... Total Harmonic Distortion
OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking TMR ............... Timer
OUT................ Output TOC ............... Time Overcurrent
OV .................. Overvoltage TOV................ Time Overvoltage
OVERFREQ ... Overfrequency TRANS........... Transient
OVLD ............. Overload TRANSF ........ Transfer
TSEL.............. Transport Selector
P..................... Phase TUC ............... Time Undercurrent
PC .................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer TUV................ Time Undervoltage
PCNT ............. Percent TX (Tx)........... Transmit, Transmitter
PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase)
PF_A .............. Power Factor (phase A) U .................... Under
PF_B .............. Power Factor (phase B) UC.................. Undercurrent
PF_C .............. Power Factor (phase C) UCA ............... Utility Communications Architecture
PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop UDP ............... User Datagram Protocol
PHS................ Phase UL .................. Underwriters Laboratories
PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance UNBAL........... Unbalance
F Statement
PKP ................ Pickup
PLC ................ Power Line Carrier
UR.................. Universal Relay
URC ............... Universal Recloser Control
.URS .............. Filename extension for settings files
POS................ Positive UV.................. Undervoltage
POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip
PRESS ........... Pressure V/Hz ............... Volts per Hertz
PRI ................. Primary V_0 ................ Zero Sequence voltage
PROT ............. Protection V_1 ................ Positive Sequence voltage
PSEL .............. Presentation Selector V_2 ................ Negative Sequence voltage
pu ................... Per Unit VA .................. Phase A voltage
PUIB............... Pickup Current Block VAB ................ Phase A to B voltage
PUIT ............... Pickup Current Trip VAG................ Phase A to Ground voltage
PUSHBTN ...... Pushbutton VARH ............. Var-hour voltage
PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip VB .................. Phase B voltage
PWM .............. Pulse Width Modulated VBA................ Phase B to A voltage
PWR............... Power VBG ............... Phase B to Ground voltage
VC.................. Phase C voltage
QUAD............. Quadrilateral VCA ............... Phase C to A voltage
VCG ............... Phase C to Ground voltage
R..................... Rate, Reverse VF .................. Variable Frequency
RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle VIBR .............. Vibration
REF ................ Reference VT .................. Voltage Transformer
REM ............... Remote VTFF.............. Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
REV................ Reverse VTLOS ........... Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal
RI.................... Reclose Initiate
RIP ................. Reclose In Progress WDG .............. Winding
RGT BLD ........ Right Blinder WH................. Watt-hour
ROD ............... Remote Open Detector w/ opt ............. With Option
RST ................ Reset WRT............... With Respect To
RSTR ............. Restrained
RTD ................ Resistance Temperature Detector X .................... Reactance
RTU ................ Remote Terminal Unit XDUCER........ Transducer
RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver XFMR............. Transformer
s ..................... second Z..................... Impedance, Zone

S..................... Sensitive

F.3 WARRANTY APPENDIX F
F.3WARRANTY F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from
defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from
date of shipment from factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay
providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation
charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under war-
ranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident,
incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered
outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
F GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for
expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard
Conditions of Sale.

Index
INDEX
BREAKER ARCING
Numerics FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-53
BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
10BASE-F clearing .................................................................... 5-9, 7-1
communications options ................................................. 3-17 logic ............................................................................ 5-122
description .................................................................... 3-19 measurement ............................................................... 5-122
interface ........................................................................ 3-28 settings ....................................................................... 5-121
redundant option ........................................................... 3-17 BREAKER CONTROL
settings ......................................................................... 5-11 actual values ................................................................. 6-20
specifications .................................................................. 2-9 control of 2 breakers ........................................................ 4-9
description ....................................................................... 4-8
dual breaker logic .......................................................... 5-43
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-53
A settings ......................................................................... 5-41
BREAKER FAILURE
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................... F-4
description ..................................................................... 5-71
AC CURRENT INPUTS .......................................2-8, 3-8, 5-36
determination ................................................................. 5-72
AC VOLTAGE INPUTS ................................................ 2-8, 3-9
ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-10, 4-12
logic .................................................... 5-75, 5-76, 5-77, 5-78
ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................... 5-69
main path sequence ....................................................... 5-72
ACTUAL VALUES
settings ................................................................ 5-70, 5-73
maintenance ................................................................. 6-20
specifications ................................................................... 2-5
metering .......................................................................... 6-8
BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ...................................... 5-5
product information ........................................................ 6-21
BRIGHTNESS .................................................................... 5-8
records ......................................................................... 6-17
status .............................................................................. 6-3
ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-24
ALTITUDE ....................................................................... 2-10 C
ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS ................................................... 2-1
APPARENT POWER ................................................. 2-7, 6-13 C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS .................................... 3-29, 3-30
APPLICATION EXAMPLES CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-11
breaker trip circuit integrity .......................................... 5-118 CHANGES TO MANUAL ...................................... F-1, F-2, F-3
contact inputs .............................................................. 5-125 CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-21
sensitive directional power ............................................. 5-93 CHANNELS
APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-11 banks ................................................................... 5-36, 5-37
ARCHITECTURE ............................................................. 5-51 CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ......................... 5-116
ARCING CURRENT ....................................................... 5-121 CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-11
AUTORECLOSE CLEAR RECORDS ............................................. 5-9, 7-1, B-37
actual values ................................................................... 6-4 CLOCK
description .................................................................. 5-106 setting date and time ........................................................ 7-2
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-53 settings ......................................................................... 5-16
logic ....................................................... 5-112, 5-113, 5-114 COMMANDS MENU ............................................................ 7-1
sequence .................................................................... 5-115 COMMUNICATIONS
settings ................... 5-105, 5-107, 5-108, 5-109, 5-110, 5-111 10BASE-F ................................................... 3-17, 3-19, 5-11
specifications .................................................................. 2-6 channel ......................................................................... 3-21
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE connecting to the UR ................................................. 1-6, 1-7
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-53 CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2
logic .............................................................................. 5-91 dnp ................................................................ 5-12, 5-16, E-1
settings ......................................................................... 5-91 G.703 ............................................................................ 3-24
specifications .................................................................. 2-5 half duplex ...................................................................... B-1
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE HTTP ............................................................................. 5-14
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-53 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol............................................... 5-15
logic .............................................................................. 5-90 inter-relay communications ............................................. 2-10
settings ......................................................................... 5-90 Modbus .................................................. 5-11, 5-16, B-1, B-3
specifications .................................................................. 2-5 network ......................................................................... 5-11
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ....................................... 3-9 overview .......................................................................... 1-8
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-12 RS232 ........................................................................... 3-17
RS485 ......................................................... 3-17, 3-18, 5-10
settings ...................................... 5-11, 5-12, 5-14, 5-15, 5-16
specifications .......................................................... 2-9, 2-10
B UCA/MMS ............5-14, 5-41, 5-126, 5-130, 5-131, 5-132, C-1
web server ..................................................................... 5-14
BANKS ............................................................. 5-6, 5-36, 5-37
COMTRADE ............................................................... B-6, B-7
BATTERY FAIL .................................................................. 7-4
CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-11
BATTERY TAB ................................................................. 1-10
CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-1
INDEX
BINARY INPUT POINTS ..................................................... E-8

CONTACT INPUTS
BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ............................................... E-13
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 1-3
dry connections ............................................................. 3-15
BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-4
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay i

INDEX
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-55 DEFINITE TIME CURVE .......................................... 5-83, 5-87
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9 DEMAND METERING
module assignments ...................................................... 3-11 actual values ..................................................................6-13
settings ....................................................................... 5-124 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-12
specifications................................................................... 2-8 settings ..........................................................................5-20
thresholds ................................................................... 5-124 specifications .................................................................. 2-7
wet connections ............................................................. 3-15 DEMAND RECORDS
wiring ............................................................................ 3-13 clearing .................................................................... 5-9, 7-2
CONTACT OUTPUTS DESIGN ............................................................................ 1-3
actual values ................................................................... 6-4 DEVICE ID ..................................................................... 5-130
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-55 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT .......................................... E-1
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ..........................................2-11, 3-7
module assignments ...................................................... 3-11 DIGITAL COUNTER
settings ....................................................................... 5-127 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-54
wiring ............................................................................ 3-13 DIGITAL COUNTERS
CONTROL ELEMENTS ..................................................... 5-95 actual values ................................................................... 6-5
CONTROL POWER logic ............................................................................ 5-120
description....................................................................... 3-8 Modbus registers ............................................................. B-9
specifications................................................................... 2-9 settings ........................................................................ 5-119
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS DIGITAL ELEMENT
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-53 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-54
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-36 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
settings ......................................................................... 5-25 application example ...................................................... 5-117
specifications................................................................... 2-6 logic ............................................................................ 5-116
COUNTERS settings ........................................................................ 5-116
actual values ................................................................... 6-5 DIGITAL INPUTS
settings ....................................................................... 5-119 see entry for CONTACT INPUTS
CRC ALARM .................................................................... 5-34 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2 see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS
CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ......................................... 2-9, 3-8 DIMENSIONS .................................................................... 3-1
CSA APPROVAL .............................................................. 2-11 DIRECT DEVICES
CT BANKS actual values ................................................................... 6-7
settings ......................................................................... 5-36 DIRECT I/O
CT INPUTS ........................................................ 3-9, 5-6, 5-36 see also DIRECT INPUTS and DIRECT OUTPUTS
CT WIRING ........................................................................ 3-9 application example ........................................... 5-134, 5-135
CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-36 configuration examples ........................ 5-22, 5-30, 5-34, 5-35
CURRENT DEMAND ........................................................ 5-20 settings ..................................... 5-22, 5-30, 5-34, 5-35, 5-133
CURRENT METERING DIRECT INPUTS
actual values ................................................................. 6-11 actual values ................................................................... 6-6
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-10 application example ........................................... 5-134, 5-135
specifications................................................................... 2-7 clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2
CURVES settings ........................................................................ 5-133
definite time.......................................................... 5-83, 5-87 specifications .................................................................. 2-8
FlexCurves™ ........................................................ 5-44, 5-83 DIRECT OUTPUTS
I2T ................................................................................ 5-83 application example ........................................... 5-134, 5-135
IAC ............................................................................... 5-82 clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2
IEC ............................................................................... 5-81 settings ........................................................................ 5-134
IEEE ............................................................................. 5-80 DIRECTIONAL POWER
inverse time undervoltage .............................................. 5-87 see entry for SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
types ............................................................................. 5-79 DISPLAY ..............................................................1-8, 4-8, 5-8
DISTURBANCE DETECTOR
FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-54
internal ..........................................................................5-39
D DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................. 5-132
DNP COMMUNICATIONS
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS .............................................B-44
binary counters ............................................................. E-14
DATA LOGGER
binary input points ........................................................... E-8
clearing .................................................................... 5-9, 7-1
binary output points ....................................................... E-13
Modbus ................................................................... B-6, B-7
control relay output blocks ............................................. E-13
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-10
device profile document ................................................... E-1
settings ......................................................................... 5-20
frozen counters ............................................................. E-14
specifications................................................................... 2-7
implementation table ....................................................... E-4
DATE ................................................................................. 7-2
settings ..........................................................................5-12
DCMA INPUTS ................................................................. 6-16
user map .......................................................................5-13
INDEX
settings ....................................................................... 5-137

DUPLEX, HALF ................................................................. B-1
specifications................................................................... 2-8
ii C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

INDEX
actual values ................................................................. 6-15

E direction ........................................................................ 5-66
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ....................................... 2-11 hysteresis ...................................................................... 5-66
ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-3 pickup ........................................................................... 5-66
ENERGY METERING scheme logic ................................................................. 5-65
actual values ................................................................. 6-13 settings ....................................................... 5-64, 5-65, 5-67
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-12 specifications ................................................................... 2-6
specifications .................................................................. 2-7 FLEXLOGIC™
ENERGY METERING, CLEARING ............................... 5-9, 7-2 editing with URPC ............................................................ 4-1
EQUATIONS equation editor ............................................................... 5-63
definite time curve .................................................5-83, 5-87 evaluation ...................................................................... 5-58
FlexCurve™ .................................................................. 5-83 example ............................................................... 5-51, 5-58
I²t curves ....................................................................... 5-83 example equation ........................................................... 5-95
IAC curves .................................................................... 5-82 gate characteristics ........................................................ 5-57
IEC curves .................................................................... 5-81 operands .............................................................. 5-52, 5-53
IEEE curves .................................................................. 5-80 operators ....................................................................... 5-57
ETHERNET rules .............................................................................. 5-57
actual values ................................................................... 6-6 specifications ................................................................... 2-6
configuration ................................................................... 1-6 timers ............................................................................ 5-63
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-10 worksheet ...................................................................... 5-59
settings ......................................................................... 5-11 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR .................................. 5-63
specifications .................................................................. 2-9 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS .................................................... 5-63
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS ............................................. 4-5 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................ 5-139
EVENT RECORDER FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................... 5-140
actual values ................................................................. 6-19 FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-19
clearing ........................................................................... 5-9 FORM-A RELAY
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7 high impedance circuits .................................................. 3-11
specifications .................................................................. 2-7 outputs ........................................................ 3-10, 3-11, 3-15
with URPC ...................................................................... 4-2 specifications ................................................................... 2-9
EVENTS SETTING ............................................................. 5-4 FORM-C RELAY
EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................. B-5 outputs ................................................................. 3-10, 3-15
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
FREQUENCY
actual values ................................................................. 6-14
F settings ......................................................................... 5-38
FREQUENCY METERING
F485 ................................................................................. 1-8
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-12
FACEPLATE ...................................................................... 3-1
specifications ................................................................... 2-7
FACEPLATE PANELS ................................................. 4-4, 4-7
values ........................................................................... 6-14
FAST FORM-C RELAY ....................................................... 2-9
FREQUENCY TRACKING ................................................. 5-38
FAST TRANSIENT TESTING ............................................ 2-11
FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-37
FAULT LOCATOR
FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-4
logic .............................................................................. 6-18
FUSE ................................................................................. 2-8
operation ....................................................................... 6-17
FUSE FAILURE
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
see VT FUSE FAILURE
FAULT REPORT
actual values ................................................................. 6-17
clearing .................................................................... 5-9, 7-1
settings ......................................................................... 5-17 G
FAULT TYPE ................................................................... 6-17
FAX NUMBERS ................................................................. 1-1 G.703 .................................................... 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-28
FEATURES ........................................................................ 2-1 GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................... 5-82
FIRMWARE REVISION .................................................... 6-21 GOMSFE .......................................................................... C-1
FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2 GOOSE ................ 5-14, 5-130, 5-131, 5-132, 5-133, 5-134, 6-5
FLASH MESSAGES ........................................................... 5-8 GROUND CURRENT METERING ...................................... 6-11
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS GROUND TOC
actual values ................................................................... 6-5 specifications ................................................................... 2-5
Modbus registers ............................................................. B-9 GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................... 5-69
settings ......................................................................... 5-28
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
FLEXCURVES™
equation ........................................................................ 5-83 H
settings ......................................................................... 5-44 HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
INDEX
HTTP PROTOCOL ............................................................ 5-14

table ............................................................................. 5-44 HUMIDITY ........................................................................ 2-10
FLEXELEMENTS™
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay iii

INDEX
specifications .................................................................. 2-6

I LINE
settings ..........................................................................5-40
I2T CURVES .................................................................... 5-83 LINE LENGTH ..................................................................5-40
IAC CURVES ................................................................... 5-82 LINK POWER BUDGET .....................................................2-10
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL LOGIC GATES .................................................................5-57
interoperability document ................................................ D-1 LOST PASSWORD ............................................................ 5-7
points list ...................................................................... D-10
settings ......................................................................... 5-15
IEC CURVES ................................................................... 5-81
IED .................................................................................... 1-2 M
IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ........................... 3-29, 3-30 MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-2
IEEE CURVES ................................................................. 5-80 MANUFACTURING DATE .................................................6-21
IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................... 1-4 MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ..................................... B-44
IN SERVICE INDICATOR .......................................... 1-10, 7-3 MENU HEIRARCHY ...................................................1-9, 4-10
INPUTS MENU NAVIGATION ........................................... 1-9, 4-9, 4-10
AC current .............................................................. 2-8, 5-36 METERING
AC voltage ............................................................. 2-8, 5-37 conventions ............................................................. 6-8, 6-9
contact inputs .................................... 2-8, 3-13, 5-124, 5-139 current ............................................................................ 2-7
dcmA inputs .................................................2-8, 3-16, 5-137 demand .......................................................................... 2-7
direct inputs..................................................................... 2-8 frequency ........................................................................ 2-7
IRIG-B .................................................................... 2-8, 3-19 power ............................................................................. 2-7
remote inputs ............................................. 2-8, 5-130, 5-131 voltage............................................................................ 2-7
RTD inputs ...................................................2-8, 3-16, 5-138 METERING CONVENTIONS .............................................. 6-9
virtual .......................................................................... 5-126 MIC ................................................................................... C-3
INSPECTION CHECKLIST .................................................. 1-1 MMS
INSTALLATION see entry for UCA/MMS
communications ............................................................. 3-17 MODBUS
contact inputs/outputs ...................................3-11, 3-13, 3-14 data logger .............................................................. B-6, B-7
CT inputs ......................................................................... 3-9 event recorder ................................................................. B-7
RS485 ........................................................................... 3-18 exception responses ........................................................ B-5
settings ......................................................................... 5-35 execute operation ............................................................ B-4
VT inputs ......................................................................... 3-8 flex state parameters ......................................................5-28
INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-3
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries function code 05h ............................................................ B-4
INSULATION RESISTANCE .............................................. 2-11 function code 06h ............................................................ B-4
INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................. 1-2 function code 10h ............................................................ B-5
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS .................................. 2-10 introduction ..................................................................... B-1
INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2 memory map data formats ............................................. B-44
INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................... 5-87 obtaining files ................................................................. B-6
IOC oscillography ................................................................... B-6
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries passwords ...................................................................... B-7
IP ADDRESS ................................................................... 5-11 read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-3
IRIG-B settings ................................................................. 5-11, 5-16
connection ..................................................................... 3-19 store multiple settings ..................................................... B-5
settings ......................................................................... 5-16 store single setting .......................................................... B-4
specifications................................................................... 2-8 supported function codes ................................................. B-3
ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ............................................... 2-11 user map .......................................................................5-16
user map Modbus registers .............................................. B-9
MODEL INFORMATION ....................................................6-21
K MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER .........................................6-21
MODULES
KEYPAD ..................................................................... 1-9, 4-8 communications .............................................................3-17
contact inputs/outputs .................................. 3-11, 3-13, 3-14
CT .................................................................................. 3-9
CT/VT ...................................................................... 3-8, 5-6
L direct inputs/outputs .......................................................3-22
insertion .......................................................................... 3-4
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-2
order codes ..................................................................... 2-4
LASER MODULE .............................................................. 3-22
ordering .......................................................................... 2-4
LATCHING OUTPUTS
power supply ................................................................... 3-8
application example ...........................................5-128, 5-129
transducer I/O ................................................................3-16
settings ....................................................................... 5-127
VT .................................................................................. 3-9
specifications................................................................... 2-9
INDEX
withdrawal ...................................................................... 3-4

LED INDICATORS ................................ 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 5-24, B-8
MONITORING ELEMENTS .............................................. 5-121
LED TEST
MOUNTING ....................................................................... 3-1
FlexLogic™ operand ...................................................... 5-56
settings ......................................................................... 5-22
iv C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

INDEX
PC SOFTWARE
N see entry for URPC
PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS ............................................... 5-87
NAMEPLATE ..................................................................... 1-1 PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-3
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE PHASE ANGLE METERING ................................................ 6-9
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-54 PHASE CURRENT METERING ......................................... 6-11
logic .............................................................................. 5-89 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
settings ......................................................................... 5-89 see entry for PHASE IOC
specifications .................................................................. 2-5 PHASE IOC
NEUTRAL TOC FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-54
specifications .................................................................. 2-5 logic .............................................................................. 5-86
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES specifications ................................................................... 2-5
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-54 PHASE ROTATION .......................................................... 5-38
settings ......................................................................... 5-68 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT
specifications .................................................................. 2-6 see entry for PHASE TOC
PHASE TOC
logic .............................................................................. 5-85
O settings ......................................................................... 5-84
specifications ................................................................... 2-5
ONE SHOTS .................................................................... 5-57
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-10
OPERATING TIMES ........................................................... 2-5
logic .............................................................................. 5-88
ORDER CODES ..................................................2-3, 6-21, 7-2
settings ......................................................................... 5-88
ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-2
specifications ................................................................... 2-5
ORDERING ................................................................ 2-3, 2-4
PHONE NUMBERS ............................................................. 1-1
OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................. 2-11
PICS ................................................................................. C-2
OSCILLOGRAPHY
POWER METERING
actual values ................................................................. 6-19
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-11
clearing .................................................................... 5-9, 7-1
specifications ................................................................... 2-7
Modbus ........................................................................... B-6
values ........................................................................... 6-12
settings ......................................................................... 5-18
POWER SUPPLY
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
description ....................................................................... 3-8
with URPC ...................................................................... 4-2
low range ........................................................................ 2-8
OUTPUTS
specifications ................................................................... 2-8
contact outputs ........................................... 3-11, 3-13, 5-127
PRODUCT INFORMATION ............................................... 6-21
control power .................................................................. 2-9
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-8
critical failure relay .......................................................... 2-9
PRODUCT SETUP ............................................................. 5-7
Fast Form-C relay ........................................................... 2-9
PRODUCTION TESTS ...................................................... 2-11
Form-A relay ......................................... 2-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-15
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-3
Form-C relay .................................................. 2-9, 3-10, 3-15
PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-3
latching outputs .....................................................2-9, 5-127
PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE
remote outputs .................................................. 5-132, 5-133
see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS
virtual outputs ............................................................. 5-129
OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES ...................................... 5-79
OVERCURRENT CURVES
definite time .................................................................. 5-83 R
FlexCurves™ ................................................................ 5-83
I2T ................................................................................ 5-83 REACTIVE POWER ................................................... 2-7, 6-12
IAC ............................................................................... 5-82 REAL POWER ........................................................... 2-7, 6-12
IEC ............................................................................... 5-81 REAL TIME CLOCK .......................................................... 5-16
IEEE ............................................................................. 5-80 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ...................................... 3-5
OVERVOLTAGE RECLOSER CURVES .............................................. 5-47, 5-83
auxiliary ................................................................. 2-5, 5-91 RECLOSING
neutral ................................................................... 2-5, 5-89 description ................................................................... 5-106
logic ....................................................... 5-112, 5-113, 5-114
sequence ..................................................................... 5-115
settings .................. 5-105, 5-107, 5-108, 5-109, 5-110, 5-111
P REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-17
RELAY ACTIVATION ........................................................ 4-12
PANEL CUTOUT ................................................................ 3-1
RELAY ARCHITECTURE .................................................. 5-51
PASSWORD SECURITY .................................................... 5-7
RELAY MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 7-2
PASSWORDS
RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-35
changing ....................................................................... 4-13
RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ............................................ 1-10
lost password ......................................................... 4-13, 5-7
REMOTE DEVICES
INDEX
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7

actual values ................................................................... 6-4
overview ....................................................................... 1-10
device ID ..................................................................... 5-130
security ........................................................................... 5-7
settings ........................................................................... 5-7
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay v

INDEX
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9 SIGNAL SOURCES

settings ....................................................................... 5-130 description ...................................................................... 5-4
statistics .......................................................................... 6-5 metering ........................................................................6-11
REMOTE INPUTS settings ..........................................................................5-39
actual values ................................................................... 6-3 SIGNAL TYPES ................................................................. 1-3
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-56 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ............................................. 2-1, 2-2
settings ....................................................................... 5-131 SITE LIST, CREATING ...................................................... 4-1
specifications................................................................... 2-8 SNTP PROTOCOL
REMOTE OUTPUTS settings ..........................................................................5-16
DNA-1 bit pair .............................................................. 5-132 SOFTWARE
UserSt-1 bit pair ................................................5-133, 5-134 see entry for URPC
REPLACEMENT MODULES ................................................ 2-4 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4
RESETTING .......................................................... 5-56, 5-133 SOFTWARE, PC
REVISION HISTORY ..........................................................F-1 see entry for URPC
RFI SUSCEPTIBILITY ...................................................... 2-11 SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES ......................................5-87
RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-11 SOURCES
RMS CURRENT ................................................................. 2-7 description ...................................................................... 5-4
RMS VOLTAGE .................................................................. 2-7 example use of ...............................................................5-39
ROLLING DEMAND .......................................................... 5-21 metering ........................................................................6-11
RS232 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-10
configuration ................................................................... 1-6 settings ................................................................. 5-38, 5-39
specifications................................................................... 2-9 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 2-5
wiring ............................................................................ 3-17 ST TYPE CONNECTORS ..................................................3-19
RS422 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ........................................... F-4
configuration ................................................................. 3-26 STATUS INDICATORS ....................................................... 4-5
timing ............................................................................ 3-27 SURGE IMMUNITY ...........................................................2-11
two-channel application .................................................. 3-26 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING ...................... 6-9
with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-28 SYNCHROCHECK
RS485 actual values ..................................................................6-14
communications ............................................................. 3-17 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-55
description..................................................................... 3-18 logic ............................................................................ 5-104
specifications................................................................... 2-9 settings ............................................................. 5-101, 5-102
RTD INPUTS specifications .................................................................. 2-6
actual values ................................................................. 6-16 SYSTEM FREQUENCY .....................................................5-37
settings ....................................................................... 5-138 SYSTEM SETUP ..............................................................5-36
specifications................................................................... 2-8
T
S
TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................ 7-3
SALES OFFICE .................................................................. 1-1 TARGET SETTING ............................................................ 5-4
SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-4 TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-3
SELECTOR SWITCH TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................5-14
actual values ................................................................... 6-5 TEMPERATURE, OPERATING ..........................................2-10
application example ..................................................... 5-100 TERMINALS ...................................................................... 3-5
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-55 TESTING
logic ............................................................................ 5-100 force contact inputs ...................................................... 5-139
settings ......................................................................... 5-96 force contact outputs .................................................... 5-140
specifications................................................................... 2-6 lamp test ......................................................................... 7-2
timing ................................................................... 5-98, 5-99 self-test error messages .................................................. 7-3
SELF-TESTS THERMAL DEMAND CHARACTERISTIC ...........................5-21
description....................................................................... 7-3 TIME ................................................................................. 7-2
error messages ................................................................ 7-4 TIME OVERCURRENT
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-56 see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-8 TIMERS ...........................................................................5-63
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER TOC
actual values ................................................................. 6-15 phase ............................................................................5-84
logic .............................................................................. 5-94 specifications .................................................................. 2-5
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-10 TRACKING FREQUENCY .................................................6-15
settings ................................................................ 5-92, 5-94 TRANSDUCER I/O
specifications................................................................... 2-5 actual values ..................................................................6-16
SENSTIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER settings ............................................................. 5-137, 5-138
characteristic ................................................................. 5-93 specifications .................................................................. 2-8
INDEX
SERIAL NUMBER ............................................................ 6-21 wiring .............................................................................3-16

SERIAL PORTS ............................................................... 5-10 TRIP LEDs .......................................................................5-24
SETTING GROUPS .........................................5-55, 5-69, 5-95 TROUBLE INDICATOR ..............................................1-10, 7-3
SETTINGS, CHANGING ................................................... 4-11 TYPE TESTS ....................................................................2-11
vi C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

INDEX
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM .............................................. 3-6 settings ......................................................................... 5-26

specifications ................................................................... 2-6
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
settings ......................................................................... 5-25
U USERST-1 BIT PAIR ........................................... 5-133, 5-134
UCA SBO TIMER
for breaker control ......................................................... 5-41
for virtual inputs .......................................................... 5-126 V
UCA/MMS
device ID ..................................................................... 5-130 VAR-HOURS ............................................................. 2-7, 6-13
DNA2 assignments ...................................................... 5-132 VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-11
MIC .................................................................................C-3 VIRTUAL INPUTS
overview .........................................................................C-1 actual values ................................................................... 6-3
PICS ...............................................................................C-2 commands ....................................................................... 7-1
remote device settings ................................................. 5-130 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-56
remote inputs .............................................................. 5-131 logic ............................................................................ 5-126
reporting .........................................................................C-6 Modbus registers ..................................................... B-8, B-9
SBO timeout ........................................................ 5-41, 5-126 settings ....................................................................... 5-126
settings ......................................................................... 5-14 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
UserSt-1 bit pair ................................................ 5-133, 5-134 actual values ................................................................... 6-4
UL APPROVAL ................................................................ 2-11 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-56
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS settings ....................................................................... 5-129
resetting ................................................................... 5-9, 7-2 VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................ 5-37
UNDERVOLTAGE VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ................................................... 2-11
auxiliary .......................................................................... 2-5 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ..................................................... 5-87
phase ..................................................................... 2-5, 5-88 VOLTAGE METERING
UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS ............................ 5-87 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-11
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED .............................................. 5-35 specifications ................................................................... 2-7
UNPACKING THE RELAY .................................................. 1-1 values ........................................................................... 6-11
UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM ................................. 5-35 VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC ....................... 5-84
UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-2 VT FUSE FAILURE
URPC logic ............................................................................ 5-123
creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1 settings ....................................................................... 5-123
event recorder ................................................................. 4-2 VT INPUTS ........................................................ 3-9, 5-6, 5-37
firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2 VT WIRING ........................................................................ 3-9
installation ...................................................................... 1-5 VTFF
introduction ..................................................................... 4-1 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-55
oscillography ................................................................... 4-2 see VT FUSE FAILURE
overview ......................................................................... 4-1
requirements ................................................................... 1-5
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
example ........................................................................ 5-30 W
invoking and scrolling .................................................... 5-28
WARRANTY .......................................................................F-6
Modbus registers ............................................................. B-9
WATT-HOURS .......................................................... 2-7, 6-13
settings .................................................................5-28, 5-30
WEB SERVER PROTOCOL .............................................. 5-14
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
WEBSITE ........................................................................... 1-1
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................. 3-6
custom labeling ............................................................... 4-7
defaults ........................................................................... 4-6
description ...................................................................... 4-6
settings ......................................................................... 5-24 Z
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE .................................. 3-9
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-56
INDEX
GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay vii

INDEX
INDEX
viii C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

C60 Breaker Management Relay: UR Series Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C60 Breaker Management Relay: UR Series Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C60 Breaker Management Relay: UR Series Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title Page

C60 Breaker Management Relay

Manual P/N: 1601-0100-E2 (GEK-106406A)

1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay v

3.2.9 IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-19

4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC INTERFACE

5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

vi C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE ............................................................................... 5-58

6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay vii

6.3.5 FLEXELEMENTS™ ..........................................................................................6-15

7. COMMANDS AND 7.1 COMMANDS

A. FLEXANALOG A.1 PARAMETER LIST

B. MODBUS B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

C. UCA/MMS C.1 OVERVIEW

viii C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

D. IEC 60870-5-104 D.1 OVERVIEW

E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

F. MISCELLANEOUS F.1 CHANGE NOTES

GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay ix

x C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST

C60 RATINGS: Model: C60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A

Breaker Management Relay 000

Figure 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:

GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay 1-1

1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR

1-2 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

Input Elements CPU Module Output Elements

Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay 1-3

Figure 1–3: UR SCAN OPERATION

1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE

1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS

1-4 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

1.3URPC® SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS

Refer to the following procedure to install the URPC software:

GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay 1-5

1.3.3 CONNECTING URPC® WITH THE C60

a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION

b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION

1-6 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY

Expand the Site List by double-clicking

Communications Status Indicator

GE Multilin C60 Breaker Management Relay 1-7

1.4UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING

Figure 1–4: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS

1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY

1-8 C60 Breaker Management Relay GE Multilin

1.5USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD

1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION